SlideShare a Scribd company logo
The eLearning Guild’s
Handbook of
                       e-Learning
                          Strategy
Foreword by Marc Rosenberg
Chapters by Kevin Moore, Frank Hanfland,
Patti Shank, Lisa Young, Lance Dublin,
Ryan Watkins, Michael Corry
Bill Brandon, Editor


                                           Sponsored by
Compilation Copyright ©2007 by The eLearning Guild
Published by The eLearning Guild
375 E Street, Suite 200
Santa Rosa, CA 95404
www.elearningguild.com

Individual chapters and the Foreword are Copyright ©2007 by their respective authors.

You may download, display, print, and reproduce this material in unaltered form only (retaining this
notice) for your personal, non-commercial use or use within your organization. All other rights are
reserved.

This is a FREE Digital e-Book. No one is authorized to charge a fee for it or to use it to collect data.

Attribution notice for information from this publication must be given, must credit the individual
author in any citation, and should take the following form: The eLearning Guild's Handbook of
e-Learning Strategy.

Readers should be aware that Internet Web sites offered as citations or sources for further information
may have disappeared or been changed between the date this book was written and the date it is read.

Other FREE Digital e-Books by The eLearning Guild include:
The eLearning Guild's Handbook on Synchronous e-Learning
834 Tips for Successful Online Instruction
328 Tips on the SELECTION of an LMS or LCMS
339 Tips on the IMPLEMENTATION of an LMS or LCMS
311 Tips on the MANAGEMENT of an LMS or LCMS

Publisher: David Holcombe
Editorial Director: Heidi Fisk
Editor: Bill Brandon
Copy Editors: Chuck and Jane Holcombe
Design Director: Nancy Marland Wolinski

The eLearning Guild™Advisory Board
Ruth Clark, Lance Dublin, Conrad Gottfredson, Bill Horton, Bob Mosher, Eric Parks, Brenda Pfaus,
Marc Rosenberg, Allison Rossett
Table of Contents
Strategy Matters: Foreword to The eLearning Guild’s Handbook
of e-Learning Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Introduction     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
     Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
     About the Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Sponsored Content: Adobe e-Learning Solution for rapid training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi

Chapter 1: Keeping the e-Learning Strategy Focused
     Learning strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
     Process for developing the e-Learning strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
     Doomed to failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
     Keeping focused on the strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Sponsored Content: Adobe Captivate 3 and Adobe Captivate CS3: Create
high-impact informal learning content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2: Strategies for Transition to e-Learning
     E-Learning deployment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
     Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
     Design and selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
     Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
     Go-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
     Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Sponsored Content: Adobe Solutions for the Virtual Classroom: Opening the campus,
extending the reach of the classroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 3: Design Strategies for Online and Blended Learning
     Strategy decision #1: Instruction or information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
     Strategy decision #2: Classroom, online, or real life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
     Strategy decision #3: Synchronous or asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
     Strategy decision #4: Traditional or rapid instructional design . . . . . . . . . .30

Sponsored content: Success Story: Texas Engineering Extension Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43




                                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy                           i
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S




Chapter 4: Marketing and Change Management for e-Learning:
Strategies for Engaging Learners, Motivating Managers, and
Energizing Organizations
     Getting the “Soft Stuff” right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
     Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
     Consumer Marketing: People want to buy, not be sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
     Change Implementation: Awareness, engagement, and commitment . . . 48

Sponsored content: Success Story: Grundfos Management A/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter 5: Top-Level Elements for a Successful E-Learning Strategy
     The five elements of a successful strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Sponsored content: Success Story: Web Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 6: Strategy for the Learner: A Student’s Guide to e-Learning
Success
     Plan for success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
     Update your study skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
     Tips for success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Sponsored content: Success Story: Adobe Systems, Incorporated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69




                                                    The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy                        ii
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1
FOREWORD




Strategy Matters
By Marc J. Rosenberg


O      ver the years, when we’ve thought about “e-Learning strategy,” the focus was too often on the
       “e-Learning” part and less on the “strategy” part. We bought tons of technology without con-
sidering how or if the organization could use it. We built or bought online courseware without a
firm understanding of the needs it might serve or the specific benefits it would bring. We focused on
our tools before we focused on our clients. And we wondered why we had so much trouble getting
the organization to embrace what we were doing.
   Now we are beginning to put things in the right balance. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of
e-Learning Strategy resets our compass, giving e-Learning practice and e-Learning strategy equal
weight, as it should be.
   There’s plenty in this book for a good grounding in e-Learning strategy. But what about strategy
in general? What should you consider as you read each chapter? What constitutes strategic thinking
and strategic action? For me, it’s about three things: differentiating strategy from tactics, developing a
long-term view, and defining success.

Differentiating strategy from tactics
“Strategy without tactics is the slowest route to victory.
 Tactics without strategy is the noise before defeat.”
Sun Tzu, The Art of War
    “Implement e-Learning in the business” is a noble and appropriate strategy, but how do we get
there? “Getting there” requires tactics and operational objectives that tell us what to do and when to
do it. Without the right tactics, we face obstacles we should have anticipated and problems we could
have avoided. Without solid tactics, our progress will surely be marred with detours and wasted time.
One year goals turn to three, and we miss opportunities and deplete goodwill.
    Likewise, and too often, we have tactics without strategy, and we end up with lots of activity with
little value to speak of. We have great infrastructure and lots of product, but little following. At the
end of the day, we can’t explain, in strategic business language, why we did what we did. Without the
support a solid strategy would have provided, our efforts are seen as unsustainable and non-contrib-
utory. We expend years of work, and again miss opportunities and deplete goodwill.
    Only a sound, endorsed strategy, and a solid tactical plan, will result in the kind of e-Learning suc-
cess we want. The strategy tells us why we need to deploy e-Learning and what the benefits will be,
and the tactics, linked to that strategy, tell us how we will get there.


                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        iii
S T R AT E G Y M AT T E R S | F O R E W O R D




Developing a long-term view
“Perception is strong and sight is weak. In strategy, it is important to see distant things as
 if they were close and to take a distance view of close things.”
Miyamoto Musashi, Famous Japanese Samurai
   Strategy requires a long-term view. It represents a desired state and is almost never accomplished
in a year or even two. Our compulsion with quarterly results and annual budgets are rarely compati-
ble with our strategic intent. We might be able to install an LMS and deploy courseware relatively
quickly, but how long before it bears fruit? How long before employees not just try it out but actually
prefer it? How long before we truly embrace this fundamental shift in how we learn?
   We need to find ways to think of e-Learning strategy as a new venture, an initiative that could take
years to fulfill, but as long as there is progress, we can sustain the journey. We need to keep the end –
business value – in mind and not be too distracted by the constant change in technology or method-
ology. It may be fun and even worthwhile to keep up with the latest innovations, but doing so cannot
be our reason for being. If we become too focused with the here and now, we may lose our way from
the strategic path we have set for ourselves.


Defining success
“However beautiful the strategy, you should occasionally look at the results.”
Winston Churchill
   A solid e-Learning strategy is essential, but, ultimately, we have to deliver. Strategy and results are
inseparable. Strategy points the way and results define the destination. Results are owned by those
who set the strategy and who will most likely pay for and benefit from it. This speaks to an essential
element of the strategic process – partnering with the client. The client, be it a customer, a business
unit president, or the CEO, owns the strategy with us and, with our help, defines the success criteria.
   So we come full circle. We develop a long-term strategy that defines what we want to accomplish
down the road. We develop a tactical implementation plan to get there, and we define what success is
so that we know when we have arrived. We are both persistent and patient.

Strategy is for everyone
   The underlying message is clear: strategy permeates all aspects of e-Learning planning, implemen-
tation, evaluation and satisfaction. This matters to everyone in the organization. It is as necessary in
determining how to build the best online course as it is in directing the overall organizational initia-
tive.
   Each chapter in this e-Book applies strategy to e-Learning from a different point-of-view:
  Kevin Moore talks about the importance of a strategic perspective. This is critical for maintaining
an effective relationship between the e-Learning function and the organization it serves. When he
suggests that “the e-Learning strategy lives through the learning strategy, which in turn is deeply
embedded in the organizational strategy,” he is clearly and rightly challenging us to be sure that what
we do is in line with where the organization is going.
  Frank Hanfland focuses on technology strategy, clearly an important component of successful
e-Learning. While we don’t want to rely solely on our technology to get us to our goals, and we sure-



                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        iv
S T R AT E G Y M AT T E R S | F O R E W O R D




ly don’t want to be driven by it, we certainly can’t get there without it. Hanfland uses the implemen-
tation of a learning management system (LMS) as a case study of what to consider. His approach
combines technical as well as change management considerations, for as we all know, technology
means nothing if the organization refuses to use it.
   Lance Dublin picks up on Hanfland’s concern about change management in his chapter, which is
devoted entirely to this important subject. Dublin urges us not to forget that we have to help people
come to understand and ultimately prefer this new way to learn, because if our audience rejects what
we’re doing, even the best programs are doomed. Noting that “this soft stuff is the hard stuff,” Dublin
tells us that whatever the merits of our technology and our design, success is much more likely when
you have an effective change management strategy in place.
   Patti Shank and Lisa Young, in their respective chapters, take strategic thinking down to decisions
about how to build quality e-Learning and how to make the best use of e-Learning tools. Despite
instructional designers’ and product developers’ naturally creative and production-oriented mind-
sets, even they can be strategic players. Both Shank and Young admonish us not to rush into any spe-
cific design strategy or tool selection decision just because it has worked before. They caution that
while design, authoring, and delivery technologies are getting easier and better, it is no panacea and
no substitute for solid judgment about the learning challenge at hand.
   Finally, Michael Corry and Ryan Watkins recognize that learners themselves must develop their
own strategies for being successful e-learners. Too often we get so wrapped up in designing and
delivering e-Learning that we forget about the learners and what they need. Whether it’s helping
enthusiastic learners improve their comfort level with new technology, or helping reluctant learners
buy into e-Learning as a preferred way to learn, we cannot see our strategy as complete without put-
ting ourselves in their shoes.

   We often think that strategy must be at the enterprise level and that we must always focus on
monumental change. Granted, major organizational transformation or business success sounds
more strategic, and we clearly must keep the big picture in mind, but strategic thinking – and action
– is not limited to the higher-ups. Managers, developers, and others in the e-Learning organization,
who have very specific responsibilities, can be strategic thinkers – and doers – if they develop appro-
priate goals that are separate from their tactics, take a long term view, and clearly define their success
criteria.
   The time has come to re-focus on e-Learning strategy, not at the expense of e-Learning technology
or e-Learning methodology, but as a way to insure that our technology and methodology invest-
ments pay off. We cannot simply do our own thing, as exciting as it might be, without carefully con-
sidering the big picture and how we contribute to it. Everything we do – every decision we make –
has strategic implications. In this important book, The eLearning Guild begins the conversation on
just what those implications are, and how, with a solid strategy behind us, we can take control and
achieve our e-Learning goals.




                                           The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        v
Our Research                   Is your Leading




Immersive
Learning
Simulations

Learning
Management
Systems

Synchronous
Learning Systems

Mobile Learning

Measuring
e-Learning
Success                        Intensive Research-based
                              Management Symposiums at



                                San Jose, CA | November 5-8, 2007

                   www.DevLearn2007.com | +1.707.566.8990
INTRODUCTION




                               The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of
                               e-Learning Strategy
                               By Bill Brandon, Editor


                               T           here is a subtle difference between strategy and tactics. Tactics, the everyday concern of practi-
                                           tioners, answers the question, “How?” How do you put a lesson together? How do you write test
                                     questions? How do you use a given software appliction to achieve a desired result? Most of the time,
                                     books and articles written for the e-Learning practitioner focus on this getting-the-job-done side of
                                     things.
                                        Strategy, on the other hand, steps back from the day-to-day. It takes a higher-level view to answer the
                                     question, “What?” What should we be doing in order to support the organization's goals for improved
                                     performance? What design for learning best matches our situation and our learners? What software
                                                                                capabilities do we need to best leverage technology in solving
                                                                                our enduring business challenges?
Who should read this book?                                                         Since we began operation in 2002, The eLearning Guild
                                                                                has attempted to balance its delivery of information, services,
    The eLearning Guild's Handbook on e-Learning Strategy is intended for       and resources to facilitate both strategy and tactics. This has
those who lead their organization's learning initiatives. You may be senior
executives who are outside the traditional Human Resources/Chief Learning
                                                                                been true of all the articles we have published in Learning
Officer/Training context. You may also be a “one person shop” who has to        Solutions e-Magazine and its predecessor, The e-Learning
do it all when it comes to producing, leading, and promoting learning.          Developers' Journal. It has been true of the topics and speak-
    Note that this book is written from the larger frame of learning strategy –
not just e-Learning. An organization's leadership can profit from reading       ers at our conferences and online events, in our research pub-
Chapters 1, 2, 4, and 6 even if the organization has no current e-Learning      lications, and now in our e-Books.
initiatives in place.
    If you are new to learning and e-Learning, you should read the entire
                                                                                   This e-Book began, as all of them do, with a realization of
book. Much of the insight here comes from experts who have already experi-      a need in the e-Learning community, and a conversation
enced (at first hand or through watching others) the pain of learning initia-   between The Guild leadership, the editor, and the Advisory
tives that were not grounded in a higher level strategy. You can learn from
their experience without having to repeat any mistakes.                         Board. What we saw was a need to better articulate a learning
    If you are an experienced manager or e-Learning practitioner, you can also  strategy in many organizations. Not just an e-Learning strate-
benefit from reading this book. A great many best practices are presented
here. You will be able to apply them to your curent processes and products
                                                                                gy, but a broader, more fundamental connection between
in order to benefit from stronger strategic ties to your organization's out-    learning and organizational mission, business objectives, and
comes.                                                                          the proverbial “bottom line.”
                                                                                   The intent and design of this book are based on three aims.
         This FREE Digital e-Book would not have been possible were it
         not for a generous contribution to its development from Adobe. If      First, we wanted the book to be more about making a plan
         you're not familiar with Adobe products for e-Learning and multi-      for doing the right things, not so much about doing things
         media development, or if you haven't checked them out lately,
         we encourage you to take a look at your earliest convenience!          right. The Guild has never taken a position that dictates,
         http://www.adobe.com/ resources/elearning                              “This is the right way to ‘do’ e-Learning, and any other way is
                                                                                wrong.” We are not taking such a position now. You will


                                                                            The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy           vi
INTRODUCTION




notice as you read the chapters that the authors have different views on certain matters, yet they are
in fundamental agreement about the vital need to figure out and document your strategy before you
begin to worry about which authoring tool to use or how your templates should look.
   Second, we wanted the book to have a certain “flow” to it, from high-level thinking about out-
comes and processes, then transitioning to intermediate strategies having to do with people, project
management, and technology. At the end, it was to be an easy step from deciding on the right things
to do, back to the tactical world of procedure and day-to-day operations. While the cynical will say
that no learning strategy ever survives the pilot program, successful e-Learning practitioners appreci-
ate the wisdom of the Japanese proverb: Vision without action is a daydream, but action without
vision is a nightmare.
   Finally, we wanted a book that would offer planning methods without imposing checklists. A
checklist developed by an individual practitioner, taking into account particular circumstances for a
particular organization and its mission, values, and desired outcomes, is a good thing. But a generic
checklist based on theory and hypothetical circumstances is a recipe for disaster.

How to use this book
   The best way to approach this book is to read the first five chapters in order, and to develop your
documented learning strategy as you go. You will revise your strategy several times along the way, but
with each iteration you will be closer to a solid document.
   The first two chapters are intended to help you develop your organization's own documented
(e-)learning strategy. As Kevin Moore notes in Chapter 1, it is the absence of the connection between
e-Learning initiatives and business results that account for the difficulty e-Learning initiatives – and
learning initiatives in general – have in getting and keeping support and funding. Once you can
demonstrate such a connection, your “seat at the table” is assured.
   The next three chapters will help you bridge the gap from the highest strategic levels to your day-
to-day efforts. If you try to follow the advice in these later chapters without having gone through the
exercises in the first two, be warned – your efforts are in danger of failing. The guidelines in chapters
3, 4, and 5 are not ad hoc, generic advice. Strategy implementation must connect, through the larger
strategic (e-)learning plan, to the organization's valued outcomes.
   Chapter 6 is intended as a model for a document that you might want to provide to learners in your
organization. It deals with personal strategy for getting the most benefit from e-Learning as a user.
   It seems to me that the authors of these chapters have done an outstanding job in meeting all of
these criteria. It is our hope that you will find their advice useful and that you will realize great suc-
cess in creating your own e-Learning strategy.

Acknowledgments
   As the editor, I would like to thank all of the authors for their contributions. Through your efforts,
you have enabled The eLearning Guild to produce a valuable resource in a matter of weeks. I hope
that your work will be rewarded with the attention and praise that it deserves.
   I would also like to thank Ellen Wagner for bringing this book to the attention of the management
at Adobe, and for championing Adobe’s sponsorship. Without your proactive support, this book
would not have happened.
   Special thanks to the copy editors, Chuck and Jane Holcombe, who managed my impossible deadlines
and near-impenetrable instructions. You gave the readers clean, error-free copy to read, no small feat.
   Thanks to my wife, daughters, and grandchildren for allowing me the time to bring this project to
conclusion.


                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        vii
About the Authors
Michael Corry
   Michael Corry, Ph.D. is an Associate Professor and Director of the Educational Technology
Leadership program at The George Washington University. Dr. Corry is intimately involved with
course design and delivery as well as management of this pioneering program delivered via distance
education at GWU. Dr. Corry's research interests include distance learning theory, practice, and poli-
cy, faculty development using technology, e-Learning, the integration of technology into K-12 and
higher education settings, instructional design, and human-computer interaction. He has been a
principal investigator on two U.S. Department of Education grants involving "Preparing Tomorrow's
Teachers to Use Technology." He has numerous publications and presentations involving his research
interests including two books — E-Learning Companion: A Student's Guide to Online Success, 1st and
2nd editions published by Houghton Mifflin and Distance Education: What Works Well published by
Haworth Press. He has also designed and delivered workshops involving technology and e-Learning.
Dr. Corry holds a Ph.D. from Indiana University in Instructional Systems Technology. Before coming
to GWU he taught at Indiana University, at a high school in Utah, and was an Information Systems
Consultant for Andersen Consulting/Accenture. Contact him at mcorry@gwu.edu.

Lance Dublin
     Lance Dublin is an independent management consultant, international speaker, and author
based in San Francisco, California and serving clients world-wide. He specializes in strategy develop-
ment, program design, and implementation for corporate learning programs and organizational
change management. Lance is a regular speaker and keynote presenter at regional, national and
international conferences. In addition, he is the author of numerous published articles, co-author
of the capstone book in ASTD’s e-Learning series, Implementing e-Learning, and a contributor to
ASTD’s Handbook of Training Design and Delivery, Elliot Masie’s Learning Rants, Raves and
Reflections, and Marc Rosenberg’s Beyond e-Learning. For more information, see http://www.
dublinconsulting.net.

Frank Hanfland
     Frank Hanfland is a senior instructional design and e-Learning consultant and has spent the
past ten years on the forefront of multimedia and e-Learning development. His experience reaches
back to application programming in BASIC, developing in Authorware 3 and Flash since version 3,
and many other platforms to provide integrated solutions to a wide variety of industries, ranging
from telecom, banking, and insurance, to hazardous waste companies. In addition to his technical
expertise, Frank has a solid background in instructional design and is an advocate of using the most
modern methodologies to solve an organization's human performance improvement and support
requirements. Contact Frank by e-mail to frank@hanfland.us.




                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy      viii
ABOUT THE AUTHORS




Kevin C. Moore
     Kevin C. Moore, Ed.D., is Founding Partner, and Chief Learning Officer for Tier 1 Performance
Solutions, LLC. Dr. Moore is a Performance Improvement and Instructional Design consultant. He
has over sixteen years of experience designing and modifying instruction for adult learners. Kevin's
experience includes needs assessments that address business needs and training requirements, physi-
cal and mental workload assessments, technology analysis, designing of performance management
systems, technical and "soft" skills training design, and summative and formative evaluations of per-
formance improvement programs. In addition, Kevin has experience with the selection of appropri-
ate training strategies and materials to address learner characteristics, course objectives, and sequenc-
ing of courses to fit curriculum and performance needs. For the past 11 years Dr. Moore’s research
and work area has focused on knowledge and learning throughout organizations. Specific topic
areas include: the interactions between knowledge flows, content taxonomies, business and opera-
tional goals, and technology. Kevin is a frequent keynote presenter at national conferences and is
published in academic and trade journals. He holds a B.A. in Business/Organizational Communi-
cation, University of North Carolina at Wilmington, M.S. in Instructional Design and Technology,
University of Kentucky, and a Doctorate in Education and Instructional Design Technology from the
University of Kentucky. Contact Kevin by e-mail to k.moore@tier1performance.com.

Marc J. Rosenberg
   Marc J. Rosenberg, Ph.D. is a management consultant in training, organizational learning,
e-Learning, knowledge management and performance improvement. He is the author of the best-
selling books, e-Learning: Strategies for Delivering Knowledge in the Digital Age and, Beyond
e-Learning: Approaches and Technologies to Enhance Organizational Knowledge, Learning and
Performance (Pfeiffer). Marc is a past president of the International Society for Performance
Improvement (ISPI). He holds a Ph.D. in instructional design, plus degrees in communications and
marketing. Dr. Rosenberg is a recognized thought leader in the field. He has spoken at The White
House, keynoted numerous professional and business conferences, authored more than 40 articles
and book chapters in the field, and is a frequently quoted expert in major business and trade publi-
cations. More information is available at www.marcrosenberg.com.

Patti Shank
   Patti Shank, Ph.D., CPT, is a widely recognized instructional designer whose company helps oth-
ers design and build good online and blended courses and performance support. She is the co-
author of Making Sense of Online Learning and the editor of The Online Learning Idea Book. You can
reach her through her Website: www.learningpeaks.com.




                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        ix
ABOUT THE AUTHORS




Ryan Watkins
     Ryan Watkins, Ph.D. is an associate professor at The George Washington University in
Washington, D.C. He is an author of Performance By Design: The Systematic Selection, Design, and
Development of Performance Technologies, 5 e-Learning Activities: Making Online Courses Interactive,
and E-Learning Companion: A Student’s Guide to Online Success. In addition, he has co-authored two
books on educational planning and more than 60 articles on instructional design, strategic planning,
needs assessment, distance education, and performance technology. Dr. Watkins is an active member
of the International Society for Performance Improvement (ISPI) and was a vice president of the
Inter-American Distance Education Consortium (CREAD). In 2005 Ryan was a visiting scientist
with the National Science Foundation. For more information please visit http://www.ryanrwatkins.
com or http://www.how2elearn.com.

Lisa Young
     Lisa Young is the Director of Measurement and e-Learning at HORN, a performance consulting
firm, where she is responsible for the design and development of complex, highly customized learn-
ing programs which include multi-level assessment to illustrate ROI. She has extensive experience
analyzing potential e-Learning and blended learning opportunities based on organizational infra-
structure, environment, and content, to ensure that the training methodology utilized best suits the
proposed training objectives. She is a published author, and has presented at numerous conferences
in the fields of adult education, online learning, e-Learning management, wearable technology, com-
munities of practice, and telementoring. Lisa is currently completing her Ph.D. in Education at
OISE/University of Toronto. Contact Lisa by e-mail at lyoung@horn.com.




                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy     x
Solution Brief




Adobe eLearning solution for
rapid training
Rapidly create, manage, deploy, and track the e ectiveness of highly engaging online
training that virtually anyone can access instantly

                                         Organizations today face tremendous nancial, logistical, and other challenges when training
                                         employees, channel partners, and customers: scarce training resources; complex eLearning
                                         solutions that make it di cult for all but technically minded training professionals to develop
                                         eLearning courses and curricula; costly custom eLearning solutions that require long development
                                         times; potential incompatibilities with existing user and learning management systems; and, of
                                         course, bland, lifeless training sessions that fail to produce results because they fail to engage learners.

                                         Cost-e ectively transfer maximum knowledge in minimum time
                                         With the Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training, you can overcome these challenges cost-
With this solution, you can:
                                         e ectively and productively while increasing your ROI through faster training and better results.
• Rapidly develop, update, and deliver
                                            is solution has what training professionals need to address a wide range of training needs—
  engaging self-paced training
                                         development of standards-compliant content, on-demand or virtual classroom deployment, and
• Administer formal assessments
  and surveys, and measure the           reliable formal assessments and reporting—at a fraction of the time and cost of traditional
  e ectiveness of on-demand              eLearning systems. It also provides comprehensive curriculum and content management capabilities
  presentations                          and integrates with common learning management and user management systems to help
• Measure the e ectiveness of course     reduce application management costs.
  content and analyze training results
• Increase the e ectiveness of           Use one solution for all your training needs
  instructors, and easily conduct
                                         Avoid the hassle of dealing with multiple solution o erings. With the Adobe eLearning solution
  virtual classes
                                         for rapid training, you can build a streamlined, fully integrated training solution that includes
• Customize the look and feel of
  eLearning experiences                  Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Professional so ware for virtual classroom sessions; Adobe Presenter
• Manage virtually all facets of         for easy Microso PowerPoint authoring of self-paced training courses and on-demand multimedia
  employee, partner, and customer        presentations; Adobe Connect Training for creating and managing eLearning courses and
  training                               curricula; and Adobe Connect Events for managing and tracking users of large online courses.
• Enhance your existing corporate user
  and learning management systems        Rapidly deliver engaging, self-paced training
                                         With this solution, nontechnical subject matter experts can leverage their Microso PowerPoint
                                         skills to create engaging multimedia experiences. Using their desktop computers and a microphone,
                                         trainers can easily add voice-over narration to their content from within PowerPoint. Built-in
                                         audio editing tools make it easy to isolate and cut out embarrassing pauses or slurred speech.
                                         And integrating rich media such as talking head videos, animations, or simulations is as easy as
                                         selecting a command from the Insert menu. Finished courses can be published at the click of a
                                         button—courses are automatically converted to the Adobe Flash® format and delivered live or on
                                         demand using Adobe Flash Player, which already is installed on more than 97% of Internet-
                                         connected desktops worldwide, so learners can access them instantly without cumbersome
                                         so ware downloads, virtually anytime and anywhere.
Administer formal assessments and gauge the e ectiveness of courses
                                         With the Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training, trainers don’t need an IT department or
                                         database administrator to help them assess learners’ skills and progress or analyze the e ective-
                                         ness of their courses. Trainers can integrate quizzes with course content using a range of
                                         question types—including short answer, ll-in-the-blank, true/false, matching, and Likert rating
                                         scale—add pass/fail criteria, and use question branching and custom audio-visual feedback to
                                         guide learners in their progress. Likewise, they can gauge the e ectiveness of their content using
                                         a simple, web-based interface to generate custom reports that provide slide- and question-level
                                         feedback and help pinpoint content that may have to be revised to ensure trainees get the
                                         information they need.

                                         Provide instant access to online meetings and virtual classes
                                         Trainers can also use this solution to set up virtual classrooms and conduct cost-e ective
                                         collaborative training sessions in real time with geographically dispersed instructors and
                                         learners, complete with multimedia presentations, so ware simulations, application sharing,
                                         and participant polling. Classroom sessions can be easily recorded for later on-demand viewing
                                         and shared through an instructor’s dedicated, personal meeting room that can be accessed
                                         instantly at any time by anyone using Adobe Flash Player, giving learners the opportunity to
                                         review content a er the live event is over. And in the case of recurring classes, trainers can
                                         considerably reduce preparation time using customizable layouts, which they can save for future
                                         sessions, complete with all required content. Because the system supports permissions-based
                                         access to course content and meeting room layouts, multiple presenters can share meeting room
                                         templates as well as course content and assets, using a fully searchable, centralized content
                                         library, which makes it easy to nd, retrieve, reuse, and update existing training content.

                                         Customize and manage all facets of online training
                                         A cost-e ective training solution enables professional trainers to manage virtually all aspects of
                                         employee, partner, and customer training. With the Adobe eLearning solution, trainers can
                                         schedule courses, enroll learners, grant viewing permissions, automate enrollment notices and
                                         reminders, and track learner statistics. Trainers can also develop curriculums that drive results by
                                         combining live classes, multiple self-paced training courses, and other training content. In
                                         addition, they can easily de ne course prerequisites, specify optional and required modules, and
                                         establish progressive learning paths for self-paced training, live instructor-led training, and
                                         external events such as manager assessments. And, they can customize the look and feel of self-
                                         paced courses and virtual classrooms using company logos and colors, in accordance with the
                                         company brand guidelines.

                                         Leverage your existing infrastructure
                                           e Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training integrates smoothly with common corporate
For more information                     user management and learning management systems. It supports Active Directory and LDAP for
For more information on the Adobe        user authentication, and all rapid training content produced with this solution is SCORM 1.2,
eLearning solution for rapid training,   SCORM 2004, and AICC compliant, making it easy for trainers and administrators to deliver
go to www.adobe.com/products/connect/
                                         and track courses through their existing corporate learning management systems.
solutions/rapid_training.

                                         Produce measurable results with an a ordable end-to-end training solution
                                           e Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training is a cost-e ective end-to-end training solution
                                         that can help you solve your most challenging training issues. It enables training professionals with
                                         PowerPoint skills to develop progressive training curriculums and create and deploy standards-
                                         compliant, rich training modules that will engage minds and get your employees, partners, and
Better by Adobe.
               ™
                                         customers on message and up to speed in no time.




                                         Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Connect, Flash, and “Better by Adobe” are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Adobe Systems Incorporated               Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Any reference to Global
345 Park Avenue                          Electronics and its logo is for demonstration purposes only and is not intended to refer to any actual organization.
San Jose, CA 95110-2704
USA                                      © 2006 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
www.adobe.com                            95007254 9/06
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1
                               CHAPTER                       1


                              Keeping the
                              e-Learning
                              Strategy Focused
                              By Kevin Moore



                              O           rganizations are in a battle to meet ever-changing market needs, client and customer demands,
                                          and internal and external pressures. This requires a clear, concise, and documented strategy
                                  for improvement of employee performance. Managing and improving the performance of employ-
                                  ees and supporting staff is a journey rather than a destination, and, as such, requires careful thought,
                                  allocation of resources, and executive support.
                                     Performance improvement should be a part of the organizational goals. The learning strategy doc-
                                  ument should describe the system for learning and performance across the organization (Moore
                                  2006). This change toward the acquisition and management of learning and performance using
                                  sophisticated technology presents a tremendous challenge in today’s business, education, and gov-
                                  ernment environments. It represents a necessary paradigm shift to adequately prepare our people for
                                  their future in the work environment, while preserving and leveraging the past through knowledge
                                  management.
                                     Simply put, while we have the ability to move information and data faster, we won’t achieve true
                                  success until we can accurately target and disseminate information to the correct audience, at the
                                  right time, and in the right amount and format for performance improvement (Moore, 2007).
                                     The learning and performance system is about the flow of knowledge and information within and
                                  between organizations, business units, and individuals (Parkin, 2006). The learning strategy document
                                  should deal specifically with the management of this system, and it should raise the organizational,
                                  departmental, and individual concerns on efficiency and effectiveness of people and processes.
                                     A learning and performance system operates at a higher level, involving culture, beliefs, and val-
                                  ues. Although this system will have a financial impact, it represents a higher level of understanding of
                                  the knowledge processes that lead to performance improvement at the job level. Fundamentally this
Contents                          learning and performance system is about making better decisions at every level of the organization,
                                                            and increasing the organizational intelligence to proactively meet market
 In Chapter 1 you will find information about:              demands.
 • Learning strategy                                           Critical to the success of this system, of which the e-Learning strategy is
 • Process for developing the e-Learning strategy           one component, are solid links to business process, organizational culture,
 • Doomed to failure                                        and continuous meaningful measurement. The learning and performance
 • Keeping focused on the strategy                          system is depicted in Figure 1-1 on page 2 … this describes our world!




                                                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        1
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




                            Learning strategy
                                 A learning strategy describes the input, output, and measures of the system, and should have
                            organizational, departmental, business unit, and individual references. This should be a far-reaching
                            document that details how the organization is going to facilitate continuous improvement in its
                            employees. It implies a focus on the development of a learning culture.
                                 To achieve this goal, you must increase the utility of knowledge through three key components:
                              1. Capture and creation of data, information, and knowledge assets in support of each individual’s
                                 performance functions across the organization. Provide links to knowledge management and
                                 document management practices.
                              2. Intelligent storage, leveraging useful taxonomies, and search and retrieve capability that better
                                                                                 manages and improves access to content.
                                                                                    3. Dissemination and access practices, includ-
                                                                                       ing but not limited to: e-Learning, instruc-
                                                                                       tor-led training, documentation, mentoring
                                                                                       and coaching, and outside sources.
                                                                                    Historically the three components listed above
                                                                                 have been critical in research and practice.
                                                                                 However, many organizations have yet to fully real-
                                                                                 ize the movement and integration of knowledge
                                                                                 within themselves. A complete system for manag-
                                                                                 ing information has been out of reach for many
                                                                                 organizations, due in large part to the lack of a
                                                                                 comprehensive strategy. The measures of any sys-
                                                                                 tem for knowledge and learning should in-clude
                                                                                 the accuracy, specificity, and timely delivery of the
                                                                                 knowledge the user receives, and how effective that
                                                                                 knowledge is in changing behaviors and improving
Figure 1-1                  performance. In addition, a key measure for success should be based on how knowledge feeds back into
The learning and perform-
ance system
                            the system to make it a continuous, accurate, and valuable resource that meets users’ needs.

                            Business process
                                  The e-Learning strategy lives through the learning strategy, which, in turn, is deeply embedded
                            in the organizational strategy. This is true for all departments within the organization. In addition,
                            the learning strategy must link clearly to the mission and vision of the organization. The value driv-
                            en by learning and performance must be reflected across the organization in the ways people, cus-
                            tomers, clients, vendors, and the job environment are perceived.
                                  Ultimately, the process of developing a well-thought-out and successful learning strategy will
                            include a focused e-Learning strategy that will provide details around the following:
                               • Defining the initiative and vision around the strategy.
                               • Defining the needs and expectations of executive leadership.
                               • Defining the needs and wants of the users at the organizational, departmental, business group,
                                 and individual levels.
                               • Defining the technology to support the system.
                                  The strategy will also include a process to ensure alignment of each offering to overall organiza-
                            tional goals and objectives. We highly recommend that the learning strategy address:



                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        2
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




  • Aligning learning strategy goals with organizational and departmental goals.
  • Ensuring the support of executive leadership and acceptance of the strategy by contributors
    and users.
  • Determining baseline technology requirements and capacity to support the learning and
    e-Learning strategy.
  • Partnering with the internal training professionals in creating a plan for roll-out and
    implementation.
  • Devising a methodology to evaluate and measure results.

People
   In developing a learning strategy, a critical aspect is how engaged the people are, and how they will
play a role as the strategy builders and as the recipients of the strategy successes. People simply are
the driving force behind every part of the strategy. Basically, as learning and performance profession-
als, we state that the development of programs, courses, lessons, and knowledge objects is for the
overt use of an individual who has a specific need to learn, refresh, or teach while engaged in a per-
formance-measured task or function. This individual is our end user. A focus on the principles
“Simple is better and less is more” is one over-arching objective when developing a learning or an
e-Learning strategy. When faced with the building of a strategy, selection of key people from across
the organization will be the most important decision to ensure success. For this reason a teaming
approach seems to be best when developing a learning strategy.
   Why involve people from Accounting, Operations, or even Sales for that matter? It’s simple, really
… they are the people who will bring focused attention and a level of importance to the rest of the
organization. This is an organization-wide strategy, and, as such, needs to have key people across the
organization and within the executive level involved. Executive level sponsorship, ownership, and
understanding are the single greatest assets for successful development and implementation of a
learning strategy, as well as an e-Learning strategy. It is how you allocate resources, and it will enable
access across the organization.
   In the past it has always been apparent that development and implementation of a learning strate-
gy is established largely through a push from the top down, rather than from a user-focused, bot-
tom-up approach. The reason for the top-down push has been for cost reduction, human capital
realignment within the organization, large technology purchases, or to capture knowledge and infor-
mation before it leaves the organization. Any learning and performance systems approach will begin
to show significant return on value when the process is user-focused.
   The job roles and functions of individuals and groups within the organization drive this approach.
Learning and performance content developed from the users will have a significant impact on how
work, and workers, are perceived and valued in the decisions they make and their role in the organi-
zation. This focus is directly associated with involving people from across the organization in devel-
oping the learning strategy.

E-Learning strategy
    Development of the learning strategy will enable the organization to determine the needs across
the enterprise for capture and creation, intelligent storage and dissemination of information, and the
role of technology. Many organizations simply cannot justify the need to put content online as it will
serve little or no value in getting the work done. For the same reason, putting content online that has
little or no value is also a significant waste of time and effort.
    You must demonstrate a justifiable need that links the initiative to performance improvement. The


                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        3
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




                                  inability to demonstrate this need has been the bane of e-Learning since its inception. It is easy to see
                                  when organizations do not have solid learning strategies. It is evident in disconnected, disorganized,
                                  and hard-to-access content, and is basically a vast waste of time, money, and effort. You drive a value-
                                  based approach to e-Learning by a clear, concise, and measurable strategy for the organization, and
                                  you must follow and evaluate this strategy.
                                    Any e-Learning strategy must include methods for designing and deploying learning solutions,
                                  change management, communication planning, performance support solutions, and knowledge
                                  management services and technologies. (See Figure 1-2.)
                                    This document must allow the organization to plan, design, develop, and deliver solutions that
                                  ensure that people have the necessary knowledge to embrace change and perform at a level required
                                  for business success. This will require:
                                    • Training expertise. Understanding of adult learning practices and principles as the theoretical
                                      underpinnings of organizational learning initiatives; methods that focus on outcomes in an effi-
                                      cient, effective, and cost-effective manner; learning content management practices; and instruc-
                                      tional design and development methodologies.
                                    • Training and development experience. An understanding of the field of learning and instruc-
                                      tional technologies and an awareness of the importance that training plays in an organization’s
                                      ability to maintain a competitive edge in a quickly changing global environment.
                                    • Rigorous project management process. Understanding and adherence to proven project man-




Figure 1-2 E-Learning strategy.


                                                                            The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        4
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




     agement techniques to ensure all projects are completed on-time, within budget, and to the satis-
     faction of our clients (internal and external).
   • Available and emerging learning technologies. Familiarity and understanding of learning man-
     agement system (LMS) and learning content management system (LCMS) technologies from
     both a theoretical and a practical standpoint.
   • Business process. A keen awareness and understanding of how the business works, and how the
     learning and performance group plays a role in that endeavor. This is a return on value under-
     standing.
   The development of an e-Learning strategy as a component to the learning strategy is a critical
success point, and you should not take it lightly. However, this is not a long drawn-out process. You
should recognize that development of a strategy is a point-in-time effort, that changes in the opera-
tional environment will occur, and that you must account for them and then recalibrate the strategy.

Process for developing the e-Learning strategy
   The process for developing an e-Learning strategy is exactly the same as the process for developing
a learning strategy. However, a focus on dissemination of content via technology usually emerges.
Whereas the process for developing an e-Learning strategy can be comprehensive, it is far easier to
digest if broken into component parts.
   The areas of focus listed below are not necessarily in order, and you can complete them as the
opportunity comes available. However, it is important that you indeed explore each area, and a series
of measures from each area will allow you to stay focused as you implement the strategy. These areas
will also determine who in the organization needs to be part of the team that develops the strategy.
For example, the IT person should be represented and have a key stake when exploring technology in
Area 6.

Area 1: Learning across the organization
   Analysis in this area involves documenting what you currently know about the existing situation
and the anticipated direction, both internally and externally, for learning programs. This would iden-
tify key decision points and factors that impact strategies, software, tools, processes, resources requir-
ed, learning, performance, business objectives, existing content, and channels. It would include docu-
menting all assumptions you are making, and how those assumptions impact the overall solution. It
would also identify a timeline and schedule for how and when to re-visit various issues as decisions
are made. Finally, it would validate current tool sets, processes, and procedures, and identify areas of
risk.

Area 2: Content selection process
   This area involves a high-level analysis of the current process used to select content for courses,
presentations, programs, et al., assuming there is one. The overall goal is to detail a process that will
enable selection of appropriate content to put in an e-Learning format to meet the business and
learning objectives. The content selection process determines how to decide which content, desired
topics and subjects, and existing courses and content need to be developed, and in what manner.
   Having a blended learning approach is critical as you identify various delivery styles (e.g., Web-
based basic, Web-based highly interactive, instructor-led, etc.) and decision criteria for determining
the right style and delivery medium for the particular course and content you will develop. The deci-
sion criteria will take into consideration such things as timeliness (when it needs to be prepared),
target audience, content type, audience needs, possibilities for modularity to meet the needs of other


                                           The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       5
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




                          audiences, and criticality of the subject. Other factors include: corporate content, where the content
                          resides, what the format is and how it is structured, which content is of high or low value, and the
                          stability of the content in terms of how often you need to edit or update it.

                          Area 3: Access, retrieval, and reuse
                             This area explores a high-level taxonomy to categorize and classify content within context to the
                          learning, performance, and business objectives. In this area we are exploring how to identify and tag
                          content in meaningful ways so the end-user can gain access at the right level. This is critical for reuse
                          and for making informed, intelligent decisions about future content, maintenance concerns, and
                          technology needs.

                          Area 4: Mapping and content reuse
                             The mapping process explores how to map content to the learning, performance, and business
                          objectives by leveraging data and information from other systems such as user profiles, learner paths,
                                                                                        new hire orientation, succession plan-
                                                                                        ning, and development. Mapping con-
                                                                                        tent in this way is very powerful for
                                                                                        existing and future content, but it is an
                                                                                        often overlooked method as it is time-
                                                                                        consuming. Content re-use and the cre-
                                                                                        ation process evaluates selected content
                                                                                        based on end-user attributes, end-user
                                                                                        playback environments, and learning,
                                                                                        performance, and business objectives.
                                                                                        There are dozens of factors to consider
                                                                                        when reusing content. Developing an
Figure 1-3                efficient methodology that provides a framework, a standardized process, and tools and templates for
Development methodology   how to effectively and efficiently move courses and content to the Web is crucial.

                          Area 5: Development methodology
                             The analysis, design, development, implementation, evaluation (ADDIE) model has clear reference
                          points to the learning and performance system, and still applies. However, with an e-Learning strate-
                          gy, success is dependent on output and how we manage that output. Using an iterative model that
                          has continuous evaluation and business-case analysis will be critical. (See Figure 1-3.) People often
                          overlook overtly adopting a development methodology, or they just assume one is understood with-
                          in an organization. The e-Learning Strategy should detail what model, how we interact with the
                          model, and how we evaluate the output from the model.

                          Area 6: Technology
                             This is not the place to start! Area 6 involves a high-level plan to address Web-portal design, LMS
                          and LCMS features, functionality, technical requirements, and to flush out business needs and poten-
                          tial costing models. This process will document known technical and functional requirements, and
                          evaluate existing software applications for how well they address those requirements. In areas where
                          gaps are too substantial, you should evaluate alternative products.
                             Potential areas of software you might evaluate include authoring platforms for Web development,
                          competency profiling and/or assessment systems, LMSs and LCMSs, knowledge management sys-


                                                                    The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        6
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




tems, class registration systems, and assessment authoring and delivery systems. The specific cate-
gories of products to evaluate will be determined based on the requirements established in prior
steps.

Area 7: Maintenance planning
   Area 7 details how you will maintain the content, authoring, LMS, LCMS, and other systems. Over
time this will represent the largest amount of time, money, and effort. Often, directors of organiza-
tional learning understand too late in the game that neglecting this important area can sabotage
their entire learning effort and cost them their jobs. A plan must be established to identify a system-
atic review, revise, and release cycle, define triggering mechanisms and measurement criteria, and
evaluate the shelf-life of learning content to provide fresh, timely, and engaging learning experiences.

Area 8: E-Learning strategy plan
  After you have laid out the entire strategy, or set of strategies, you need to develop projects, tasks,
activities, dependencies, resources, and timelines for moving forward. The e-Learning strategy plan
includes a process for prioritizing projects, managing scope, identifying and resolving issues, and
shifting schedules and resources as the programs and projects move forward.

Area 9: Measurement and evaluation
   This area explores how you will measure the successes and failures of training programs within the
organization. Do not stray from this focus, and be responsible for reporting successes and failures
both up and down the chain of command. Traditional methods for evaluating the effectiveness of
learning programs within companies have presented a myriad of problems. Most notably, there is a
lack of metrics in place to gauge the worth of the instructional process. What value for the organiza-
tion has resulted from the money, time, and effort we’ve put forth? This question is intense and well-
justified. Any learning strategy and e-Learning strategy should have the basis for the answer. There’s
merit in measuring whether or not the technology is up and running, how many people passed
through a course, or if the participants liked the course, but as you move up the chain of command
the haunting question of “What did I get” remains.
   Outcomes must be established to assess the whole technology-enabled instructional process, and the
outcomes are highly dependent on the technology architecture, content, instructional design, teaching
strategies associated with software, attitude of all those who participate, and the work environment.
Coupled with the hard metrics most commonly associated with technology (hardware, software, and
maintenance costs) you will need to establish a true assessment of the learning programs.

Doomed to failure
   Will you be doomed to failure and fall into the e-Learning abyss if you don’t take the time to cre-
ate a strategy for the organization? At some level, I would say, “Yes, absolutely!” Does it have to be a
“formal” strategy as I suggest in this chapter? Probably not. However, if you are “feeling” your way
through this and “flying by the seat of your pants,” then pay close attention to some of the key areas
where you might look to avoid:
   • Failure to establish some plan that you can measure: It is hard to take credit for events that hap-
     pen with or without influence from the learning organization. Lance Dublin wrote that, “The
     road taken is often the one that was better sold, the cheapest, or the easiest to agree on — rather
     than the best choice for your organization. Such decisions fail to reflect a strategy of any kind.
     They are happenstance.”


                                           The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        7
K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1




   • Failure to recognize the importance, interdependence, and connections of people, process, and
     technology within the organization to attain learning goals.
   • Failure to recognize that, above all, what matters are the people affected by the programs and sys-
     tems put in place for learning. Very rarely does a person turn to an LMS when he or she needs to
     solve a problem quickly.
   • Failure to consider learning across the organization (the think big — act small syndrome).
   • Failure to recognize the importance of learner motivation, attitude, and ownership over content
     and processes.
   • Failure to recognize organizational values, culture, and the mission.
   • Failure to measure progress.
   • Fail to START and STAY FOCUSED on the strategy.
   As previously stated, the process of developing and tracking an e-Learning strategy is relatively straight-
forward. The success of that strategy, however, will depend on a well-thought-out approach and sup-
port from key individuals within your organization. The learning strategy and the e-Learning strategy
documents should be navigational maps that you adapt and improve along your journey.
   Take the time to invest in the development of the strategies, even if you don’t have adequate re-
sources to do so. I’ve never seen a learning group within an organization receive a budget, people,
and time to do their work twice! A powerful, valuable, and highly accurate strategy from the begin-
ning is a magic bullet!

Keeping focused on the strategy
  There are several processes for developing a learning strategy and an e-Learning strategy, but how
do you stay focused? To stay focused on the plan follow these three key, never fail, techniques:
  • First, use the learning and e-Learning strategy like a business plan and establish a board of direc-
    tors from across the organization to help guide you along the way. Choose people to be on this
    board who will add value, and who will push you and your organization to succeed. The board
    should meet quarterly.
  • Secondly, measure, measure, measure, and report on progress on a quarterly basis. Make this
    report with the data (both good and bad) part of the corporate reporting structure.
  • Lastly, make the strategy document visible to the team members, the departments, and the or-
    ganization. Create a communication plan, and get the word out that you have a strategy and
    intend to implement this strategy. Always remember that a mediocre plan of action today is bet-
    ter than a perfect plan tomorrow.

References
Dublin, L. (2004). Lessons on e-Learning Strategy Development from the Cheshire Cat.
  ASTD Learning Circuits. http://www.learningcircuits.org/2004/sep2004/dublin.htm
Moore, K. C. (2006). Learning Across the Organization: System Based Learning. METS Learning
  Center, Conference, May 2006. http://www.tier1performance.com/Articles/learningacross.pdf
Moore, K.C., Kincaid, E.W., Shaw, M.A., Hoffer, D.B. (2007) Critical Use of Images in Knowledge-
  Based Dissemination and Learning Systems. Image Conference Proceedings, July 2007, Scottsdale,
  AZ. http://www.tier1performance.com/Articles/image.pdf
Parkin, G. (2006) In an open letter in response to the e-Learning Hype Cycle.
  http://www.e-learningguru.com/articles/ezine1_2c.htm




                                            The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          8
Datasheet




                                      ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 AND®                                 ®


                                      ADOBE CONTRIBUTE CS3 ®                                       ®


                                      CREATE HIGH IMPACT
                                      INFORMAL LEARNING CONTENT
                                      With Adobe Captivate 3 and Adobe                users are turning to informal learning
                                      Contribute CS3 software, anyone can             methods, such as screencasts, podcasts,
                                      rapidly develop screencasts, podcasts,          and blogs. Using Adobe Captivate 3 and
                                      blogs, and websites.                            Contribute CS3, anyone can rapidly develop
                                      In today’s increasingly competitive business    and deploy high-impact informal learning
                                      environment, organizations must nd new          content that increases employee performance
                                      and innovative ways to keep employees’ skills   and enhances skills—without learning how
                                      fresh and productivity high. To do this,        to program in Adobe Flash® or HTML.
                                      corporate trainers, educators, and business



Use Adobe Captivate 3 and                                                                         Easily author content
Adobe Contribute CS3 for:                                                                         in Adobe Captivate.
• Screencasts: Create interactive
  simulations and software
  demonstrations in Adobe
  Captivate 3, and drag and drop
  the screencast into a blog or web
  page using Contribute CS3.
• Podcasts: Export MP3 audio les
  from Adobe Captivate 3 and link
  them to a website or blog using
  Contribute CS3.
• Blogs: Add rich content and take
  advantage of formatting options
  for blogs with Contribute CS3.
• Publishing: Edit HTML pages
  containing Adobe Captivate 3
  content using Contribute CS3.




                                                                                                          Use Adobe Captivate content
                                                                                                          in a blog.




                                      Integrate Adobe
                                      Captivate content
                                      in a web page.
Adobe Captivate 3                                        Adobe Captivate and Adobe Contribute work ow
  System requirements
  Windows®                                                 Adobe Captivate                                                                                             Adobe Contribute
• Intel® Pentium® 4, Intel Centrino® Intel Xeon®
                                    ,             ,
                                                           Create                                                                                                      Edit
  or Intel Core™ Duo (or compatible) processor
• Microsoft® Windows XP with Service Pack 2,
                                                                                                                                                                                    BLOG
  Windows 2000 with Service Pack 2, or Windows
  Vista™ Home Premium, Business, Ultimate,                                                                                                                             SWF
  or Enterprise (certi ed for 32-bit editions)                 CAPTIVATE                                              HTML
• 512MB of RAM (1GB recommended)                                                                                                                                  Insert or drag and drop the SWF file into your
• 700MB of available hard-disk space                                                                                                                              web page or blog. The SWF file automatically
  (additional free space required during installation)                                                                                                            starts playing within the WYSIWYG editor.
                                                                                                                             SWF
• DVD-ROM drive
• 800x600 screen resolution                                Record screen actions and                                 Publish the SWF file from                    HTML

  (1,024x768 recommended)                                  create a Flash Player                                     Adobe Captivate. The SWF
                                                           compatible SWF file that                                  and HTML files are generated.
• Internet or phone connection required                    contains the demonstration
                                                                                                                                                                              SWF
  for product activation                                   or interactive simulation.
                                                                                                                                                                  Use Contribute to modify the HTML file
  Adobe Contribute CS3                                                                                                                                            generated by Adobe Captivate, and add a
                                                                                                                                                                  title, description, or other content around
  System requirements                                                                                                                                             the SWF file.
  Windows
• Intel Pentium 4, Intel Centrino, Intel Xeon,
  or Intel Core Duo (or compatible) processor
• Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2
  or Windows Vista Home Premium, Business,                 Use Adobe Captivate 3 to create                                               Use Adobe Contribute CS3 to edit
  Ultimate, or Enterprise (certi ed for 32-bit editions)   screencasts and podcasts                                                      and update blogs and web pages
• 512MB of RAM                                             With Adobe Captivate 3, learning                                              Contribute CS3 enables you to easily add
• 1GB of available hard-disk space                         professionals, educators, and business or                                     content to and update websites and blogs.
• 1,024x768 monitor resolution with 16-bit
                                                           enterprise users can rapidly create interactive                               As blogs become more prevalent, Contribute
  video card
• DVD-ROM drive                                            simulations, so ware demonstrations, and                                      CS3 enables organizations to take advantage
• Internet or phone connection required for                scenario-based training complete with                                         of this alternative form of eLearning.
  product activation                                       quizzing and scoring without programming
• For the Contribute web browser plug-in:                                                                                                With Contribute CS3, you can simply drag
                                                           or multimedia skills. en, using Contribute
  Internet Explorer 6 or 7 or Firefox 2                                                                                                  and drop your Adobe Captivate SWF le onto
                                                           CS3, they can post and publish this learning
• For the Microsoft O ce plug-in: O ce 2003,                                                                                             a web page or blog entry. True WYSIWYG
  2006, or 2007                                            content as screencasts or podcasts onto
                                                                                                                                         authoring capabilities let you see exactly how
                                                           websites and blogs.
  Macintosh                                                                                                                              your content will look prior to publishing.
• PowerPC® G4 or G5 or multicore Intel processor           Use Adobe Captivate 3 to create a new product                                 When you’re ready, Contribute CS3 automati-
• Mac OS X v.10.4.8
                                                           demonstration by capturing onscreen actions,                                  cally creates the HTML code and loads the
• 512MB of RAM
                                                           and drag and drop the resulting SWF le into                                   Adobe Captivate SWF le. With Adobe
• 1.4GB of available hard-disk space
• 1,024x768 monitor resolution with 16-bit                 a blog using Contribute CS3. Or record an                                     Captivate 3 and Contribute CS3, anyone can
  video card                                               audio le in Adobe Captivate 3, export it in                                   create media-rich, just-in-time training—with
• DVD-ROM drive                                            MP3 format, and link the MP3 le to a website                                  a few, simple mouse clicks.
• Internet or phone connection required for
                                                           or blog using Contribute CS3—without any
  product activation
• For the Contribute web browser plug-in:
                                                           HTML knowledge.
  Firefox 2
  Note: You do not need Adobe Dreamweaver®
                                                                                                            Adobe Captivate 3             Adobe Contribute CS3
  CS3 software when using Contribute CS3.
                                                               Screencasting                                            •
 For more information
                                                               Podcasting*                                              •
 For more information about Adobe Captivate 3,
 visit www.adobe.com/products/captivate.                       Interactive simulations                                  •
 For more information about Adobe Contribute CS3,              Blogging                                                                                 •
 visit, www.adobe.com/products/contribute.
                                                               Web page editing                                                                         •
                                                           *   Export audio les in MP3 format



                                                           Adobe, the Adobe logo, Captivate, Contribute, Dreamweaver, and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
                                                           in the United States and/or other countries. Mac OS and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Intel, Intel
                                                           Centrino, Intel Core, Intel Xeon, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other
                                                           countries. PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows,
                                                           and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks
 Adobe Systems Incorporated                                are the property of their respective owners. The names and logos referred to in the sample artwork are ctional and not intended to refer to any actual
 345 Park Avenue                                           organization or products.
 San Jose, CA 95110-2704
 USA                                                       © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
 www.adobe.com                                             95009176 7/07
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2
                               CHAPTER                        2


                               Strategies for
                               Transition to
                               e-Learning
                               By Frank Hanfland



                               C         ompanies are eager to implant e-Learning and learning management systems into their organ-
                                         izations, and for good reason. The last 20 years have seen significant changes in how learning
                                  in the workplace occurs. There has been a greater focus on informal learning, such as instant collab-
                                  oration, Intranets, Internet searches, task meetings, and knowledge bases. People expect only a min-
                                  ority of training to be so strategic that it requires a formal instructor-led approach, and even in these
                                  cases the benefits of e-Learning-based content have been without question.
                                     Changes in workplace dynamics also dictate changes in how we train our workforce. Mobile work-
                                  forces, globalization of companies, and faster product evolution challenge training organizations
                                  with concepts such as just-in-time training, localization, and mobile learning.
                                     The increasing cost of instructor-led training stemming, not only from the increasing cost of trav-
                                  el but also from the increasing cost of being unproductive while attending a class, makes e-Learning
                                  an attractive proposition.
                                     Finally, the influence of technology into every profession allows us to support and train our em-
                                  ployees better than ever before. Take for example an elevator repair technician – known for blue cov-
                                  eralls and a toolbox. Today, the same technician accesses the company’s intranet using a PDA to ref-
                                  erence a repair manual in order to complete the job.
                                     But you should realize that installing a learning management system (LMS) or buying an e-Learn-
                                  ing course from a vendor, and implementing a strategic e-Learning solution that transforms a com-
                                  pany’s culture into a performance support culture are two completely different things.
                                     Before we even begin to discuss how to successfully implement an e-Learning solution, we need
                                  to establish a baseline to measure against. The first task before writing any project plan is to collect
Contents                                                    data. If there is an existing e-Learning offering, document quantitative data
                                                            such as how much the system is costing you, and measure the return on
 In Chapter 2 you will find information about:
                                                            investment. Collect any qualitative shortcomings, such as system perform-
 • E-Learning deployment overview
 • Assessment
                                                            ance issues.
 • Design and selection                                        Organizations that do not have an e-Learning offering should document
 • Implementation                                           how much travel is costing, how many hours employees are not productive
 • Go-Live                                                  because of training attendance, and any time lags between training require-
 • Evaluation                                               ment and actual training occurrence.




                                                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         11
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




                    E-Learning deployment overview
                       Once you have established a baseline, it is time to discuss how to deploy an e-Learning solution.
                    E-Learning deployments can be challenging because of the many different aspects you must consid-
                    er. (See Figure 2-1.) Failing to properly manage such a strategic change can be costly, at best delaying
                    acceptance and positive returns on investment, and at worst having a failed implementation whose
                    performance does not align with the organization’s needs. Because of these different aspects I have
                                                                                 divided deployment into five phases, and
                                                                                 each phase will be broken into four man-
                                                                                 aged areas. In the following sections we
                                                                                 will take a closer look at each phase, and
                                                                                 each area within each phase.
                                                                                     Figure 2-1 helps to break down the
                                                                                 complexities of a successful e-Learning
                                                                                 deployment into manageable pieces.
                                                                                 Nevertheless, a successful implementation
                                                                                 can take several months, and up to several
                                                                                 years, depending on the factors you assess
                                                                                 in the first phase.

                                                                                 Timing
Figure 2-1            The following sections describe the deployment methods in more detail, but don’t answer one
Transition phases
                    question: When to start. One of the proven ways to find the right time is to align with major organi-
                    zational events that pose tremendous challenges on a training organizations, such as a company-
                    wide industry-standard certification, or a major ERP implementation. After all — it’s hard to find a
                    sponsor if it’s business as usual. These challenges are large enough to warrant e-Learning deployment
                    and a change to the way you deliver training. These types of projects — while not strictly training
                    projects by themselves — are also so large from a budgetary standpoint that organization-wide
                    e-Learning deployment can be included in those budgets. Sooner or later there will have to be train-
                    ing delivery — so e-Learning deployment might as well be a part of them.

                    Assessment
                      The first phase, and one of the most important ones, is to assess the needs of the organization.
                    We’ll have a closer look at what needs you might assess for each area. This phase is an important
                    milestone, because the results will provide answers to some basic, but heavy-weighing questions,
                    such as how long the project will take, how many resources might be needed, how much budget
                    might be needed, and what success might look like.

                    Assess technology requirements
                       In order to arrive at a solution that works at optimum levels for your organization, technology
                    requirements focus on the LMS you will need in order to launch personalized content and track par-
                    ticipation.
                       This logical separation is possible because most providers of LMSs comply with either the AICC
                    or SCORM standard, which outlines how content interacts with the system. The exceptions are
                    learning content management systems (LCMS), which in many cases combine learning management
                    with content creation and delivery, and require a combined technology strategy.



                                                            The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          12
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




  I will not cover every aspect of technology implementation, or LMS selection, as there are detailed
buying guides available — rather I will provide key pointers for a successful technology assessment.

Legacy systems
  A first look should be given to any available legacy systems that have served your organization,
because they can provide a wealth of information, such as who uses the system, how many users
there are, how it is configured, how well it works, and what improvement opportunities exist.

Data interfaces
   Data interfaces play an ever-increasing role in today’s human resource and performance manage-
ment strategies. These systems not only collect data, but often times need to “talk” to each other.
Data interfaces might exist (or might be needed) between human resources information systems
(HRISs), ensuring that employee data in both systems match, or talent management systems (TMSs)
might need to know the exact qualifications a person has obtained through training, and the LMS
needs to know what qualifications a person might need to fulfill their job. These bring up a potential
interface need between the LMS and an organizational management system (OMS). Large compa-
nies often employ enterprise resource planning (ERP) software, which may combine all these differ-
ent information systems into one, making interfacing somewhat easier. The key point is that you’ll
need to assess what information your system needs to function as expected.

Hosted or installed
   Another question might be whether to purchase a perpetual license for your system and have it
installed at your site or to deploy a hosted version. A hosted version usually runs at the vendor’s data
center, and is also known as a Software as Service (SAS) or Application Service Provider (ASP)
model. Either deployment may make sense for your organization. The choice of which model to
deploy depends on budget, available in-house support, and the level of customization and data secu-
rity that may be required.

Must-have features
   Must-have features are clearly defined: If the system does not have it, it must either be customized
to provide that feature, or this system cannot be a contender. Such features might include support
for standards-compliant content, accessibility (Section 508 compliance), various features of day-to-
day administrative tasks, or legacy content compatibility.
   The way to assess what features are needed and how these features are supposed to work is
through interviews with stakeholders, administrators, and end users. High-level stakeholders might
provide insight into which data they need and what reporting might have to look like, and in the end
they have to approve the budget. However, end users have to use the system on a daily basis, so their
input is of extreme importance. If the system does not function as expected at that level, end users
won’t want to work with it, posing a threat to the organizational change requirement that drove the
e-Learning implementation. Don’t forget to look into international locations if your organization
has them, as their needs may vary greatly from your domestic system needs. For example, if your
company needs to deploy content in Southeast Asia, the system must be able to support those lan-
guages.

Desired features
    Implementing a new system entirely from scratch provides an opportunity to reach for the sky.


                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          13
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




If properly planned, you can implement many features that are “nice-to-have” such as mobile con-
tent for example. Again, the best way to find out is to ask key stakeholders and end users at various
levels throughout the organization.

Assess content requirements
   Content requirements vary greatly whether the e-Learning deployment is a first effort in this dir-
ection, or if there are existing systems that house content. In many cases content creation, conver-
sion, and purchasing of new content continue while implementing the new system, because for
e-Learning to be effective, there must be content. Even with modern rapid development methodolo-
gies, creating content costs time and money. In the end, whether to handle content creation and con-
version in-house or to outsource these efforts depends on available resources and budget.

Instructional design requirements
   You need to assess instructional design requirements to ensure that content creation strategy sup-
ports the required training results. A strategy to convert static slides into e-Learning might be suffi-
cient to teach the outline points, but lack of interaction and learner engagement pose challenges in
regards to content retention. This is a good time to look closely at the organization’s instructional
design strategy and ensure that content can support it.

Content creation
  Key questions to ask are about the features newly created content must support. Will there be
audio, video, streaming content, and live collaboration? How much content must you produce? Is
the content that you will create during the deployment compatible with all systems?

Content conversion
  Is the existing content (if any) standards-compliant, or will it need to be converted? If it needs to
be converted, how much effort is involved?

Off-the-shelf content
   Off-the-shelf content can be a viable solution to a company’s need to rapidly create content or
eliminate the need to convert content. Most commercially available content is standards-compliant
and provides the advantage of being cost-effective and rapidly deployed compared to custom course-
ware.

Must-have features
   Whether developed in-house, outsourced, or purchased, these features are critical to your organi-
zation’s needs, and might include glossaries, audio narration, videos, live text chats, or a wealth of
other features that may be available in modern e-Learning content. Too many features might be dis-
tracting from the actual content, so finding the right balance is important. Key stakeholders, admin-
istrators, and end users will be able to provide answers as to which features are critical to fill the
organization’s needs. Be certain to include a look into the foreseeable future to ensure that the con-
tent strategy will support next-generation content.

Nice-to-have features
  Similar to the technology requirements assessment, now is the time to add any “bells and whistles”



                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          14
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




to the content, if the organization’s needs warrant them. Such features might include customizable
content based on learner experience and proficiency. Be aware that you must also support any fea-
ture.

Assess change management requirements
  Change management is often the most neglected part in many deployments; nevertheless it plays
an important role in your deployment. Deploying a new e-Learning strategy is a change, and people
are naturally afraid of the unknown.

Communication strategy
   Questions to ask include, “Who will be responsible for communication?” Sometimes the answer is
easy: You are! Some larger organizations have an entire change management office, which will handle
communication for this project. Other factors include the size of the user base, ranging from a single
administrator to potentially thousands of users. You should pay particular attention to the percep-
tion of technology deployments. Do users trust the company with the deployment of a key strategy?
Or, is the perception such that users feel another short-term failure arising?

Training strategy
  The assessment should focus on what processes will change, and so will require training, as well as
identify who the changes will affect. You need to pay close attention to available resources to develop
and deliver the training.

Assess organizational development
   The organizational development assessment not only establishes a current state of the organiza-
tion from a business process and organizational structure point of view, but also needs to identify
any opportunities that need addressing through e-Learning and LMS deployments.

Business processes
   Each and every business process affected by this project needs to be documented and validated.
Many organizations have documented business processes and procedures; but many do not have
such vital documentation. This is the time to identify whether or not current processes serve the
organization’s need, or if the process is broken. It simply does not make any sense to implement a
process that does not align with the reality of business. The result of the assessment should be a clear
vision of which documentation exists, which you will have to create, and how you will create it.

Support requirements
   Any new deployment will require support. Your organization must be prepared to handle support
calls from the first minute the system goes live, and should expect a higher incident volume during
the initial few weeks after go-live.
   The assessment needs to identify how you will handle support and what the support structure
looks like. Is there a dedicated support group in your organization? Can this support group handle
e-Learning support, and if yes, how will you train them? Does the vendor provide support, and if
yes, who is the key contact? Will the support organization be tiered, and if yes, who has access to
what tier level?




                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          15
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




Organizational structure
  What information is available about the organization layout, and is the information correct? Is the
organizational structure granular enough to assign training to the position level? Is it grouped into
families that allow setting rules for entire groups of similar requirements?

Talent management
   Is there a talent management process or system? What process does succession planning follow?
Are these processes integrated? At a minimum, the assessment needs to outline the qualifications to
track, and what e-Learning offerings fulfill these qualifications.

Personnel changes
  Determine any reduction, addition, or transformation in personnel that might be required. For
example the organization might need fewer instructors after the successful deployment, but will
require more performance support coaches. You need to assess these types of transitions so you can
properly manage them.

Summary of the assessment phase
  The assessment phase breaks the needs of the organization that must be addressed into manage-
able pieces. To use a paradigm, the assessment phase results in the list of ingredients that are required
for each of the courses in this five-course menu. The next phase, “Design and Selection” establishes
the recipe for our meal.

Design and selection
  With the data collected through the assessment phase, the team can begin to design how to fulfill
these needs and select products and vendors to provide some of these services. We will spend less
time on this section, since the varying methodologies for each potential element, and their associated
benefits and drawbacks, are beyond the scope of this book.

Design the technology strategy
  This element deals with the selection of an LMS or LCMS that will provide your organization’s
e-Learning content, track participation, evaluate learning paths, and so on. What exactly this system
needs to do depends directly on the technology assessment completed during the first phase.

Select vendor or design in-house development plan
   There are over 1,500 commercially available LMSs at varying price points, featuring an even wider
list of features. Which system is best for your organization will most likely represent a compromise
between how well features fit your needs and budget available for customizations. Other organiza-
tions might choose to develop the system in-house. The advantage is that the system is custom-tai-
lored to the organization’s needs, however it may take much longer to implement. As mentioned ear-
lier, there are detailed buying guides that will allow your organization to make the best choice for its
individual needs.

Design data interfaces and customizations
   In this section the team designs the identified data interfaces. This includes interface methodology,
such as batch file loading or live data transmission, data elements to be exchanged, data format,
direction of travel from system to system, and frequency of exchange. In addition, any customiza-


                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          16
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




tions that will have to be made to a vendor-supplied system should be designed at this time.

Design user interfaces and portals
   Depending on your organizational structure and the needs identified in the assessment, you
should design and acceptance-test any user interface before fully developing it. In addition, your
organization might require the design of several separate portals to provide the look, feel, and func-
tionality the portal owner requires.

Design content strategy
  This element deals with the methodology and processes the organization will use to populate the
e-Learning solution with content that aligns with the organization’s requirements.

Design course catalog and qualification catalog
   The first step should be to design the course catalog, based on the facts learned during the assess-
ment. The design is dependent on many factors, for example, which courses exist, which need to be
developed, and how courses are classified. At this point some of the separately-managed areas begin
to flow together. Because you established the qualification catalog’s needs during the organizational
change assessment, the design focuses on how the course catalog fulfills the qualification require-
ments.

Design content development methodology
   Based on the assessment, select the methodology used to develop content. For example, you might
choose rapid content development for informal training, online collaboration for meetings, and tra-
ditional development for strategic courses. You will establish content development processes, roles,
and responsibilities and create the design methodology guidelines.

Design performance support methodology
  Design the required performance support based on the organization’s needs, such as knowledge
bases, intranets, job aids, and coaching programs, just to name a few.

Software and vendor selection
   Based on the identified content development methodology and the assessed content needs, you
can select the appropriate software. Sometimes this step closely aligns with the content development
methodology, because software can dictate which capabilities are available. Quite often it is the soft-
ware that pushes the envelope of what was thought to be impossible. At this time it is also appropri-
ate to select any vendors that might be required.

Design change management plan
  The change management plan provides the roadmap to fulfill the change management needs
identified during the first phase. The change management plan should, at a minimum, address the
basic change management phases (preparing for change, managing change, reinforcing change), and
should include assessments to evaluate how well the change management plan addresses the compa-
ny’s needs.

Communication plan
  The communication plan should not only focus on communication to users outside of the project


                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          17
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




team, but should also establish guidelines of how communication within the project team is to occur.
Based on facts gathered during the assessment, design a plan that specifies who communicates what
and when, to which group, and by what method. For internal team communication, design a plan
that includes how progress reports, design changes, major events, availability of prototypes, and
demonstrations are handled.

Training plan
    One of the most important parts is the training plan. The training plan establishes who attends
training, when training occurs, what needs to be trained, and by what means training needs are ful-
filled. This not only ensures that end users are trained on the day the system goes live, but, for exam-
ple, ensures that content providers are familiar with the methodology and development tools.

Design organizational development plan
  The organizational development plan specifies the tasks and methodology that ensures that
e-Learning deployment aligns closely with the organizational structure. The design not only focuses
on processes, but also on how resources are organized and deployed. In many organizations organi-
zational development is part of the human resources function, and any changes assessed in phase
one should have been assessed with the help of human resources professionals.

Design business processes
   Any new business processes and procedures that have been identified, as well as those seen as be-
ing broken, need to be planned. The design not only involves the process, but also how the system
facilitates the process. In addition, you need to validate the design, and you must consider any
impact on dependent processes.

Design the support structure
  This design specifies the responsibilities for supporting any incidents arising during and after the
deployment. It should include incident levels and support level matrices, and should outline minimum
acceptable response times. If a vendor provides support, it is a good time to begin the selection process.

Design roles and responsibilities
  This step deals with designing user roles and responsibilities as well as user permissions. The
design should include hierarchical roles based on the organizational assessment.

Design changes to organizational structure
  Any change to the organizational structure requires some form of plan, such as designing job
descriptions for any added administrators, or specifying how changes to the reporting structure will
be facilitated.

Summary of the design and selection phase
   At this time there should be no more unknown factors in any area, and you should have answers
to all questions on how to deploy e-Learning. All affected team members and departments should be
clearly in the picture — not only that change will come, but what will change, and how the change
will be accomplished. At this time the various clearly separated managed areas during the assessment
phase begin to re-connect, such as the training plan being dependent on the organizational structure
and content development strategy.


                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         18
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




Implementation
   You could also call this phase development, but because any deployment requires so much devel-
opment of specifications and documents and plans at each stage, a different name was needed. This
is the time where you’ll hire contractors and vendors to bring the plans and designs to fruition.

Implement technology solution
   In this step you’ll work together with system vendors and your in-house IT departments to ensure
that the assessed technology needs and the LMS or LCMS will be implemented as designed. In rare
cases this managed element of the deployment might be combined with content integration, as some
IT departments centrally manage all software deployments, including the software used to create con-
tent. It may be that the software used to create content is actually part of the LMS or LCMS package.

Configure and program the system and develop customizations
   The vendor that will supply the LMS will most likely be supplying the consultants that install and
configure the system — even though there are exceptions. If the system is being developed in-house,
the implementation process will most likely be under the umbrella of the IT organization to ensure
that the system complies with IT rules. This area may also flow together with other areas, because
any data interfaces that were identified in earlier phases will be developed. The primary task for the
deployment team is to manage the project timelines, and to ensure that development coincides with
established business processes and procedures.

Data migration
  Whether this is a new deployment or a replacement, you need to populate the system with data.
This data consists of users, organizational structure, the course catalog, and every other type of data
that was identified through the assessment phase. Not only do you transfer the data, but it may also
be transformed to fit the needs of the new system. It is critical to validate that this process has not
compromised data integrity.

Testing of functionality against business processes and procedures
   As you reach every major milestone in implementing the functionality of the system, you need to
test and validate it against the design documents. And you need to validate any deviations from the
design document to ensure that business processes and procedures are not disrupted by the devia-
tion.

User acceptance testing
  Don’t forget the end users. Does the developed product align with reality? The thorough assess-
ment phase should ensure that the majority of all functionality is well aligned with the real-life tasks
that are to be performed. Because business is ever changing, in some instances a process might have
been changed without that change being documented in a design document.

Content strategy implementation
   This step is most likely the most time consuming, especially if there is a lot of existing content that
needs conversion. While this document treats each of the managed areas in sequence, in reality, con-
tent conversion and creation has been an ongoing process while implementing the technology solu-
tion. This is a good time to demonstrate the system’s capabilities to end users and stakeholders.



                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         19
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




Convert existing content
   Existing standards-compliant content needs to be validated for functionality and migrated to the
new system. In some cases you need to move assessments (tests and quizzes) separately from the con-
tent. Content that is not standards-compliant needs to be re-engineered to migrate to the new system.

Create content though vendors or in-house
   New content might have to be developed and be ready for go-live if this deployment is completely
new. Developers might need extensive coaching and close project management if you have deployed
a new development methodology, such as rapid learning,

Order off-the-shelf content
  This step might seem simple, and most of the time it is, but you must validate proper functionality.

Create media elements
   A new system and new content methodology almost always provides the ability to explore new
content media types. Not too long ago, video over the Web was unthinkable, while today it is reality.
Software simulations have historically been prohibitively expensive, but recent advances in develop-
ment tools have made them very affordable. These new media elements need to be developed and
tested.

Change management plan implementation
   During this stage communication within and outside the core teams continues, and training activ-
ities take place.

Send communications as defined by plan
  As I mentioned earlier, this chapter treats the separate managed elements in sequence. In reality,
several parts of the change management plan will already have been completed and been communi-
cated. Communication to stakeholders and end users becomes more critical as the go-live date
approaches. This does not only include announcements to end users, but also progress and budget
reports to the business sponsors.

Deploy training according to plan
   As with the previous step, some training might already have occurred for select audiences, howev-
er the majority of training, as defined by the assessment, occurs as soon as you have developed the
system to a stable version.

Organizational development implementation
  This step is largely the result of collaboration with other departments on the organizational needs.
The resulting assessment and design documents from previous phases outline the tasks to be per-
formed in the step.

Load user profiles and qualification catalog
   This step has been included here because it not only consists of a data set, but also reflects any
changes to the organizational structure such as the relationship between positions, jobs, people, qual-
ifications, and courses.



                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          20
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




Implement new business processes
  You must implement any new or modified business processes, and associated training needs to
occur. You build the support structure for the new system at this time.

Implement changes to job descriptions
   Implement any changes to job descriptions and communicate them across the human resources
and recruiting organizations, as well as to affected individuals and their managers. These changes not
only affect the job descriptions, but the people that hold these jobs, including the consequences of
eliminated or significantly changed positions.

Summary of implementation phase
  The implementation phase can be hectic and overwhelming for any involved person. A good
design plan and solid project management will ensure that the deployment stays on track. This phase
can also be exciting, because months of planning become reality.

Go-live
   This phase is most likely the most anticipated phase of all — though I will never understand the
reasons for that. If all aspects of the project have been analyzed thoroughly, all design has been
thoughtful, and all implementation has been completed thoroughly, there is no need for excitement
and working into the wee early morning hours on the day of go-live. Go-live should simply consist
of enabling the one file or setting that allows end users to access the live system. You should have
completed every other aspect during an earlier phase. You should be able to sit back, relax, and have
a little celebration — and the team certainly deserves it.

Evaluation
   Like all the previous phases, the evaluation phase is broken into the same distinct managed areas.
Generally speaking, this evaluation should occur between 90 to 120 days after go-live. This time
range is a suggestion, and evaluation can occur as soon as you can collect meaningful data — gener-
ally you need at least 10% utilization before a statistical trend can be predicted. You should collect
the feedback received during this phase, and evaluate it for Version 2.0 or for the first maintenance
update.

Evaluate technology solution
  During this evaluation you analyze the system. Is the functionality as expected across all functional
areas? Are there any bugs? Are there workarounds for bugs or deficiencies? Is the reporting of data as
expected?

Evaluate content
  You need to evaluate content against the performance model chosen during the design phase. Many
organizations align their performance evaluation on the Kirkpatrick model. Does the content pro-
vide the expected results in participants? In addition, there may be minor inconsistencies between
content and real-life processes and procedures that may need to be fine tuned.

Evaluate change management
  You should document any lessons learned in this area. How did the user population react to the



                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          21
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




change communications and the system implementation? What impact (either positive or negative)
did vendor relations have on the project? What were the major obstacles, and how were they over-
come? Did training occur for the correct audiences when needed?

Evaluate organizational change
   This last area is the most important one from a strategic point of view — and it is the one ques-
tion stakeholders will ask — probably before the data is available: What was the return on invest-
ment (ROI)? It is, after all, a business decision to implement e-Learning — so there should be an
anticipatable profit from the investment — or a significant reduction in cost that offsets the invest-
ment. The ROI should align with the needs analyses — the very reason why the system was imple-
mented in the first place. ROI can be calculated in many ways, and there are many good books and
guides on the market to explore this topic deeper. We will focus on three main areas.

Quantitative benefits
   Quantitative benefits are those that you can easily measure, and the most interesting quantity to
stakeholders is the amount of money saved or received as income. How many hours of instructor-
led training were delivered via e-Learning? How many travel dollars did that save? How many more
hours of customer face-time did that provide to the workforce? How much additional sales revenue
derived from that additional face-time? Another example may be a technology roll-out that used
e-Learning for performance support. How many fewer calls to the help desk? How much money did
the reduced call volume save? How many more services can a tech perform because they don’t have
to call the help desk? How many fewer errors occurred because support is available where needed?
How many dollars did that error-reduction save?

Qualitative benefits
   These benefits are important, yet hard to translate into firm dollar figures. They may include a
more motivated employee base, confirmed though a survey. But it is hard to link that directly to a
dollar figure. Another benefit might be a reduced product development cycle, because the associated
training rolls out faster. That is especially true in telecom and technology industries, where an entire
product life-cycle can be shorter than a traditional training development cycle. In these types of situ-
ations, e-Learning is an enabler, but you cannot credit it with a firm dollar amount — either because
the data does not exist, or the relationship between income and e-Learning-based training delivery is
too indirect.

Unrealized benefits
   You will usually realize these benefits somewhat later than quantitative and qualitative benefits.
They include all types of benefits that were not part of the original needs assessment. An elevator
company, for example, might experience a reduction in traffic accidents, because there had to be
fewer trips to correct installation issues. In another very interesting scenario, an organization realized
that their LMS and e-Learning development method was so effective that they abandoned their tra-
ditional IT-managed Internet and Intranet and transitioned them to the training department — now
known as the Corporate Communication and Change Management Department.

Summary of the evaluation phase
  The evaluation phase proves the effectiveness of the project, and records the lessons learned. It
provides business meaning to the entire project — because if the ROI does not align with the identi-


                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          22
S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2




fied organizational needs, or if it provides a negative number, you cannot consider the project a suc-
cess — no matter how innovative it might have been. If, on the other hand, it exceeds ROI expecta-
tions and the organization benefits from the deployment — the deployment must be considered a
success — no matter how un-innovative or crude the solution is.

Conclusion
  As mentioned in the introduction, e-Learning deployments (including LMS installations) can be
challenging projects because they affect multiple areas in the organization though multiple phases,
each requiring their own project plan — and to complicate matters, each area flows into another
area. However, by using the pointers in this chapter, you can identify a starting point and realize a
road map through the entire cycle of a successful deployment.




                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          23
The E Learning Guild’S Handbook Of E Learning Strategy
The E Learning Guild’S Handbook Of E Learning Strategy
The E Learning Guild’S Handbook Of E Learning Strategy
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3
                               CHAPTER                        3


                               Design Strategies
                               for Online and
                               Blended Learning
                               By Patti Shank



                               A           lthough the grandiose assertions that e-Learning would take over all instruction never materi-
                                           alized (as if … ), the use of technology for learning is quickly becoming ubiquitous. That is,
                                  people no longer see it as separate from “regular” learning, and it is viewed as part of the tools that
                                  trainers, instructional designers, instructors, and others who design or deliver instruction use to
                                  impact skills and performance.
                                      Companies have implemented diverse approaches to using technologies to meet their training
                                  needs and good and not-so-good outcomes have helped us better understand what works well, less
                                  well, and not at all, and in what circumstances. Synchronous e-Learning systems such as WebEx™ or
                                  Adobe® Connect™ were a natural first step for many, because synchronous online training feels the
                                  most like what trainers, subject matter experts, and learners were already used to — someone pre-
                                  senting to a group of people. But a synchronous approach reduces the “any time, any place” aspect of
                                  using the Internet to learn to “any place” so this approach isn’t best for all training needs. Initially,
                                  some began by putting content such as Microsoft® PowerPoint® slides and manuals on the Web, and
                                  had to learn the hard way that while this may indeed be content (and not very good content at that),
                                  it isn’t instruction. Some who built custom self-paced e-Learning have been dismayed to find that
                                  getting staff to use it, and making it work on their Learning Management System (LMS), is far from
                                  a walk in the park.
                                        Recently, people have promoted rapid e-Learning as a panacea to overcome the typical tribula-
                                  tions of e-Learning design and development, including long development cycles, high cost, and need
                                  for high-end design and development skills. Rapid e-Learning can reduce time, cost, and need for
                                  advanced design skills, but it’s not any more of a panacea than other one-size-fits-all approaches.
                                        This chapter concentrates on four key design strategy decisions that e-Learning designers and
Contents                          developers should consider, and the criteria for considering them. They include deciding whether:
                                                                       • instruction or information is needed;
 In Chapter 3 you will find information about:
                                                                       • face-to-face classroom, online, or real life approaches will work
 • Decision #1: Instruction or information                               best;
 • Decision #2: Classroom, online, or real life                        • synchronous or asynchronous instruction makes the most sense;
 • Decision #3: Synchronous or asynchronous                            • a traditional or rapid design approach should be used to build the
 • Decision #4: Traditional or rapid design                              materials.
                                                                       One size does not fit all (learners, courses, organizations). The



                                                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         27
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                              approach taken for retail clerks in stores with limited Internet or network access needs to be different
                              than the approach taken for office workers who have all-you-can-eat Internet and network access on
                              their desks.
                                 Just as different audiences and access to network resources merit different approaches, so do dif-
                              ferent types of courses. For example, company A’s onboarding process for new salespeople starts out
                              with self-paced product lessons and assessments and then real life job shadowing with experienced
                              reps. Product updates use a rapid get-it-out-the-door-because-it’s-needed-NOW approach, utilizing
                              a PowerPoint with narration to Adobe® Flash® tool (such as Articulate® Presenter™ or Microsoft
                              Producer™). Initial sales training uses online branching scenarios (using a tool like Adobe Capti-
                              vate™ or Flash, Articulate Engage™, or NexLearn™ SimWriter™) with classroom-based practice
                              sessions.
                                 You wouldn’t want to force all instruction into one box, would you? (I’m being sarcastic, in case
                              that’s not clear; too many do just that, with less-than-acceptable results.) The right approach begins
                              with a well thought-out plan that identifies key business needs and how training and other perform-
                              ance interventions will support them. A training plan should identify which of the approaches des-
                              cribed in this chapter will be used and why. Research shows that organizations that put adequate
                              effort into planning are significantly more likely to be satisfied with training outcomes.
                                 There are many complex decisions to make when e-Learning is part of the mix. Welcome to the
                              e-Learning-can-make-you-tear-your-hair-out club. I paid the first year’s dues on your behalf.

                              Strategy decision #1: Instruction or information
                                    The first strategy decision is what type of content you need to build. Table 3-1 shows various types
                                 of content and where they would typically fall on a continuum from instruction to information. In-
                                 struction generally requires much more effort to design than information. Where a certain project
                                 (or piece of a project) falls on the continuum will help you determine what other approaches make
                                 sense. For example, informational content rarely deserves as much time and effort as instructional
                                 content. An example of hybrid information and instruction for software product updates for field
                                 sales would be instructional demos of new features and Q&A sessions delivered through Webinars,
Table 3-1                        while the information for field sales would be downloadable PDF files describing features, specifica-
                                                                           tions, and benefits (useful as information and performance
 Instruction — information continuum                                       support).
                                                                              Instruction has a specific purpose — to change learners’
 Instruction                                               Information
                                                                           knowledge and skills for a specific purpose. In a training
                                                                           environment, you build instruction to change what workers
 Module, lesson, course,                               Who, what, why,     do on the job and to positively impact important business
 tutorial, demo, game, practice,                       when, where
 simulation, quiz, test
                                                                           goals. Instruction typically includes assessments, activities
                                                                           that help learners practice, and content that helps learners
                                                                           perform well on activities and assessments. The typical pur-
                                 pose of information, however, is to increase comprehension. Should you build instruction, informa-
                                 tion, or both for a given training project? Take a look at the attributes shown in Table 3-2 on page 29
                                 and see which of them apply to the project. And if both apply, consider a hybrid instruction and
                                 information solution, as described in the software product updates example.

                              Strategy decision #2: Classroom (face-to-face), online,
                              or real life
                                 Another important strategy decision is whether to use classroom, online, or real life (also known


                                                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        28
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                              as on-the-job) learning environments to best meet the needs of learners and the organization. In
Table 3-2                     reality, a combination is often best. Learners scattered around the globe will have better access to
                                                                        training if it is available in self-paced modules online. A new
 Attributes of instruction and information                              call-center employee may sit with, and listen in on, a success-
                                                                        ful call-center employee’s calls in order to learn how to han-
               Instruction                      Information
                                                                        dle a variety of real-life call types. People learning conflict
 Purpose        Gain skills via practice      Improve comprehen-        management skills are likely to have better practice opportu-
                and feedback                  sion                      nities in a classroom. Practice in cleaning up hazardous waste
 Audience       Often built for narrower      Often built for wider     spills would be best using a real spill, but it would be too dan-
                audiences                     audiences
                                                                        gerous (and unethical). And since there are (happily) few real
 Content        Purposely limited, may        Often less restricted
                link to additional content to meet wider audi-          opportunities to practice these skills, simulations make more
                                              ence needs                sense.
 Interface      Simpler interfaces,           Less restricted con-         In many cases, the best approach is one that works and is
                reuse so users know           tent requires careful     also possible.
                what to expect                interface design and
                                              testing                      Table 3-3 shows benefits and challenges of classroom,
 Activities     Support learning and          Quickly locate infor-     online, and real-life instruction. Because they have different
                transfer                      mation                    benefits, a combination is often optimal. This approach helps
 Multimedia     Use when needed to            Use when needed to        makes it possible to gain the benefits of all while mitigating
                improve learning, don’t       improve comprehen-        the challenges. For example, online instruction, combined
                use gratuitously              sion, don’t use gratu-
                                              itously                   with classroom for live practice. Or an online course com-
 Assessments    Test, performance, real-      Survey, multiple          bined with fieldwork and a few face-to-face meetings.
                life performance              choice questions             The question I am asked most often is, “How do I do
                                                                        _____ (fill in the blank with an activity type) online?” Table
                                                                        3-4 on page 30 shows that classroom, online, and real-life
Table 3-3                                                                                             learning environments have differ-
                                                                                                      ent components that can be used
 Benefits and challenges of classroom, online, and real life learning                                 for the same purpose.
             Classroom                     Online                     Real life                          All activities DO NOT need to
                                                                                                      happen online, even in a primarily
 Benefits    Immediate feedback and        Easily scalable            Real examples, not
             support                                                  made up                         online course. For example, Mari-
                                           Possible to customize
             Social aspects                                           Immediate feedback and
                                                                                                      copa Center for Learning and In-
                                           Easier tracking                                            struction’s Writing HTML course
                                                                      support
             Immediacy of feedback
                                           Easier standardization                                     (http://www.mcli.dist.maricopa.
                                                                      Able to see the full com-
             Easy to see performance
                                           Potential for increased    plexity of job skills           edu/tut/) uses online lessons, but
                                           participation
                                                                      Mentoring or coaching           you practice on your computer,
                                           Incremental cost is low-   over time is possible
                                           ered when spread over
                                                                                                      outside of the course. In general, I
                                           wide audience                                              believe we use far too few real-life
                                                                                                      practice elements in our courses.
 Challenges    Usually linear, more time-    Boring when not enough      Non-standardized quality
               bound                         consideration is given to   of on-the-job trainers and   Strategy decision #3:
                                             interaction needs           training process
               Participation is limited by
               available time and need       May be challenging to       Can be time-consuming
                                                                                                      Synchronous or
               to “cover” content            use
                                                                         May need to limit prac-
                                                                                                      asynchronous
               Travel greatly increases      Delayed or nonexistent      tice for safety and other       Technology-based instruction is
               cost                          feedback and support is     concerns                     typically delivered in a synchro-
                                             common
               Not easily scalable                                       Learner may be over-         nous manner (live, same time, dif-
                                             May feel “remote”           whelmed
                                                                                                      ferent locations) or an asynchro-


                                                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       29
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                                nous manner (self-paced or group-paced, different times and places) and the designer needs to det-
                                ermine which (or what combination) of these will work best. Table 3-5 shows some of the benefits
                                and challenges of asynchronous and synchronous online delivery.
                                   In my experience, synchronous instruction is more compelling than asynchronous instruction, all
Table 3-4                       things being equal (which they rarely are). To be compelling, the presenter must know how to use
                                                                                                  synchronous systems to their best
 Instructional components for classroom, online, and real life                                    advantage. But synchronous in-
 learning environments                                                                            struction has some major draw-
                                                                                                  backs, such as needing to have par-
 Purpose     Classroom components          Online components          Real life components
                                                                                                  ticipants there at the same time (a
 Content     Course workbook,              Lesson, animation,         Policies, manuals, job      recorded session is not as com-
 delivery    presentation slides           slides with narration,     aids
                                           Webinar
                                                                                                  pelling).
                                                                                                     The benefits and challenges of
 Activities  Exercises, simulations,       Demo, simulation,          Job shadowing, what-        synchronous and asynchronous
             cases, learning lab           tutorial, cases, problems  would-you-do-if scenarios,
                                                                      real life practice
                                                                                                  delivery plus examples of each
                                                                                                  should help you select delivery
 Assessments Checklist, test, performance Checklist, test, simulation Performance                 modes that make the most sense
 Support,    Instructor, peers, instruc- References (online and       Supervisor, on-the-job      for a given situation. A combina-
 feedback,   tional materials              print), performance sup-   trainer, other workers,     tion often makes the most sense
 and help                                  port tools, application    real life resources
                                           sharing, ask the expert,
                                                                                                  because it provides the benefits of
                                           searchable documenta-                                  both while mitigating the chal-
                                           tion, resource lists                                   lenges. For example, an asynchro-
                                                                                                  nous module combined with a
Table 3-5                                                                                         Web conference to discuss critical
                                                                                                  issues. Or a Webinar, followed by
 Benefits and challenges of asynchronous and synchronous delivery                                 asynchronous discussion to answer
                                                                                                  questions and share resources.
               Synchronous                                Asynchronous

 Benefits      Time set aside                              Convenience
                                                                                                       Strategy decision #4:
               Real-time demonstrations                    Access at work or home
                                                                                                       Traditional or Rapid
               Immediate feedback                          Time to reflect
                                                                                                       Instructional Design
               Visual cues (gauge emotions,                Lack of visual cues (privacy)                  Traditional instructional design,
               understanding)
                                                           Standardized content                        especially when applied to e-Learn-
               Better for poor reading and writing
                                                           Review materials as needed
                                                                                                       ing, commonly uses a detailed
               skills                                                                                  process that takes months or
                                                           Self-direction
               Instructor directed                                                                     longer. (It’s no joke when instruc-
                                                                                                       tional designers say that by the
 Challenges    Inconvenience and logistics — time          Lack of immediacy                           time the course is completed, it’s
               zones
                                                           Lack of visual cues (potential for mis-     often out of date.) It typically
               No time to reflect                          understanding)                              involves a fair amount of analysis, a
               Event oriented                              Frustration when needing help               design team with multiple skills,
               Instructor control                          Easier to avoid                             and iterative cycles of design, dev-
                                                                                                       elopment, and formative evalua-
 Examples      Webinar, application sharing, chat,         Self-paced module, discussion forum,        tion before implementation. This
               instant messaging, real-time collabora-     tutorial, archived Webinar, collaborative
               tion, audio conference, Web conference      writing tools                               approach makes sense when there
                                                                                                       is a need to assure critical job skills


                                                                             The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       30
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                            and outcomes but is too costly and time intensive for many training projects.
                               Figure 3-1 shows the steps of traditional instructional design, and the arrows indicate that there is
                            a great deal of iteration built into the process. The cost for traditional asynchronous self-paced
                                                                    online learning ranges between $10,000 and $100,000+ per hour
                                                                    of learning (typically depending on amount and complexity of
                                                                    programming and multimedia elements). This is cost-prohibitive
                                                                    for materials that are quickly outdated or for less critical training.
                                                                       Rapid instructional design is the name given to instructional
                                                                    design methods that allow for building and delivering instruc-
                                                                    tional content in days or weeks, rather than the long period of
                                                                    time it normally takes to build instruction according to more
                                                                    traditional instructional design methods. It is best to use it for
                                                                    instruction that focuses on knowledge (as opposed to skills) and
                                                                    for information that requires very rapid dissemination.
Figure 3-1                     A rapid instructional design process, shown in Figure 3-2, follows similar steps as a traditional
Traditional instructional   instructional design process but eliminates many of the sub-steps and has far less iteration. Compare
design process
                            the sub-steps of the Design and Develop step in both processes. The effect of reducing sub-steps and
                                                       iteration is a reduction in time and cost.
                                                          Given reduced time and costs, should you use rapid instructional design
                                                       for all e-Learning projects? NO! Some training projects merit the increased
                                                       time and costs, and I’ll discuss why in the next few sections. The choice to
                                                       use a traditional instruction design approach or a rapid design approach
                                                       depends on numerous factors, including the:
                                                          • level of instructional objectives
                                                          • need for skill mastery
                                                          • time sensitivity of the content
                                                          The next section will discuss these three factors.

                                                      Level of instructional objectives
Figure 3-2
Rapid instructional            Figure 3-3 shows a pyramid of instructional objectives, with the lower tiers constituting “KNOW”
design process              objectives and the higher tiers constituting “DO” objectives.
                                                                                       Typical instructional design is often the right
                                                                                    choice for upper-tier instructional objectives.
                                                                    -               Rapid instructional design is often a good choice
                                                                                    for lower-tier instructional objectives. For exam-
                                                                                    ple, List the benefits of a Roth IRA is a lower-tier
                                                                                    instructional objective. But Develop a care plan for
                                                                                    a critically ill child is a higher-tier instructional
                                                                                    objective. The care plan objective involves critical
                                                                                    job skills for a medical care manager, and the
                                                                                    time taken to confirm these skills is likely worth
                                                                                    additional time, cost, and iteration.
Figure 3-3                     Typically, it is best to use rapid instructional design for instruction that can be considered dispos-
Pyramid of Instructional    able. Disposable doesn’t mean it’s not worthwhile, though. It means that the instruction either does-
Outcomes (Adapted from:
                            n’t merit the intense design effort needed for higher levels of skill or mastery, or that the content is
Bloom’s Taxonomy)
                            extremely time sensitive, changes rapidly, or goes out of date quickly.


                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          31
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                             Skill mastery
                                Mastery of a skill takes time and practice, input and reflection, chances to fail and to gain feedback
                             and support. It is critical to consider what degree of mastery you need. Figure 3-4 shows how design
                             strategy typically becomes more rigorous as the need for skill mastery and the need to measure real-
                             world skills increase.
                                                                           The upper right section shows that when the need for
                                                                        skill mastery is high (for example, giving patients the right
                                                                        medication), and the need to assure that these skills have
                                                                        been attained is high, that is, the need to measure real-
                                                                        world performance rather than using tests (which are nec-
                                                                        essarily less rigorous than actual job performance), you like-
                                                                        ly need a more rigorous design process.
                                                                           The lower right section shows a situation where the need
                                                                        for skill mastery is high but there is less of a need to meas-
                                                                        ure real world performance. When the need for skill mas-
                                                                        tery is low and the most important thing to measure is
                                                                        attendance, design effort can, and often should, be quite
                                                                        low.
                                                                           It’s important to understand that the choice of design
                                                                        methodology isn’t an all or nothing proposition. You can
                                                                        use rapid instructional design for portions of a course or
                                                                        curriculum, even if it isn’t appropriate for the entire course
                                                                        or curriculum. Instructional objectives for a given course
                                                                        are typically a mix of lower- and upper-tier objectives. So,
Figure 3-4
Mapping design effort to
                             for example, for a business ethics course, you might use a rapid instructional design approach for an
need for skill mastery and   overview and a lesson on ethics terminology. And you could use a more rigorous approach to build
measurement                  scenario-based lessons.

                             Time sensitivity
                                In addition to the level of the instructional objectives and the need for skill mastery, time sensitivi-
                             ty plays a key part in the choice of design approach. Some training (or information) is needed yes-
                             terday, or has a short shelf life. In this kind of situation it’s better to deliver useful training or infor-
                             mation now than to deliver optimal training too late. An approach often used successfully when con-
                             tent is time sensitive but not disposable, is to use a rapid instructional design approach now, and use
                             a traditional instructional design approach to deliver more optimal training later.
                                An example of using the two instructional design approaches in tandem is training needed for a
                             major application change in the organization. You can use rapid instructional design to provide pre-
                             launch information, while you can use a more traditional approach to develop task-based training
                             and performance support for the long run.

                             Traditional and rapid design steps
                                In this section, I’ll discuss the steps of traditional and rapid instructional design so you can see the
                             similarities and differences, and more importantly, how you can apply these steps to different train-
                             ing projects. Even if all factors point to a need for a more rigorous (traditional) instructional design
                             process, you can and should learn a great deal from rapid instructional design practices to speed up
                             traditional design.

                                                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          32
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                              Traditional and rapid analysis
                              In traditional instructional design, the training process commonly begins with gathering informa-
                           tion. Table 3-6 shows a list of questions commonly used to determine what direction to take. Even if
                           timeframes are short, it typically pays to begin by gathering a minimum of information to focus de-
                           sign efforts. The bolded questions are often useful for a rapid instructional design project. If the
                           answers to these questions indicate that there are too few resources (content, time, etc.) or the de-
                           sired outcomes cannot be produced using a rapid approach, it’s time to negotiate with the person
                           who wants this done about what can be done with these resources and this approach, or what ap-
                           proach is needed to obtain the desired results.
                              Table 3-7 on page 34 shows an example of a rapid analysis completed in response to a request for
                           training so you can see what a rapid analysis might consist of.
                              Analysis takes time. When you need to deliver information or instruction “yesterday,” some feel
                           that analysis is expendable. (And occasionally they are correct.) Others suffer from “analysis paraly-
                           sis” and never feel they have enough information. Waiting to have every last detail is a problem when
                           information needs to get out quickly. There’s a fine line between gathering enough information to
                           improve the odds of success and taking too much time.
                              Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven ways to gain information
                           quickly. Some may not be appropriate in all situations and a combination of ways is often the most
                           helpful in any given situation.
Table 3-6                     • Develop and use an analysis template to guide the analysis process
                                                                                                  • Use an online survey tool (such
 Traditional analysis questions                                                                     as SurveyMonkey.com) to
                                                                                                    gather data
 Analyze what? Typical questions                                                                  • Develop a short analysis from
 Goals         What problem needs fixing? Why?                                                      what you already know, and
               What are the most critical outcomes for this project?                                then ask key stakeholders to
               Who are the primary stakeholders for this project?                                   edit it
               What specific indicators will they use to measure success (cost, quality, time)?   • Find information in places
               How is the content used in the real world (on the job)?
                                                                                                    outside of peoples’ heads, such
                                                                                                    as company reports, e-mails,
 Learners      Who are the learners for this instruction? Any special needs?
                                                                                                    etc.
               What are their goals for this instruction?
                                                                                                  • Not designing any training
               What do I need to know about the learners when developing these materials
               (age, language, disabilities, educational level, computer literacy and skills,       (and doing something else like
               access, location)?                                                                   developing job aids or nothing)
               What do these learners already know?                                                 is one of your options
                  What support will they need to be successful?
                                                                                                   Traditional and rapid design and
 Resources        When does it need to be completed?
                                                                                                   development
                  Is content already available? In what format?
                  Is a content expert available to help?
                                                                                                      Once adequate analysis is com-
                  What existing resources are available (people, skills, time, budget, software,
                                                                                                   plete (adequate means there is
                  content)?                                                                        enough information to justify the
                  What organizational constraints are in place for this project?                   approach taken and the resources
                  When and where does the instruction need to be delivered?                        to use), design and development
                  What delivery technologies can be used?                                          typically gets underway. Table 3-8
                  Do learners already know how to use these technologies?
                                                                                                   on page 35 shows a list of tradi-
                                                                                                   tional design and development


                                                                           The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy   33
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                                 steps (and the questions that you must answer in each step). You check the C column if you typically
                                 perform this step for classroom training design and development, and the E column if this step is
                                 typically performed for e-Learning design and development.
                                    Rapid instructional design commonly reduces design and development steps and uses tools that
                                 facilitate building content and assessments (if needed) very quickly. The steps used in the design and
                                 development phase for rapid instructional design may vary, but it is typical to eliminate all but steps
                                 1–3, and 9.
                                    Content development often takes a great deal of time, so rapid instructional design is best used
                                 when content is available or easily obtained. Lack of available content (and people who can develop
                                 and evaluate it) is one of the single biggest risk factors associated with rapid instructional design.
                                 That’s why it’s CRITICAL, before taking on a rapid instructional design project, that you make sure
                                 that adequate content is available, or that you will be able to obtain it.
                                    Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven ways to speed up design and
                                 development. Some ways may not be appropriate in all situations, and a combination of ways may
Table 3-7                                                                                              be most helpful in any given situa-
                                                                                                       tion.
 Rapid analysis for approved time-off training                                                            • Teach content experts how to
 Approved time-off training                                                                                 do part or all of the work (it’s
                    There is confusion about what constitutes approved and unapproved time off,
                                                                                                            not rocket science; they can
 Problem
                    and some managers and staff are interpreting the policy inaccurately.                   learn).
 Needed             Employees and managers will be able to tell the difference between approved           • Find information that is al-
 outcomes           and unapproved time off, and will be able to list the steps for requesting and          ready available and can be
                    using time off.
                                                                                                            repurposed (PowerPoint pre-
 Delivery date      Delivered October 15 – 26 (10 days until delivery)
                                                                                                            sentations, reports, documents,
 Available          The employee policy manuals will provide the bulk of the content. This is avail-        e-mails, etc.).
 content            able in electronic format. Judith will be available to develop and approve con-
                    tent.                                                                                 • Develop and use content forms
 Available          Company computers have IE 6.0, Flash 7 Player, Adobe PDF Reader, audio.                 and let content experts fill
 technologies       Training department has MS PowerPoint, Articulate Presenter, and Adobe                  them in.
                    Acrobat.
                                                                                                          • Have content experts fill con-
 Work plan         Work plan                                       When                Who                  tent into page templates.
                    Give time-off content form to Judith           Friday (today)      Carlos             I will describe the last two ways
                    and locate available content                                                       to speed content development in
                    Review content form and existing               Monday              Judith, Carlos  more detail next.
                   content
                   Determine learning objectives                 Monday              Judith, Carlos     Content Forms
                   Build content and assessment                  Tuesday -           Carlos                Since the content-experts’ time
                   questions                                     Thursday
                                                                                                        is almost always at a premium, and
                   Review content and assessments                Thursday            Judith
                                                                                                        they often do not know what con-
                   Revise content and assessments                Friday              Carlos
                                                                                                        tent is needed, it helps to provide
                   Sign-off on content and assessments           Monday              Judith, Carlos
                                                                                                        them with forms that help them
                   Sign-off on training                          Wednesday           Judith, Carlos,    focus on the elements you need.
                                                                                     Sandy
                                                                                                           Developers often use forms to
                   Test internal, fix                            Thursday-Friday     Marti, Felix,
                                                                                     Carlos             gain content for the following ele-
                   Delivery                                      Monday,                                ments:
                                                                 October 15 –                              • Introduction
                                                                 Friday 26                                 • Content text and critical points


                                                                             The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       34
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                              • Examples and non-examples
                              • Quiz questions
                              • Next steps
                              • Wrap-up
                              Table 3-9 on page 36 shows an example of a content form used by a training developer to get tar-
                           geted content from a content expert. Helping content experts to focus on specific pieces of content is
                           less frustrating and gets to key content faster, a very critical outcome for rapid instructional design.
Table 3-8
                                                                                                  Slide templates
Typical design and development steps                                                                  Having content experts enter
C   E   Step                           Questions answered                                          content directly into a more or less
      1. Define instructional        What will the learner will be able to DO as a result of     final delivery format makes rapid
           objectives                  instruction? How does this content get used in the real     instructional design even faster
                                       world?
                                                                                                   than getting content from them,
      2. Gather content              Is there existing content? Is it in a useful form? Do we
                                       need more or a different format? What content experts
                                                                                                   and then building the training
                                       will help us? Do they have the time needed?                 materials. There are some caveats
      3. Determine content,          How will achievement of learning objectives be              about this approach. Content
           activities, assess-         assessed? What activities are needed for practice?          experts may need help with:
           ments, and support          What content is needed to support the activities? For
                                       e-Learning, what media and tools will be used to sup-          • determining objectives;
                                       port content, activities, and assessments? What types          • mapping content to objectives;
                                       of support will learners need to be successful?                • determining what content is
       4. Determine interface         What look and feel is needed? How will learners enter            critical;
           and screen design           and get around? What standards should we adopt for:
                                             • Page and site structure and navigation                 • being concise;
                                             • Backgrounds and graphical elements                     • writing, spelling, and grammar;
                                             • Colors
                                             • Text-font, color, size, word usage
                                                                                                      • sequencing;
    
                                                                                                      • writing assessment items.
        5. Develop a prototype         What snippet of content, activities, and assessments
                                       should we develop in order to gain feedback from stake-        Many people in the training or
                                       holders before starting full scale development?             instructional design field don’t
       6. Perform formative eval-     What changes are needed to the interface and screen         think that content experts can
           uation on prototype         design, content, activities, and assessments? (It is
                                       cheaper to catch problems and mistakes before instruc-
                                                                                                   develop adequate instructional
                                       tion goes live!)                                            content. Whether you feel that way
       7. Flowchart/storyboard        How will we describe content, activities, and assess-       or not (I don’t), making content
                                       ments so content experts can review content prior to        development the exclusive domain
                                       development? How will we describe content, activities,
                                       and assessments so developers know what we want?            of trainers or instructional design-
       8. Perform formative eval-     What changes are needed to the content, activities, and
                                                                                                   ers often creates bottlenecks, forces
           uation on storyboard        assessments before full development commences?              content experts to go around esta-
      9. Complete design             Develop learner and instructor materials (if needed),       blished procedures, and potentially
                                       including content, activities, assessments, presentation    lowers access to instruction. A bet-
                                       materials, etc.
                                                                                                   ter plan is to provide content ex-
                                                                                                   perts with good templates to use
                             (that embed part of the instructional design process within them) and train them in how to use
                             them to design good instructional content!
                                These ideas often help content experts to enter content directly:
                                • Providing preformatted PowerPoint templates (which can be brought into a Web conferencing
                                  system or narrated and output as a Flash object)
                                • Allowing editing of specific content (often referred to as “editable regions”) on Web pages with a


                                                                     The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          35
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                                    tool such as Adobe Dreamweaver or Contribute
                                  • Providing access to simple-to-use authoring tools and templates in content management systems
                                  The first step, when using the templates approach, is to develop a list of slide types. If you look at
                               the Slide Design templates in PowerPoint, you’ll get a good idea of how this works. Here are com-
                               mon types of slides for instructional use: main page (course title), course introduction, objectives,
                               topic introduction, text and bullets, text and image, quiz question(s), and wrap-up. Your needs may
                               vary, so this list may need a little or a lot of tweaking. A good next step is to develop a graphic “look
                               and feel” for these pages (slides, Web pages, document pages, etc.).
                                  To give you an idea of what slide type templates might look like, Table 3-10 on page 37 shows a
                               few PowerPoint slide type templates. A graphic look for each slide type is defined, as is the type of
                               information that goes on each slide.
                                  Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven techniques for reducing
                               design and development time.
                                  • Make sure you have a commitment for content expert time in advance.
                                  • Use content forms to help content experts provide just the content you need.
                                  • Make sure other needed resources (applications, tools, etc.) are available as expected.
                                  • Make sure the project is doable in the time frame before committing to it.
                                  • Develop a clear project plan that includes tasks, responsibilities, and due dates.
                                  • Use a central electronic repository for project files.
                                  • Agree on a version control method and assure that all team members follow it.
                                  • Have regular check-in meetings, by phone, audio, or Web conference.
                                  • Manage iterations and scope creep.

                               Traditional and rapid implementation
                                  Implementation isn’t much different for traditional instructional design and rapid instructional
                               design. The goal in implementation is to notify learners that the materials are ready to use, and to
                               work out the inevitable kinks that occur. Two tried and true methods used by trainers to get people
                               to “attend” training, and ways to be prepared for the kinks are described next.

                               Announcements
                        You can use announcements to make sure that people know in advance that the instructional
                     materials are going to available and how to access them. Organizations promote learning in a variety
Table 3-9            of ways, including direct e-mail or training department newsletters. A key stakeholder, or each learn-
                                                              er’s supervisor, often announces and requests participation in
 Example content form for content expert                      especially critical instruction.
to fill out                                                             WIIFMs
Topic                        Key points         Screen captures
                                                                           People are busy, and no matter how valuable the topic
Why the new application                                                 there are often competing priorities. It’s a good idea to pro-
is being implemented
                                                                        vide a compelling rationale for the instruction and provide
How it will speed up trav-                                              some clear WIIFMs (what’s in it for me) when describing the
el expense processing
                                                                        session. A clear and compelling title is also important. For
Key features
                                                                        example “Market Changes” is probably not going to be as
How to use the online
help system                                                             compelling a title as “How to Exploit Market Changes to
How to get help                                                         Improve Your Sales.”
                                                                           If your Learning Management System (LMS) lists many


                                                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       36
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                           courses, and there’s a possibility of the training getting lost in a list, consider using criticality or shelf-
                           life icons or keywords to show which sessions need immediate attention.
                              Make instruction as convenient as possible. Consider timing for synchronous events. Determine if
                           you will need to archive synchronous sessions so those who cannot attend can view it. Figure out
                           ways to make instruction work for as many people as possible.

                           Working out the kinks
                         Even if you do a lot of testing before implementation, kinks are inevitable because it’s impossible
                      to test the materials under every possible condition. So be prepared, and assign people to do tech
Table 3-10            support on the course. Include a phone number or e-mail so technical problems can be resolved.
                                                                                         And keep a log of real problems so
                                                                                         you know to test them on future
 PowerPoint slide-type templates
                                                                                         courses.
1. Title                                       4. Definition
                                                                                                   Traditional and rapid evaluation
                                                                                                       Formative evaluation used
                                                                                                   throughout design and develop-
                                                                                                   ment helps to determine if the
                                                                                                   instruction itself needs improve-
                                                                                                   ments or adjustments. You should-
                                                                                                   n’t wait until the materials devel-
                                                                                                   opment is complete to test them.
                                                                                                   It’s easier, less time consuming,
                                                                                                   and less expensive to make adjust-
2. Introduction                                5. Scenario
                                                                                                   ments before instructional materi-
                                                                                                   als are completed. For e-Learning,
                                                                                                   doing this kind of evaluation all
                                                                                                   along the way may save you from a
                                                                                                   disaster. Formative evaluation,
                                                                                                   especially for e-Learning, should
                                                                                                   involve testing for:
                                                                                                       • content accuracy,
                                                                                                       • content sequencing,
                                                                                                       • interaction and feedback ade-
                                                                                                         quacy,
3. Objectives                                  6. Scenario answer
                                                                                                       • look and feel,
                                                                                                       • site navigation, and
                                                                                                       • broken links and interactions.
                                                                                                       You use summative evaluation
                                                                                                   after the instructional materials are
                                                                                                   completed and learners start to use
                                                                                                   them in order to determine if the
                                                                                                   instruction meets the goals set out
                                                                                                   for it.
                                                                                                       Donald Kirkpatrick developed
                                                                                                   the classic summative evaluation


                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          37
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




                          model in 1975. It purports to evaluate the course or program at four levels. (I say purports because it
                          can do so to a greater or lesser extent depending on how well the evaluation is done.) Table 3-11
                          shows typical evaluation questions to be answered at each level, and indicators that can be used to
                          answer those questions.
                             Rapid evaluation typically measures only reactions and learning because you should use rapid
                          instructional design for lower-tier instructional objectives and content that is disposable. Sometimes,
                          especially for informational content, nothing other than “attendance” is measured. Don’t feel that
                          you aren’t a real trainer or instructional content developer if you don’t do in-depth evaluation of
                          each and every project. You have limited time and resources, and to use these effectively you should
                          save in-depth evaluation for the kinds of training that fall into the rigorous and less rigorous boxes
                          shown in Figure 3-4 on page 32.
                             Formative evaluation can take a lot of time, so it’s important to plan reviews (in the work plan)
                          and to limit the number of review iterations that occur if you’re trying to get a rapidly designed
                          course completed quickly. You should check all instructional content for:
                             • ease-of-use,
                             • content clarity and accuracy,
                             • all elements working as expected, and
                             • navigation and broken links.
                             If you want honest (and quick) feedback, round up a few members of the intended audience to
                          look through the materials. Content experts should review the content for accuracy, but they often
                          are not as good as general learners at providing input on ease-of-use, clarity, things working as
                          expected, and navigation.
                             Making evaluation quicker involves determining which elements are most critical for the project
                          and limiting evaluation methods to those which you really need. Summative evaluation for rapid
                          instructional design is limited to level 1 or 2, in most cases.
                             Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven techniques for getting what
                          you need from evaluation without bogging down.
                             • Reuse and tweak practice elements as assessments.
Table 3-11                                                                                        • Build in ways to gauge if the
                                                                                                    desired results were achieved
 Evaluation questions and indicators                                                                (surveys, quizzes, learner opin-
 Level Measures Primary question answered       Typical indicators                                  ions).
 1     Reaction How do learners feel about      • Satisfaction or attitude scores
                                                                                                  • Use LMS quiz functionality to
                the instruction?                • Completion rates                                  speed up the quiz development
 2     Learning Did learners achieve the        • Test scores                                       and analysis process.
                learning objectives?            • Skill performance                               • Don’t consider doing level 3
                                                • Progress along specified learning path
                                                  (e.g., certification, job paths)                  and 4 evaluations unless the
 3     Transfer Can learners apply the          Job performance (e.g., calls per minute,
                                                                                                    results will be truly valuable
                knowledge and skills to the     medication errors, completed claims)                and used for making impor-
                job?                                                                                tant decisions.
 4     Results  What is the impact of           Business performance indicators, such as          • Ready for radical? Go out and
                improved knowledge and          cost savings (e.g., reduced travel expenses,
                skills on the organization?     reduced administrative costs) quality               watch learners use what they
                                                improvements (e.g., improved satisfaction,          learned.
                                                  reduced cycle time, help-calls reduction),
                                                  and increased sales (e.g., increased orders,
                                                  reorders)




                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       38
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




Tools for traditional instructional design
   A discussion of the development tools that you can use for traditional and rapid instructional
design could be a chapter in itself. I’ll describe a few of my favorites here, but I don’t mean it to be
exhaustive. If you are getting started with instructional authoring, a good first step might be to pur-
chase Training Media Review’s (http://www.tmreview.com/) newly updated authoring report (full
disclosure: I wrote the introduction and write authoring tool reviews for them) and then download
trial versions of the ones that seem most promising for your situation and play.
   Some of the tools that allow you to build meaningful practice and feedback include Trivantis®
Lectora® (http://www.trivantis.com/), KnowledgePlanet™ Firefly® (http://www.knowledgeplanet.
com/products/developer.asp), Flashform™ (http://www.rapidintake.com/flashform_index.htm),
Captivate™ (http://www.adobe.com/products/captivate/), and TechSmith® Camtasia® (http://
www.techsmith.com/camtasia.asp). I personally love Lectora because it is so full-featured, and also
regularly use Captivate to build applications and simple soft-skills simulations.

Tools for rapid instructional design
   My main objection to rapid development tools (which has little to do with the tools themselves) is
that users want to believe that they are “the answer” for all instructional authoring. Sorry, they aren’t.
When you need instruction to provide truly meaningful practice you should either blend rapidly-
built content with other instructional elements (in person or online) or use more complex tools with
more functionality.
   Tools that allow you to build and deploy content very quickly by converting PowerPoint slides
(with or without narration), such as Articulate Presenter (http://www.articulate.com/), Present-
ationPro (http://presentationpro.com/), and Microsoft Producer (http:// www.microsoft.com/
office/powerpoint/producer/prodinfo/default.mspx), work extremely well at the information end
of the continuum, and as part of the elements for instruction.
   A few other tools that you can use for rapid development and deployment include applications
that facilitate online Web or audio conferencing such as Elluminate® (http://www.elluminate.com/),
Acrobat® Connect (http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobatconnect/), or GoToMeeting® (https://
www.gotomeeting.com/). Microsoft Word® documents can be “saved as” HTML pages (FileSave
asWeb Page) or can be converted to Web pages using a tool like WordtoWeb™ (http://www.solu-
tionsoft.com/w2w.htm). Quick interaction-building tools such as Raptivity™ (http://www.raptivity.
com/) are also extremely useful, alone or with other tools.

Putting it all together
   You may have noticed one specific theme that runs throughout this chapter. Rather than seeing
selection of design strategy as either/or propositions, see them as choices made to best meet learner
and organizational needs. That is, you can use a combination of instruction and information, class-
room, online, and real life, synchronous and asynchronous, and traditional and rapid instructional
design to improve training outcomes.
   Here is a situation that I hope will show how different design strategies can coexist happily togeth-
er to meet learner and organizational needs.
   Fairfield Company is an organization that franchises quickie photo shops. They have grown very
fast, and are having a hard time training franchisees because the need for training has outstripped
their ability to provide it. Franchisees typically came to the home office to learn how to find and
build-out a location, how to hire and manage staff, handle financials, and run their shops. The cur-
rent level of growth means that Fairfield’s training program has franchisees in the home office every


                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        39
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3

Table 3-12
Design strategies selected for Fairfield’s franchisee training process
Design         Fairfield’s design strategies                                                                                Tools and technologies
strategy
choices

Instruction    Pre-onsite instruction will assure that franchisees come to the home office having successfully              Pre and post: Print materials with
               completed the following modules:                                                                             online multiple-choice tests
               • Fairfield history
               • Finding a good location                                                                                    Bi-weekly updates: Articulate
               • Franchisee success factors                                                                                 Presenter narrated PowerPoint
               • Photo shop success factors                                                                                 modules with links to download-
                                                                                                                            able print documents as needed
               Onsite instruction will include the following topics:
               • Internet basics (as needed)                                                                                Conference call
               • Building out your shop
               • Permits, licenses, and insurance
               • Selecting and buying merchandise
               • Use and troubleshooting of equipment
               • Opening your store
               • Dealing with customers
               • Legal aspects of hiring, managing, and training staff
               • Managing your store
               • Marketing your store
               • Store financials
               Post-onsite instruction will reinforce major points from onsite instruction and help them plan for
               their opening and beyond. It will include the following topics:
               • We want you to be successful
               • Getting local publicity for your store
               • Hiring staff
               • Training staff
               • Making customers happy
               • Reading and interpreting financial statements
               Bi-weekly updates on product changes, legal and management aspects, etc.
               Monthly conference call prior to store opening (in all time zones) for support and QA
Information    The franchisee manual, provided during the onsite instruction will include:                                  Print and downloadable print
               • Home office staff, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses                                                     documents
               • Store build-out documents
               • Insurance documents
               • Product documentation
               • Equipment documentation
               • Human resource documents
               • Order forms
               • Training materials used during onsite instruction
               • Training materials for staff
               Updates to the manual provided during bi-weekly training modules
Classroom      Onsite training is classroom based, with lots of time for in-depth QA and ability to talk with successful   3 simulated stores (real, not
               franchisees                                                                                                  electronic)
Online         Pre- and post-onsite instruction to be print based (downloadable PDFs) with online multiple-choice tests     Online multiple-choice tests
               Discussion forums will be online                                                                             Online asynchronous discussion
                                                                                                                            forums
Real life      New franchisees will spend 1-3 days working in 1-3 successful stores for the purpose of learning
               behind-the-sceen ropes and gaining mentors who they can contact after their store opens.
Asynchronous Pre- and post-instruction and bi-weekly updates will be asynchronous. Online asynchronous discussion           Online asynchronous discussion
             boards will be used for franchisees to ask questions, share success stories, and support each other.           forums
             This will be monitored by the the VP of Franchisee Communications, who will also answer questions
             and get additional help for franchisees as needed.
Synchronous    Synchronous conference calls will provide support and help.                                                  Conference call
Traditional    A traditional instructional design approach will be used for onsite training and for pre- and post-
instruction    instructional materials.
design
Rapid          A rapid instructional design approach will be used for monthly updates. Conference calls will have
instruction    an agenda but require no instructional design effort.
design



                                                                                     The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy                    40
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




week of the year, and they still aren’t able to keep up with the demand. And they have noticed that
existing training doesn’t have enough impact on franchisees behaviors, once their stores are open.
  Fairfield analyzed their situation with the help of a learning consultant and built a training plan,
part of which is in Table 3-12 on page 40, which describes how various design strategies will help
them meet their training needs.

Some final comments on instructional design
   Not long ago, I was openly critical of most instructional authoring tools, preferring instead to use
and recommend general Web development tools and programming, because they provided maxi-
mum flexibility. In the last few years, instructional authoring tools have become much more full-fea-
tured, and I’m no longer advising that instructional designers and others who aren’t primarily devel-
opment geeks use general Web development tools. This is because general Web development tools
require too much learning curve for far too little extra gain.
   I am still advising that before you purchase any tools, you do an analysis to determine what the
tools need to produce. Remember that exercise bike in your basement that has turned into a clothes
drying rack? You don’t want to replicate that experience with authoring tools, right?
   So start with a plan, and match design strategies to the needs of learners and your organization.
Just as classroom training is rarely the best answer for all training needs, e-Learning is rarely the
answer to all training needs. I’m assuming that you have limited time and money and need to use
your time wisely. Rapid design approaches and rapid design tools can help you do just that. And dare
I say it? — Many training projects do not merit a ton of effort. But when job skills are critical, and
inadequate skills is not an option, use a more rigorous approach. Although I didn’t add “perform-
ance support” to the mix of design strategy decisions in this chapter, it’s a non-training approach to
job performance that needs far more use than it gets.

Conclusions
  I hope this chapter provided you with some insights about selecting design strategies for online
and blended instruction. Here are the most critical conclusions I came to when writing this chapter.
  • Select design strategies based on their attributes and their ability to positively impact individual,
    group, department, and organizational performance.
  • Traditional instructional design isn’t very efficient for getting instruction out quickly. When skills
    mastery, and evidence of real-life skill, are needed a more rigorous design approach is warranted
    and should be used.
  • Rapid instructional design is much more efficient than traditional instructional design for pro-
    ducing instruction. It is often a good strategy for lower-level instructional objectives, and when
    there simply is no time for using a traditional instructional design process. It probably should
    not be the only online learning strategy you use.
  • Consider adopting or adapting some of rapid instructional design’s approaches to increasing the
    speed of traditional instructional design.
  • Don’t make design (or technology) strategy decisions that box you in. New tools and technolo-
    gies are always around the corner.
  • There is no such thing as the “right” authoring tool or the “right” approach. You need different
    tools and approaches for different purposes.
  • You don’t need an equal amount of effort for all training projects. “Good enough” is often exactly
    what’s needed. Good enough is often just fine. (And even if it isn’t, it has to be, because there are
    never enough resources to go around.)


                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        41
D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3




  • Combine classroom, online, and real life to gain the benefits of each, and to mitigate the chal-
    lenges of each.

To Learn More
Benjamin S. Bloom, Bertram B. Mesia, and David R. Krathwohl (1964). Taxonomy of Educational
  Objectives. New York. David McKay.
Dick, Q., Carey, L.,  Carey, J.O. (2000). The Systematic Design of Instruction. Saddle River, NJ:
  Pearson Allyn  Bacon.
Merrill, D.M. (2002). First Principles of Instruction. Educational Technology Research  Development
  (ETRD), 50(3), 43-59. Available: http://www.indiana.edu/~tedfrick/aect2002/firstprinciples-
  bymerrill.pdf
Rossett, A. (1999). First things fast: A Handbook for performance analysis. San Francisco: Jossey-
  Bass/Pfeiffer.
Smith, P.  Ragan, T. (1999). Instructional Design, 2e. New York: John Wiley  Sons.
Thiagarajan, S., Tips for Rapid Instructional Design. Online at http://www.thiagi.com/rid.html and
  article: http://www.thiagi.com/article-rid.html
Tripp, S. D.,  Bichelmeyer, B. (1990). Rapid protoyping: An alternative instructional design strategy.
  Educational Technology, Research and Development, 38(1), 31-44.
Van Merriënboer, J. J. G., Clark, R. E.,  De Croock, M. B. M. (2002). Blueprints for complex learn-
  ing: The 4C/ID-model. Educational Technology, Research and Development, 50(2), 39-64. Available
  online http://www.ou.nl/otecresearch/publications/Jeroen%20van%20Merrienboer/Jeroen%20
  vanMerrienboer%20etrd.pdf
Learning Peaks’ resource database: http://del.icio.us/learningpoeaks
Recommended books: http://www.learningpeaks.com/books.html




                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       42
Success Story




 Texas Engineering Extension Service
 Leading training provider accelerates creating content for homeland security curriculum
 using Adobe® FrameMaker ® software, XML, and DITA

 Texas Engineering Extension           Right training, right response
 Service                               Proper training is crucial when responding to emergency situations. For re ghters, police o cers,
 www.teex.com                          homeland security agents, and others protecting the public, the Texas Engineering Extension
                                       Service (TEEX) o ers renowned training and education programs via its Texas headquarters to
                                       locations worldwide. Every year, more than 175,000 people participate in TEEX programs, gaining
                                       the skills to respond safely and successfully.
 In Partnership With
                                       With more than 550 programs in areas ranging from homeland security to health and safety,
 Integrated Technologies, Inc.
                                       TEEX serves a range of clients in the public and private sectors. At the core of TEEX programs are
 www.intech.com
                                       comprehensive education manuals developed by content specialists and leaders in emergency
 Industry                              response, public safety, and other disciplines.
 Training and Education Services
                                       “Our materials include everything from 400-page manuals to quick-reference data sheets,” says Trey
 Challenges                             McCallie, manager of curriculum services at TEEX. “Regardless of the document, we have to know
• Integrate authoring processes with    that content is accurate and up-to-date.” To build a dynamic document authoring environment,
  backend systems                       TEEX is using powerful so ware, including Adobe FrameMaker and a Siberlogic content
• Adopt industry standards such as
                                        management system (CMS). e company is also working with solutions provider Integrated
  XML and DITA
                                        Technologies for training and consulting services.
 Solution
• Single-source publishing             Too many processes and tools
 TEEX is using Adobe FrameMaker        TEEX customers work in highly regulated industries, where changes to protocol can happen every
 and a content management system       few months. ese changes have to be re ected in training materials. With hundreds of courses
 to streamline creation of hundreds    across business units, the demands on the 60 employees in the Curriculum Development group are
 of training manuals in accordance
                                       intense. To further complicate the process, TEEX had no standard authoring tool, with some sta
 with DITA speci cations.
                                       using Microso Word so ware and others using Adobe FrameMaker.
 Results
• Accelerated creating manuals by as
                                       “It was di cult to implement e ective quality control processes across groups, and we couldn’t easily
  much as 25%                           leverage work done by each person,” explains McCallie. “Our goal was to deploy a system that enabled
• Reduced costs to update manuals       us to produce higher-quality, more consistent manuals that contained reusable content.”
• Improved quality and consistency
  of materials                         Single-source publishing
• Enabled e ective reuse of content    In looking for a document authoring tool, TEEX wanted to address several criteria, including
  across manuals                       support for standards like XML and the Darwin Information Typing Architecture (DITA); reliable
• Adopted industry standards to        handling of long documents; easy integration with a CMS; and the ability to reuse content.
  support long-term growth
                                       “We needed a single-source publishing model that leveraged XML data in our CMS,” says McCallie.
 Systems At A Glance
                                       “ is would make it easier to quickly create customized manuals for clients. And by working in a
• Adobe FrameMaker
                                        structured environment, we could improve the quality and consistency of materials.”
• Adobe Acrobat® Professional
• Platform: Microsoft® Windows®        One tool, multiple advantages
  2003 Server and PCs running            e Curriculum Development group’s largest team used Adobe FrameMaker 7.1, as well as newer
  Microsoft Windows XP
                                       versions of the so ware, and was impressed by the application’s ability to handle long
With Adobe FrameMaker software, TEEX’s
Curriculum Development group has an
enterprise publishing solution for authoring
and delivering highly customized manuals
for clients. The Adobe software makes it easy
to reuse content across materials and enables
the group to leverage standards like XML and
DITA for streamlined document creation.




“Adobe FrameMaker mapped                        documents. “Adobe FrameMaker mapped nicely to our demands for an enterprise publishing
 nicely to our demands for an                   solution,” explains McCallie. “Its ability to manage long documents is outstanding. Plus, its
                                                structured environment and support for standards give us the control and access we need.”
 enterprise publishing solution.
 Its ability to manage long                     By using Adobe FrameMaker, TEEX can provide document type de nition (DTD) templates
 documents is outstanding. Plus,                readily accessible to more than 40 curriculum content developers. As a result, the nal training
 its structured environment and                 manuals have a more professional, polished appearance because how and where content appears
                                                is consistent, regardless of the sta that creates them.
 support for standards give us
 the control and access we need.”               “With FrameMaker, we have better control over the layout and overall look of manuals,” says
Trey McCallie,                                   McCallie. “ ere’s also a boost in employee productivity because our content specialists are free
Curriculum services manager,                     to focus on writing and editing text, not on learning how to be page-layout experts.”
TEEX
                                                Tremendous e ciency gains
                                                   e structured authoring environment delivers the added advantage of enabling TEEX to better
                                                leverage XML content in its Siberlogic CMS. For example, blocks of information in XML can be
                                                used and reused at the paragraph level, allowing curriculum developers to take frequently used
                                                safety processes and guidelines and insert them automatically into the appropriate pages.

                                                “ is is a tremendous e ciency gain for our sta ,” says McCallie. “Now, we can revise and reuse
                                                 content easily across manuals, and then automatically insert it everywhere it needs to appear. e
                                                 e ciencies could accelerate creating manuals by as much as 25%.”
For More Information                            By adopting FrameMaker and accessing DITA FrameMaker plug-ins from Integrated Technologies,
www.adobe.com/products/framemaker/              TEEX is taking advantage of document architecture speci cations outlined in DITA. “As an
                                                XML-based architecture for authoring, producing, and delivering technical information, DITA
For OnDemand eSeminars                          makes it easier for TEEX to reuse content and then deliver nal documents to recipients,” says
www.adobe.com/go/techcom_eseminars              Tom Aldous, president of Integrated Technologies, Inc.

                                                For most TEEX manuals, converting documents to Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) les
                                                for printing is the nal step in getting manuals ready for clients. In some cases, teams of TEEX
                                                reviewers will use electronic commenting tools in Adobe Acrobat Professional so ware to add
                                                comments to dra s of manuals in PDF.

                                                Because it deals with many consultants, TEEX nds it useful to add security and control to manuals
                                                in Adobe PDF. e documents in PDF can be password protected to limit access to materials, and
                                                information in les can be locked to prevent recipients from altering underlying content.

                                                 A long-term solution
                                                “Using FrameMaker so ware, we integrated our front-end authoring with our back end systems,”
                                                 says McCallie. “At the same time, we put standards in place that will streamline our work for
                                                 years to come.”

                                                Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and FrameMaker are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
Adobe Systems Incorporated                      and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
345 Park Avenue                                 other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
San Jose, CA 95110-2704
USA                                             © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
www.adobe.com                                   95009435 07/07 R
ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4
                                CHAPTER                        4


                               Marketing and Change Management for e-Learning:
                               Strategies for Engaging
                               Learning, Motivating Managers,
                               and Energizing Organizations
                               By Lance Dublin



                               J    ust over 20 years ago global corporations spent $51B on re-engineering, a management approach
                                    that promised significant cost savings and operational efficiencies, a dramatic reduction in time-
                               to-market, and exponentially accelerating profits. (Sounds a good deal like what organizations expect
                               from e-Learning, doesn’t it?). “Forget all you know; don’t automate, obliterate,” was just one of the
                               mantras. Organizational challenges were to “think out of the box” and to leverage technology to do
                               what they had never been able to do before – to not just improve their businesses or make them bet-
                               ter, but to transform them.
                                  But, after just five years people seldom mentioned re-engineering. And, if it was mentioned at all,
                               the connations were negative. The term re-engineering had become synonymous with re-structuring
                               and downsizing, lay-offs, and failed programs. More than half of early re-engineering projects failed
                               to be completed, or did not achieve bottom-line business results. How did this happen? What caused
                               re-engineering to, in effect, fail?

                               Necessary, but not sufficient
                                     The answer, it turned out, was very simple, and captured in one word: people. Organizations could
                                  design significantly better business processes and configure technology solutions to support them.
                                  Although necessary, they were not sufficient to ensure the success of the re-engineering project. Re-
                                  engineering projects failed because the people impacted just didn’t want to be “re-engineered;” they
                                  did not want this change done to them. The 1994 CSC Index “State of Re-engineering Report” con-
                                  firmed this when it reported that over 50% of the companies participating in the study reported the
                                  most difficult part of re-engineering was dealing with the fear and anxiety in their organization.
                                  (Editor's Note: CSC Index was a management consulting firm that specialized in business process re-
Contents
                                                               engineering in the 1990's.) In another re-engineering post-mortem bench-
 In Chapter 2 you will find information about:
                                                               marking study with 150 companies over 24 months, lack of effective
 • Getting the “Soft Stuff” right                              change management ranked as one of the top five key lessons.
 • Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds                It was Mike Hammer, the re-engineering guru himself who best sum-
 • Consumer Marketing: People want to buy, not be sold         marized this critical lesson with the phrase; “The ‘soft’ stuff is really the
 • Change Implementation: Awareness, engagement,               ‘hard’ stuff.” And you can now find this phrase repeatedly in article after
   and commitment                                              article and presentation after presentation about the real challenges in
                                                               implementing any technology-based change.



                                                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          45
ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4




                               Getting the “Soft Stuff” right
                                  Having great technology, the best content, and sound instructional design is certainly necessary
                               for the success of any e-Learning initiative. But, even taken together, they are not sufficient to ensure
                               success. To ensure success with e-Learning, organizations must get the “soft” stuff right; they must
                               engage learners, motivate managers and energize their organization. (See the quote in Sidebar 4-1.)
                                  Truly successful organizations use a systems-based implementation strategy founded on principles
                               of change management, consumer marketing, and communications. And they follow a detailed
                               change implementation plan – with defined activities, timetables, and resources – based on proven
                               techniques and approaches drawn from these disciplines.

                               Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds
                                    E-Learning of any type is a change. Even though it may be as simple as replacing an instructor-led
                                 class with an online course or an Excel-based spreadsheet with an LMS, it still is a change in the or-
                                 ganization. It’s a change to employees, to front-line supervisors, to mid-managers, to senior manage-
                                 ment, and to all the staff in supporting organizations. Employees used to having time away from
                                 their desks and their work, and preferring to spend that time with colleagues and instructors, often
                                 resent having to learn on their own time and “from a computer.” Trainers who feel valued for their
                                 platform skills and content knowledge often feel threatened that they will be “replaced” by e-Learn-
                                 ing. Managers, who have always controlled the access to training, often feel undermined when their
                                 employees can learn any time and from any where. And often the organization as a whole is neither
                                 aware of, engaged in, or supportive of the e-Learning initiative – nor even understands why it should
                                 be.
                                    It is not organizations that change, however. People change; employees, managers, colleagues, part-
                                 ners, suppliers, customers. And, they change one person at a time. By applying the discipline of
                                 change management the chances of success increase dramatically. Change management is the combi-
                                 nation of processes, activities, and approaches that manage the people of the organization through
                                 the transition from the old way of doing things to the new way, from the old way of training to
                                 e-Learning. Change management is about communication and exchange, dialogue and questions,
                                 leadership and support. The focus of change management is on attitudes and behaviors and the
Sidebar 4-1
                                                                          objective is to win the battle for the “hearts and minds” of
                                                                          the people – all of the people – within the organization.
 Building systems users want to use
                                                                             There already exists a tremendous body of knowledge
 “Our findings suggest that user commitment and motivation are criti-
                                                                          about change, transitions, and change management. The fol-
 cal not only for adoption of new information and communication
 technologies but also for their sustained use.”                          lowing three concepts are particularly important to under-
                                                                          stand.
                 Yogesh Malhotra, Assistant Professor of Management          First is the concept of transitions. William Bridges, noted
               Information and Decision Sciences, Syracuse University
                       Whitman School of Management, Syracuse, NY.
                                                                          authority on change and change management said it best, “It
                                                                          isn’t the changes that do you in, it’s the transitions.” Accord-
                Dennis Galletta, Professor of Business Administration,    ing to Bridges there are three stages in the transition process:
                             Fox School of Business and Management        endings, the neutral zone, and beginnings.
                                 Temple University, Philadelphia, PA.

 Communications of the ACM,
                                                                        Endings
 Volume 47, Number 12 (2004), Pages 88-94.                                Applied to e-Learning, replacement of instructor-led train-
 “Building systems that users want to use”
                                                                        ing and all that that means is often seen as the “ending.”
 Online at http://www.kmnetwork.com/ITUseCACM.html
                                                                        Learners, trainers, and managers are inclined to try to hold



                                                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        46
ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4




 on to the “old-ways.” But, by applying change management techniques they can begin to let go of
 this past, and have the confidence and support to at least move into their “neutral zone.” They might
 not yet be “gung-ho” but at least they are willing to give it a try. And, most importantly, it will set the
 stage for positive new beginnings that e-Learning can represent for them and the organization.

 The neutral zone
    Second is the concept of change as a “journey” from one place to another, as opposed to a series of
 events. Psychologists Dennis Jaffe, Cynthia Scott, and Glenn Tobe developed an excellent model for
 this based on their work and the work of noted psychiatrist, Elisabeth Kubler-Ross. Learners making
 the transition to e-Learning find themselves going through a four-phase change journey; Phase 1 –
 Denial; Phase 2 – Resistance; Phase 3 – Exploration; and Phase 4 – Commitment. A well designed
 change-implementation strategy ensures all the people in the organization are supported through
 the early phases of denial and resistance, so their frustrations and discomfort with the “new way”
 don’t overwhelm them. It enables them to then explore what e-Learning can offer them that is posi-
 tive and, over time, ensures they will become as committed to e-Learning as they have been with any
 other change in their lives.

 Beginnings
    The third concept is leverage. It is impossible to have one-on-one conversations with all of the
 people impacted by an e-Learning initiative. So, who are the right people to focus on, and how many
 really need attention? Everett M. Rogers laid the groundwork in this area with his landmark “diffu-
 sion of innovation theory.” He determined that people, when confronted with a new innovation (i.e.,
 change), fall into six distinct groups – innovators, early adopters, early majority, late majority, late
 adopters, and laggards – in a bell-shaped dispersion pattern. The group having the greatest influence
 and providing the most leverage for ensuring the success of the change long-term is the early adop-
 ters. Although they represent only 20% of the total they represent what author Malcolm Gladwell
 termed, “the tipping point.” They are the respected opinion leaders in an organization who adopt
 new ideas early but carefully. And so once they accept the change, the significantly larger groups of
 the early and late majority will eventually follow.

 Consumer marketing: People want to buy, not be sold
    Another discipline that is important to apply to ensuring the success of any e-Learning initiative is
 consumer marketing. The goal of consumer marketing is quite simple: attract and retain customers.
 And, at its best, it builds mutually satisfying long-term relationships. In recent years, researchers have
 established that brand and positioning are the critical components of a consumer marketing pro-
 gram.
    Technically, a brand is the “combination of symbols, words, or designs that differentiate one com-
 pany’s product from another company’s product.” But, branding is not just about aesthetics. Brand-
 ing is about guiding perceptions and answering the question, “Why should I do business with you?”
    Why is branding important in e-Learning? Branding is what initially engages learners and then
 keeps them coming back. It’s what re-assures managers and excites the organization. Bottom-line, it
 succinctly communicates the value of e-Learning to create learner preference, generate management
 support, and ensure organizational commitment. Branding typically includes a unique logo, fonts,
 and color palette as well as a tag-line. The logo, with its unique font and colors, is the memorable
 image that represents the e-Learning program or initiative. And the tag-line is the short phrase that
 captures the essence of it. These are some excellent examples of the power of branding in e-Learning:


                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         47
ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4




                             Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts uses “e-Knowledge Suite” as the brand for their e-Learning por-
                          tal. Their tag-line is “Check in 24/7; Check out A Unique Learning Experience.” Four Seasons’ colors,
                          fonts, and graphics are used throughout the portal site, and within each e-Learning course.
                             John Muir Health brands their e-Learning portal the “Learning Point” with the tag-line, “The Go-
                          To Place.” They have developed a distinctive look and feel around a custom logo and color palette
                          that appears on the portal site and within each e-Learning course.
                             Sheetz Corporation brands their e-Learning portal, “Z-Force” with the tag-line, “Empowering the
                          People of Sheetz Through Learning.” They also have developed a distinctive look and feel around a
                          custom logo and color palette that appears on the portal site and within each e-Learning course.
                             The standard marketing adage is that acquiring new customers is much more expensive and less
                          profitable then keeping repeat customers. This is also true of e-Learning. Organizations want learn-
                          ers to not just come back to access courses as-needed, but to feel they are in a relationship with the
                          overall e-Learning initiative. They want e-Learning to engender the loyalty that is often the case with
                          Google, e-Bay, or Amazon.com. For e-Learning, building this type of relationship can start with
                          things as easy as single password sign-on, personalized reporting options just for learners and man-
                          agers, and proactive e-mail announcements of new offerings in subject areas recently accessed.

                          Change implementation: Awareness, engagement, and
                          commitment
                            To ensure the success of any e-Learning initiative, all of the people impacted must be informed
                          and aware, and involved and engaged. And, the organization as whole must be committed to its
                          ongoing success through full integration into jobs, work, and business processes. Change implemen-
                                                                  tation is a process-based, inclusive, and always two-way
                                                                  approach which draws upon both change management and
                                                                  consumer marketing principles and practices. It focuses not
                                                                  only on ensuring that individuals think and act differently,
                                                                  but also on the development and reinforcement of the nec-
                                                                  essary new individual and organizational attitudes and
                                                                  behaviors.
                                                                     The I3 Change Implementation model (Figure 4-1)
                                                                  consists of three phases which form a never-ending cycle:


Figure 4-1                Phase 1. Inform – Generate awareness
Change Implementation         Through information and messaging activities, (i.e., marketing communications or “marcom” as
Model. Copyright Lance
Dublin, 2003-2007         it’s known), employees, managers, and the entire organization are given simple and clear answers to
                          the “what, why, how, who, and when” questions. And, most importantly, in this phase you begin to
                          address the answer to the “what’s in it for me” question as well. Communicating the brand (i.e., logo,
                          colors, fonts, palette, and tag-line) begins, and is repeated and repeated and repeated. The goal of this
                          phase is to make sure the messages the organization wants heard are heard, and are heard in ways
                          they will be recognized, recalled, and remembered. Examples of specific activities during this phase
                          might include: newsletters, presentations, e-mails, Webcasts, voicemails, documents, and speeches.

                          Phase 2. Involve – Generate involvement
                            Just giving all the individuals in the organization who are impacted by and involved with e-Learn-
                          ing answers to “what, where, when, why, who, and how” questions though is not enough. In order for


                                                                  The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       48
ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4




 e-Learning to be successful there must be a change in their attitudes and behaviors. Attitude and
 behavior change seldom happens based solely on the passive receipt of information, a cool logo and
 tag-line, exciting colors and graphics, or information and give-aways. The key to this type of change
 is engaging everyone, while paying particular attention to the important influencers within the or-
 ganization, the 20% of the people that represent the “tipping point.” Organizations must provide a
 first-hand experience of e-Learning to give learners and managers and even executives the opportu-
 nity to take it for a “test-drive,” ask questions, and form their own opinions. The goal of this phase is
 to have them internalize and personalize the benefits of e-Learning so that it becomes theirs, not just
 the organizations. Specific activities during this phase might include: videos, department meetings,
 lunch-room fairs, hall-way expos, and traveling “road-shows.”

 Phase 3. Integrate – Generate commitment
    The long-term success of an organization’s e-Learning efforts though is dependent upon more
 than just great marketing and communications. It requires that e-Learning becomes a recognized
 part of the organization’s culture, fully integrated into the work-life of all of the employees, supervi-
 sors, managers and executives. In this stage you identify and target for involvement the ongoing or-
 ganizational processes and systems – as well as any critical business initiatives e-Learning can sup-
 port and enable. The purpose is to ensure that e-Learning becomes well accepted as the “norm,” crit-
 ical to the success of individuals as well as the organization as a whole, and recognized as the plat-
 form-of-choice for ongoing learning and development as well as the enablement of business process-
 es. Specific activities during this phase might include: integration with the performance management
 process, supporting a new key-business initiative, and launching and tracking all leadership develop-
 ment and management training.

 Conclusion
    Across all industries, organizations that are successful with e-Learning have in common an under-
 standing that having the right content, the right design, and the right technology is just not enough.
 Certainly it’s necessary for success, but it is not sufficient to ensure success. To ensure their success
 these organizations pay as much – or even more – attention to engaging learners, motivating man-
 agers, and energizing their organizations. They understand that this “soft” stuff is the “hard” stuff.
 They take it seriously. They plan for it. They spend time and money on it. They work at it. They are
 diligent about it. They are committed to it. And, they do this because they understand that, bottom-
 line, this “soft” stuff is the critical ingredient for ensuring their e-Learning success.




                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       49
Success Story




 Grundfos Management A/S
 Leading manufacturer streamlines training and delivers compelling eLearning courses
 to customers and employees worldwide using Adobe® Connect™

 Grundfos Management A/S                 Training customers and sta worldwide
 www.grundfos.com                        Grundfos is the world’s largest manufacturer of circulation pumps. e company has o ces in
                                         58 countries and currently employs approximately 14,000 sta , with roughly a third employed in
                                         Denmark. With its large employee base and complex products, Grundfos has its own training
 In Partnership With
                                         academy that today is being supplemented with Adobe Connect so ware.
 ZaqONE                                  eLearning is crucial for Grundfos to meet the challenges of the future and to reinforce its position
 www.zaqsolutions.dk                     as the leading company in the pump industry. Both employees and customers can be educated with
 Industry                                the help of Adobe Connect.
 Manufacturing
                                         For Grundfos, a commitment to sta training helps ensure the company can maintain and develop
 Challenges                              its position in the world market. is is the reason why Grundfos established its training academy—
• Accelerate production of training      the Poul Due Jensen Academy—with associated hotel facilities at its headquarters. e academy is
  materials                              an independent division of Grundfos Management and is managed by Kim Hansen, the director of
• Reduce costs to deliver training       the academy.
  to sta , partners, and customers
  worldwide                              Be-Think-Innovate
• Minimize need for IT to support           e overall objective of the academy is to ensure the best education for employees. For example,
  eLearning courses
                                         sales managers should understand as much about sales and marketing as they do about product
 Solution                                features. Also, instead of just responding to customer inquiries, the sales sta should be proactive
• eLearning                              in its relationships with existing and potential customers, serving as problem solvers and reliable
 Grundfos is using Adobe Connect         partners that can deliver customized solutions. is requires highly specialized knowledge that can
 to deliver engaging training            only be acquired through excellent training.
 courses to sta , partners, and
 customers worldwide.                    “Be- ink-Innovate” is the slogan that Grundfos employs to put the company’s values into words.
 Results                                  Being willing to change, to assume responsibility, and being innovative are crucial for meeting
• Enhance quality and accessibility of    the challenges of the future. One initiative that was developed in this spirit is using eLearning to
  training courses delivered worldwide    attain even closer contact with the company’s customers. For instance, dealers and wholesalers
• Help ensure that sta , partners, and    make decisions every day as to which pump they will recommend for a project. Speci c product
  customers have continued access to      knowledge builds con dence with the customer. erefore, Grundfos wants to o er product training
  timely product information
                                          via eLearning to ensure that customers can choose the right Grundfos pump.
• Reduce time and costs to produce
  and deliver training content           Leveraging the reach of the web
• Minimize demand on valuable
                                         Senior eLearning Project Manager Ole Kristensen is tasked with developing training methods that
  IT resources needed to support
  training initiatives                   utilize the Internet for updating the knowledge of Grundfos employees. With eLearning, the time and
                                         costs for training employees are reduced compared to traditional training methods. At the same time,
 Systems At A Glance                     eLearning can happen at each employee’s location.
• Adobe Connect
• Adobe Presenter                        For Grundfos, eLearning is not an alternative to traditional courses, but instead supplements courses
• Adobe Acrobat® Connect™                as part of a blended-learning process that combines day courses and eLearning. “eLearning and day
  Professional
With the help of Adobe Connect sta at
Grundfos can rapidly create and assemble
a complete training presentation in less
than three hours—a task that previously
could take three weeks just for the
planning and storyboard. Grundfos
employees and customers worldwide
can now be trained on a given topic
within 24 hours.




“Thanks to Adobe Connect,                  courses are part of our module-based training system,” explains Kristensen. “It gives participants the
 we can train our employees                opportunity for better preparation and o ers exibility as the eLearning modules can t into people’s
                                           busy lives. We have also established a system to handle customer training.”
 worldwide faster and more
 cost e ectively than ever.”               Adopting Adobe Connect
Kim Hansen,                                Grundfos uses Adobe Presenter and Microso PowerPoint to create eLearning content. Because
Academy director,                          Adobe Presenter and PowerPoint are integrated, anyone who can use PowerPoint can create
Grundfos
                                           eLearning presentations with animations and built-in tests. An Adobe Connect presentation can
                                           also be used to create short training exercises or product presentations that conclude with a few
                                           questions that test whether the participant has understood the content.

                                           Another advantage of using Adobe Connect is that the presentation is delivered in the Adobe Flash®
                                           format. is means that all PCs can run the presentation without the need to install extra so ware.
                                           As a result, Grundfos does not need to devote a lot of time to providing support. “By using Adobe
                                           Connect and Adobe Flash, we are con dent that people can participate in trainings without
                                           problems,” says Kristensen. “Users only have to click with the mouse to run the presentation. At
                                           the same time, the minimal bandwidth required for the Flash based trainings is amazing. We
                                           can even reliably train people who have low-bandwidth connections in remote areas worldwide
                                           via Adobe Connect.”

                                           Rapid training and quality meetings
                                           With Adobe Connect, Grundfos can quickly produce learning material. Traditionally, production of
                                           eLearning material has been expensive and time-consuming. “With Adobe Connect, we can rapidly
                                           create and assemble a complete training presentation in less than three hours—previously it could
                                           take three weeks just for the planning and storyboard,” explains Kristensen. “We can now train our
                                           sta worldwide on a given topic within 24 hours. is is truly rapid learning,” adds Hansen, “ anks
                                           to Adobe Connect, we can train our employees worldwide faster and more cost e ectively than ever.”

                                           Grundfos runs Adobe Connect on an internal server. Authorized employees have an area in which
                                           they can see which courses they should take, and also view the results of courses they have completed.
                                           It was important for Grundfos that Adobe Connect can handle user data from its internal directory
                                           server. is means that users do not have to be set up separately on the Adobe Connect server. e
                                           Adobe so ware has built-in LDAP integration and automatically accesses all user data from the
                                           Grundfos directory database. In this way, it is possible to maintain users from one location, and as
                                           many as 6,000 users can be set up in less than hour.
“By using Adobe Connect             With a hosted Adobe Connect module for training, Grundfos o ers training to customers and
 and Adobe Flash, we are            partners. e Adobe solution monitors who has gone through the training presentation and uses
                                    short tests to measure whether the messages have been understood. With Adobe Connect, the
 con dent that people can
                                    company can quickly update customers with the latest product information. “Adobe Connect
 participate in trainings
                                    enables us to deliver timely product training to our distributors and wholesalers, so they can always
 without problems.”                 recommend the right pump for a project,” says Hansen. “We’d like to train 10,000 customers
Ole Kristensen,                     using the Adobe so ware, which would give a real upswing in pump sales.”
Senior eLearning project manager,
Grundfos                            Grundfos also uses a hosted version of Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional for meetings to organize
                                    eMeetings. e Adobe meetings do not require an AV room, and can be carried out from an
                                    individual’s workspace over the Internet (IP). It requires just a web camera and a microphone.
                                       rough live meetings, the course participants have the opportunity to take part actively in training
                                    programs, asking questions and sharing their knowledge with the other participants. In addition to
                                    live course meetings, Grundfos uses Acrobat Connect Professional for normal business meetings.

For More Information                A complete learning solution
www.adobe.com/products/connect/     At Grundfos, eLearning is an important part of the company’s training strategy. Adobe Connect
                                    provides the opportunity to manage the entire eLearning ow, from production and design of
                                    learning content that includes integrated tests through to following up and monitoring activities.
                                    Grundfos can see the test results of individual users and assess whether eLearning is working.
                                    Everything is controlled from the Adobe Connect server.

                                      e Adobe so ware also o ers the possibility for live training via the Internet. e so ware is so
                                    user-friendly that production of the training process is assigned to the individual departments.
                                    In this way, eLearning can gain acceptance as a natural tool for knowledge dissemination and
                                    competence development at Grundfos.




Adobe Systems Incorporated          Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Connect, and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
345 Park Avenue                     the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
San Jose, CA 95110-2704
USA                                 © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
www.adobe.com                       95009205 06/07 R
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5
                              CHAPTER                       5


                             Top-Level Elements
                             for a Successful
                             e-Learning Strategy
                             By Lisa D. Young


                             “
                               C     heaper, faster, better …”
                                        … a familiar mantra many organizations look to live by when it comes to training and
                             development. But in today’s reality of scaled-back training departments, diminishing budgets, dis-
                             persed workforces, and changing content it is often difficult to live up to.
                                Many see e-Learning as a way to make this mantra a reality, and organizations have jumped on the
                             bandwagon. E-Learning is progressive, it is sexy, and it can be rapidly developed and implemented,
                             creating a perception that it is the catch-all solution to training and learning needs. The result is that
                             many organizations expend more effort on churning out e-Learning courses than on developing a
                             long-term strategy that will result in successful e-Learning.
                                E-Learning is here to stay. Technological advances and mainstream acceptance of the training
                             methodology only support this notion. Therefore it is time to step back, reevaluate the place of
                             e-Learning in our organizations, and focus on a strategy to support the conception, design, and
                             development of successful e-Learning initiatives and programs. E-learning that is robust, innovative,
                             and timely. E-Learning that pushes organizational boundaries and takes learning and knowledge
                             development to the next level.
                                A solid strategy can assist in adding value to your program while lowering the stress levels of those
                             individuals who are typically responsible for e-Learning. An increased interest in and acceptance of
                             e-Learning as a viable training solution allows you to enable various non-traditional resources in
                             your organization to be involved in the design and development of e-Learning in a variety of capaci-
                             ties. But be warned: this type of strategy requires letting go of some of the control you may be accus-
                             tomed to, and slowing putting the design of learning back into the hands of the content experts. It is
                             contingent upon you providing a toolbox and roadmap that sets these individuals up for success.

                             The five elements of a successful strategy
                                      A successful e-Learning strategy relies on the interconnectedness of five main elements – Tools,
Contents                                                 Training, Processes, Supports, and People – to provide the knowledge, skills,
                                                         tools, and support required to create an increased number of e-Learning ini-
In Chapter 5 you will find information about:
                                                         tiatives that meet the high-standards expected by your organization. These
• The five elements of a successful strategy
                                                         elements are the e-Learning strategy mantra you should live by. Grounded in
                                                         the resources and processes required to efficiently and effectively support the



                                                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        53
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5




                                  entire project life-cycle, your initiatives will produce more e-Learning, in less time, for less money,
                                  and will impact a larger audience base.
                                     An understanding of the effect of these elements (see Table 5-1), combined with a holistic under-
                                  standing of the place of e-Learning within your organization, will ensure that you create a strategy
                                  that best suits your current needs, and is flexible enough to support the changing needs of your or-
                                  ganization over time. When these elements form the foundation of the larger organizational e-Learn-
                                  ing landscape, and are recognized and utilized by all individuals that touch e-Learning, you are on
                                  the road to a successful e-Learning program. Let’s examine these elements in more detail so you can
                                  start to envision the role they can play in your organization’s e-Learning strategy.


                                  Tools
                                     Tools are the technological resources you will use to conceptualize, design, and develop your
                                  e-Learning initiatives.
                                     As organizations grow, learning departments may not have the headcount to meet the demand for
                                  e-Learning course development – the demand for e-Learning outweighs the availability of those
                                  individuals traditionally used to design and develop e-Learning initiatives. Dedicated e-Learning
                                  resources are often limited to an instructional designer, a developer, a project manager, and an imple-
                                  mentation specialist – if you’re lucky! As a result, to take e-Learning to the next level, you need to
                                  start relying on other individuals to conceptualize, design, and develop e-Learning initiatives. The
                                  first strategy element you require to make this happen is the provision of the appropriate tools that
                                  support e-Learning – both to create your e-Learning initiatives and to implement e-Learning at an
                                  organizational level.
                                     What do these tools look like? Many will be familiar to you – perhaps you already use one in your
                                  organization. The key is your understanding of how these tools can work together to help streamline
                                  each phase of the e-Learning project life-cycle. It involves knowing how the use of these tools will
                                  change over time, and knowing the new tools that will be required as e-Learning grows and matures
                                  within your organization.

                                                                             LMS
Table 5-1
                                                                                Your LMS (Learning Management System) plays a key role
                                                                             in the success of your e-Learning projects. Even the most well-
The benefits of the five elements when used
                                                                             designed and executed course will have limited effect if it is
as part of your e-Learning strategy
                                                                             not effectively managed and delivered to the learner. The size
Benefit category   Increase                     Decrease                     and forecasted growth of your organization, and how it uses
Cost               ROI                          Amount spent on              e-Learning for training and development, will dictate the type
                                                outsourcing                  of LMS you need to consider. In addition to the commercial
Efficiency         Number of courses            Length of time to complete
                                                                             packages on the market, free and open-source solutions are
                   developed                    an e-Learning project        also available. (See Sidebar 5-1 on page 55.) There are even
                                                                             companies that offer hosted LMS solutions. Make sure to
Resources          Number of people             Reliance on external ven-
                   involved in e-Learning       dors                         review the features, functionality, and cost of the various
                   projects at various levels                                options of the market; as well as your ability to refine and
Impact             Number of people trained     Delivery of projects that
                                                                             customize the solution to meet your organizational needs.
                   in your organization         have errors, are inconsis-   The eLearning Guild has numerous e-Books on the selection,
                                                tent, or are ineffective     implementation, and management of your LMS that can help
                                                                             you with your decision. Taking the time up front to review


                                                                             The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy      54
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5




                                 your options, and involving additional stakeholders in the decision-making process, will ensure you
                                 are choosing the best option to support your strategy.

                                 E-Authoring tools
                                         There are many e-Authoring tools available depending on the skill level you expect your resources
                                     to have, the type of control over look, feel, and layout of an e-Learning initiative you want individu-
                                     als to have, and how effectively you want the course to integrate with the tool you will use to manage
                                     and host your courses. (See Sidebar 5-2.) Remember the goal is to eventually transition parts of the
                                     design and development process to resources that may not be highly technical. Therefore the tools
                                     you implement should take this into consideration.
                                         Tools that rapidly develop courses, like Lectora® Publisher™ and ReadyGo®, are great tools for the
                                     development of e-Learning by subject matter experts who are not trained in the design or develop-
                                     ment of e-Learning. The programs are straightforward to learn, and often have a user interface that
                                     emulates menus and tools from software packages that are familiar to most individuals (for example,
                                     Microsoft® PowerPoint® and Word®). But the strengths of these tools are also their biggest weakness:
                                     there are limits to the complexity, layout elements, and functionality of the courses you can produce.
                                     Your strategy should take this into account – depending on how you want to grow e-Learning in
                                     your organization you need to have a plan for the tools you will require for your people resources as
                                     their knowledge and abilities evolve beyond the rapid development tool.
                                         To address this potential barrier, and in response to the abilities of the individuals who will be in-
                                     volved in e-Learning projects in your organization, you may decide to by-pass rapid development
                                     and consider a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) authoring tool, such as SumTotal®
                                     ToolBook® or SuddenlySmart® SmartBuilder™. These tools provide more control over the elements,
                                     behaviors, and structure when developing your course. When choosing your tool be aware of how
                                     published courses behave, how they work with the learner’s system, and how it can be integrated and
Sidebar 5-1                          managed within the organization.
                                                                                  Regardless of which tool(s) you end up choosing, make
 Links to various LMS packages                                                 sure you take adequate time to assess your options and deter-
                                                                               mine the best tool for your needs, your users, and your or-
 Saba Enterprise – http://www.saba.com                                         ganization. You will find many resources available online that
 Plateau LMS – http://www.plateau.com
 SumTotal Systems Total LMS – http://www.sumtotalsystems.com                   compare various authoring tools, or provide an in-depth
 EEDO ForceTen LCMS – http://www.eedo.com                                      analysis of the capabilities of the tool. The eLearning Guild
 GeoLearning GeoMaestro – http://www.geolearning.com
 Learn.com LearnCenter – http://www.learn.com
                                                                               also has many resources, articles, and reports discussing the
 OLAT – http://www.olat.org/public/index.html                                  merits of various authoring tools. Use the research completed
 Ganesha – http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/ganesha/                        by others to your advantage. Bringing a new authoring tool
 Ilias – http://www.ilias.de/ios/index-e.html
                                                                               into your organization if your first tool does not work out is
                                                                               a recipe for disaster. The only time you should bring in a sec-
Sidebar 5-2                                                                    ond (or even third) tool is to help expand and advance the
                                                                               skills of your resources. Get informed, and get it right the first
 Links to various e-Authoring tools                                            time.

 Lectora – http://www.trivantis.com/                                        Additional e-Learning tools
 ReadyGo – http://www.readygo.com/
 Articulate – http://www.articulate.com/                                       When creating your e-Learning toolbox, make sure to look
 ToolBook – http://www.toolbook.com/                                        beyond the traditional authoring tools and review the poten-
 SmartBuilder – http://www.suddenlysmart.com
                                                                            tial of other software packages that can enhance your e-Learn-
 Adobe Captivate – http://www.adobe.com/products/captivate/
                                                                            ing initiatives. You may want to consider a synchronous


                                                                            The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy           55
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5




                                 e-Learning tool, such as WebEx®, Microsoft® LiveMeeting®, Elluminate Live!®, or Adobe® Acrobat®
                                 Connect Professional™, where individuals can interact in real time in an online virtual space. (See
                                 Sidebar 5-3.) This interaction can be text-, audio-, or video-based. Or you may be interested in a tool
                                 that also offers additional features, such as asynchronous discourse, document sharing, and collabo-
                                 rative whiteboards (for example, WebBoard™ or Blackboard®). These virtual classroom-like envi-
                                 ronments create collaborative spaces to develop and sustain learning communities over time, as well
                                 as for a specific e-Learning event.
                                    Remember though: with any tool that you bring into your organization you need to ensure the
                                 people using these tools know how to leverage this technology effectively. This is where training, the
                                 second strategy element, can help.

                                 Training
                                    Training refers to the learning and knowledge opportunities provided to address the needs of vari-
                                 ous individuals involved in the e-Learning product life cycle.
                                    When developing your e-Learning strategy you will focus on the training needs and requirements
                                 of the audiences you want to reach to create a successful, holistic solution. But your strategy will be
                                 severely limited if it fails to also consider the different knowledge needs of the resources who will be
                                 involved in creating your e-Learning initiatives. For some individuals, this may consist of an over-
                                 view of what e-Learning is and how it can enhance and benefit training initiatives they require for
                                 their teams or departments. For others, it may be the more advanced authoring skills they require to
                                 scaffold their current design and development knowledge. By addressing the training needs of this
                                 diverse group you provide them with the ability to become increasingly self-sufficient during the
                                 e-Learning project life cycle.
                                    There are many ways to approach the training of these resources. Just as you would for any train-
                                 ing initiative, you need to ensure that the training methodologies you decide to use best fit the con-
                                 tent, context, and audience needs. The following are some of the options you may wish to consider
                                 to include in your strategy.

                                 Certification programs
                                       Certification programs are important for providing the foundational knowledge required to equip
                                     your resource people with the e-Learning language and processes of your organization. By formaliz-
                                     ing the knowledge and behavior expectations coming out of this training you are establishing the
                                     importance of the effective execution of your strategy.
                                       Since your resource people will not all require the same amount and type of knowledge, you should
                                     provide modular training with content in each unit that scaffolds the content in the others. If you
                                     are working with multiple tools in your organization, you can provide basic modules that are prereq-
Sidebar 5-3                                                                  uisites to completing the tool training. Allow individuals to
                                                                             take the tool modules in parallel, as they are distinct learning
 Links to various other e-Learning tools                                     paths. Although your people should complete modules in
                                                                             order, it should not be necessary to complete them back-to-
 WebEx – http://www.webex.com
 Microsoft LiveMeeting – http://office.microsoft.com/enus/livemeeting/       back. As your resource individuals grow in skill and develop
    default.aspx?ofcresset=1                                                 their proficiency, they can take the next module in the series
 Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional – http://www.adobe.com/products/
    acrobatconnectpro/                                                       that helps them advance their skills and abilities. (See Table
 Elluminate Live! – http://www.elluminate.com/                               5-2 on page 57.)
 WebBoard – http://www.webboard.com
 Blackboard – http://www.blackboard.com




                                                                          The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         56
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5


Table 5-2
                                                                                                         Reinforcement and sustainment
 Sample certification training program                                                                      The training of your resources
                                                                                                         will fall short unless you include
Program           Module 1: e-Learning           Module 2: Introduction     Module 3: ToolBook for
                  Basics                         to ToolBook                the Advanced User
                                                                                                         training in your strategy that rein-
                                                                                                         forces learning and provides addi-
 Focus            Basic e-Learning               Basic understanding of the Advanced ToolBook ele-
                  principles                     ToolBook authoring tool    ments, including triggers    tional knowledge in areas that
                                                 and its functionality      and developing interactivity complement or advance individ-
 Why take         Individuals will learn the     Individuals learn how to   Authors are able to create
                                                                                                         ual skills and abilities. The needs
 the course?      various phases and deliv-      use ToolBook in the cre-   courses with complex inter-  of your resources will change over
                  erables for executing an       ation of simple courses    actions and activities.      time, and the certification pro-
                  e-Learning initiative          with limited interactivity
                                                                                                         gram won’t be able to meet all of
 Audience         Anyone who touches a           Individuals who will be    Individuals who have taken   these needs. Therefore you need
                  phase of e-Learning, or        designing and developing   Introduction to ToolBook
                  supports those involved        courses and need to be     and require advanced
                                                                                                         to provide training in small, bite-
                  with e-Learning, e.g.          provisioned with ToolBook  knowledge and skills for     sized learning chunks, minimizing
                  Managers, Directors,                                      designing more advanced      the time and resources required to
                  Product Specialists, etc.                                 courses
                                                                                                         support these types of training
                                                                                                         initiatives. (See Sidebar 5-4.) It is
                                   also an opportunity to showcase the various e-Learning tools or prospective tools in your organization.
                                      You should also consider using this type of training to target individuals that you feel would bene-
                                   fit from understanding what e-Learning is and how e-Learning can be used, but are resistant to com-
                                   mitting the amount of time required to complete a module in the certificate program. For example,
                                   provide a Lunch and Learn session for the facilitators in your organization to help them understand
                                   how blending instructor-led training with e-Learning can create a more robust training solution. Use
                                   this training to help change mindsets and gain buy-in to the supports and processes, the third and
                                   fourth strategy elements, which individuals should be using and following when involved with
                                   e-learning projects.

                                Supports
                                       Supports are the ongoing resources and communication you will provide to individuals involved
                                    in the various phases of the e-Learning life cycle.
                                       The success of your e-Learning strategy is a direct reflection of the support you provide in various
                                    phases of the e-Learning life-cycle. Support is required to ensure that individuals have the knowledge
Sidebar 5-4                                                                    and mechanisms they require when involved in e-Learning
                                                                               initiatives. These supports allow individuals to reference pro-
 Supplementary training types                                                  cesses and procedures, review examples, access templates, and
 • Lunch and Learn sessions                                                    get regular updates on the information they need to execute
 • Webinar or Webcast (run live, then archive for future reference)            e-Learning effectively. In order to promote the daily use and
 • E-Learning module using your in-house authoring tool
 • Simulations or case studies                                                 reference of these supports it is important that they are acces-
 • Demonstrations of new technology, new ways of thinking about designing      sible in a consistent location (for example, through the orga-
   interactions, etc.
 • Showcases of e-Learning courses individuals have developed for the organ-
                                                                               nizational Intranet), and provided in a consistent manner (a
   ization (can be housed in an online space, or set up as a mini-conference)  professional look, feel, and branding), creating a “one-stop-
 • Knowledge or application assessments (e.g. provide individuals with an      shop” for e-Learning information needs. Remember this
   example of an interaction that needs to be built using your authoring tool
   and have them provide their method for creating this interaction – can pro- knowledge repository will need to continually grow and
   vide prizes for the most accurate method and/or the most creative interac-  change to accommodate the needs of the various individuals
   tion)
 • Mentoring and coaching opportunities
                                                                               involved in your e-Learning projects. Be prepared to update
                                                                               the site on a regular basis, utilizing feedback provided by the


                                                                           The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy          57
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5




                              individuals who regularly use the site, and are most familiar with the site’s functionality and content.
                              They are in the best position to provide feedback that will enhance how they interact and use the
                              provided information.

                              Standards and best practice
                                 Providing standards around the design and development of your e-Learning initiatives will ensure
                              you are using best practices to create learning that balances content with interactivity, provides a
                              strong brand image, and makes your e-Learning recognizable within the organization. You should
                              document and interweave these standards throughout the certification training program to ensure
                              understanding and compliance.

                              Templates
                                To assist individuals in complying with the organization’s standards and best practices, it is impor-
                              tant to provide templates that can streamline the design and development process, allowing e-Learn-
                              ing to be created more efficiently. Your templates should be there to support individuals who are new
                                                                             to designing e-Learning, but not hinder those who
                                                                             have more advanced skills and abilities – therefore the
                                                                             use of the templates should be flexible based on ability.

                                                                             Image library
                                                                                Your image library is a key support for helping
                                                                             create the brand image you want to deliver in your
                                                                             e-Learning. Remember, you should provide detailed
                                                                             standards around the use of images, including resolu-
                                                                             tion, placement, and acceptable uses.

                                                                             Interaction gallery (reusable learning objects)
                                                                                 As you start to increase the amount of e-Learning
                                                                             you are producing you can create a library of the best
                                                                             interactions that individuals can customize and use in
                                                                             their own e-Learning development. This gallery of
                                                                             interactions and reusable learning objects, or widgets
Figure 5-1                    as some call them, can enhance e-Learning initiatives quickly, freeing up time to develop new inter-
An example of a weekly
communication newsletter      actions and activities. Once again, provide detailed standards and instructions around when to use
sent out via e-mail.          these interactions, how to use them, and the specifics for customizing them to meet each initiative’s
Individuals can click on      needs.
the links provided to learn
                                 In order to keep these supports up to date and relevant, you must ensure you have a strong com-
more about each story.
                              munication link with your resources to provide updates of tools, supports, and resources. Providing
                              a weekly or bi-weekly newsletter can help to raise awareness, keep standards and best practices front-
                              of-mind, and ensure correct messages are getting across and being implemented in a time-sensitive
                              manner. (See Figure 5-1.)

                              Processes
                                Processes are the methods and procedures used to execute a successful e-Learning project life cycle.
                                Implementing a successful e-Learning initiative begins with the provision of a strong methodology
                              that supports how the initiative is designed, developed, and delivered. You need to clearly communi-


                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       58
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5




                                     cate this methodology so that all stakeholders who touch an e-Learning project understand, and
                                     adopt it – it is an opportunity to reinforce best practices and highlight roles and responsibilities.

                                     E-Learning project lifecycle
                                         You should design a generic workback schedule that includes all required deliverables, touch-
                                      points, and stakeholder sign-off for each phase of the project lifecycle. It should also include stan-
Sidebar 5-5                                                                                                dardized timing for creating the various
                                                                                                           deliverables, reviewing the deliverables,
 Phases and deliverables to consider for the project lifecycle                                             and providing feedback. For each initia-
 and workback schedule                                                                                     tive you should fine-tune the workback
 Identify Need                                                                                             schedule with the key stakeholders to
 • Provide a training request form that needs to be completed by individuals interested in a training ini- suit the specific needs of the project and
   tiative for a specific audience.                                                                        the resources involved in executing the
 • The e-Team should partner to review the viability of e-Learning as a training solution for the request.
 • A response to the request should be provided to the stakeholder within a set amount of working days.    project.
                                                                                                              Regardless of the skill-level of the
 Needs Assessment                                                                                          individuals designing and developing
 • Use standardized forms to gather key pieces of information that you require to deliver your course,     your e-Learning initiatives, there are cer-
   including the date by which you would ideally deliver the course, the audience, assessment require-
   ments, etc.
                                                                                                           tain points in the workback schedule
 • Interview key stakeholders and complete focus groups with individuals that can provide a representa-    where your dedicated e-Learning team
   tive idea of the training needs of the audience.                                                        members (or e-Team) should always be
 • Use a standardized form to report on the results of the needs assessment, including key themes,
   challenges, and barriers. Provide recommendations for the design of the e-Learning initiative. This     involved to ensure consistency, compli-
   form should be signed off by stakeholder(s).                                                            ance, and provide coaching. (See Sidebar
 • The e-Team should always be involved in this phase of the project in order to directly share their
   knowledge and expertise.
                                                                                                           5-5.)

 Design                                                                                                        Rapid content development
 • Create key design deliverables including course outline, instructional design plan and/or script, story-       For client groups that are not ready to
   boards, etc.                                                                                                make the full leap into the e-Learning
 • Stakeholder(s) should review the required deliverables, and key stakeholder should provide sign-off
   before proceeding with the next deliverable in the project workflow.                                        arena, you can bridge the gap between
 • The e-Team should always be part of the stakeholder team that reviews the design deliverables.              content and course design by providing
                                                                                                               a development template that individuals
 Development and Testing
                                                                                                               can populate with the required content.
 • Develop the course using designated development tool or method.
 • Complete thorough review and testing of the course to validate content, functionality, compatibility,
                                                                                                               For individuals who understand e-Learn-
   ability to integrate effectively, and alignment with brand and standards. Proof all courses for accuracy.   ing, but are not confident enough to use
   Involve stakeholders where appropriate.                                                                     one of the various development tools,
 • If using authoring tools, you may require that courses are published at multiple intervals during devel-
   opment process to ensure compatibility with a LMS – this will help identify any bugs before develop-        you can provide the opportunity to
   ment proceeds too far.                                                                                      make layout and interaction suggestions.
 • The e-Team should always be part of the stakeholder team that reviews the development deliverables.
                                                                                                               In addition, they can supply potential
 Delivery                                                                                                      links and images to leverage for use in
 • Provide specific timing for how far in advance a final version of the course needs to be provided
                                                                                                               development of the course. After com-
   before launch.                                                                                              pleting this template, the e-Team re-
 • Provide process for uploading course into LMS, if required.                                                 source can review the content, map the
                                                                                                               instructional design ideas to the content,
 Revisions and Maintenance
                                                                                                               and develop the course using the method
 • Provide a strategy and process for ensuring revision and updating of courses on a timely basis. It
   should be clear who will be involved in regular reviews, and who will be responsible for updating the       or authoring tool of choice. This meth-
   course with any changes                                                                                     od will allow you to cut down on the
                                                                                                               time required by the e-Team to acquire


                                                                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy         59
TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5



 Sidebar 5-6
                                                                                       content and solicit feedback by allowing resources in the
  Typical client group self-reliance phases                                            client groups, who make up the fifth strategy element, to have
                                                                                       increased responsibility in the rollout of their e-Learning ini-
  Phase 1: E-Learning team designs and develops courses                                tiatives.
  An individual on the e-Team takes e-Learning initiatives in this phase through
  the entire project life-cycle. The initiatives may be part of a larger project and
  not initiated by a specific client group. However, in the instances where the
                                                                                       People
  training request is from a specific client group, you should coach and mentor           “People” refers to the various individuals involved in the
  individuals from that client group in order to move them into Phase 2.
                                                                                       design and development of e-Learning initiatives.
  Phase 2: Partnership with client group                                                  When you have the tools, training, supports, and processes
  A subject matter expert on the client group’s team takes these courses
                                                                                       put into place to support the design and development of
  through the initial design phases. The SME can provide content and ideas             e-Learning initiatives in your organization, you will find that
  for the course development, perhaps using the rapid content development              you do not require a large team dedicated to e-Learning. You
  template! A member of the e-Team will then use the template to develop the
  course.                                                                              can have a greater impact leveraging the existing skills, know-
                                                                                       ledge, and enthusiasm of your dedicated resources to help
  Phase 3: Self-sufficient client group                                                coach, develop, and mentor other individuals involved in the
  Self-sufficient client groups have invested a considerable amount of time            e-Learning project life-cycle.
  and effort to provide their team members with the knowledge and skills
  required to produce their own e-Learning initiatives. They have multiple indi-
                                                                                          As your internal client groups increase their requests for
  viduals that have taken various modules in your certification training pro-          e-Learning initiatives, they increase their willingness to invest
  gram, from developers to directors. These client groups are able to concep-          and develop the e-Learning knowledge and skills of their
  tualize, design, and develop all their e-Learning initiatives. The e-Team should
  still assist in the customization of the workback schedule and review major          team members. Your goal should be to leverage this willing-
  milestones in the project lifecycle, providing feedback and coaching if              ness and move these client groups through the various phases
  required. But ultimately these groups are self-reliant.
                                                                                       of expertise so they are able to take on increased responsibili-
                                                                                       ty for the design and development of their own e-Learning
                                                                                       initiatives. (See Sidebar 5-6.) You should be continually asses-
                                                                                       sing your client groups to determine if they require complete
                                                                                       support or various levels of partial support during the design
                                                                                       and development of e-Learning initiatives.
                                                                                          For many organizations, this may be a new way of thinking
                                                                                       about the design of e-Learning. Therefore it is important that
                                                                                       you support the mindset change required by individuals and
                                                                                       gain their buy-in to this new approach. Communication of
                                                                                       your direction is paramount, including your strategy for in-
                                                                                       creasing the number of client groups in Phase 3. (See Figure
                                                                                       5-2.)

                                                                                       On your marks, get set, GO!
                                                                                          What are you waiting for? You understand your organiza-
                                                                                       tion, you recognize the role of e-Learning, and you now
                                                                                       know the elements you require to build an inclusive strategy
                                                                                       that maximizes knowledge and resources, and improves the
                                                                                       impact of your e-Learning initiatives. Take the elements pro-
                                                                                       vided and leverage them to develop a strategy that best fits
                                                                                       your organizational needs. All you need to do now is make it
Figure 5-2
Example of the long-term strategy for developing the increasing self-
                                                                                       happen.
reliance of your organization when developing e-Learning initiatives.




                                                                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        60
Success Story




 WebAssist
 Market-leading developer of Adobe® software extensions relies on Adobe Captivate™ 3 and
 Adobe Acrobat® Connect™ Professional software to create engaging eLearning experiences

 WebAssist                               Optimizing online presence
 www.webassist.com                       In today’s time-challenged marketplace, web professionals need to build and deploy attractive,
                                         content-rich pages that can be updated quickly and easily. Since 1999, WebAssist has been making
                                         web development easier and faster for designers, developers, and e-commerce professionals with its
                                         market-leading so ware extensions that plug into Adobe so ware.
 Industry
 Technology                              Based in Encinitas, California, WebAssist helps individuals and businesses improve productivity,
                                         increase potential, and extend commercial opportunities with tools to build better websites. More
 Challenges
                                         than 250,000 developers and business owners worldwide use WebAssist products to create websites
• Create interactive product
  demonstrations                         for e-commerce, enterprise, government, and education. WebAssist’s agship product, eCart—an
• Provide easy-to-follow,                Adobe Dreamweaver® so ware extension—o ers web designers a cleaner, simpler way to create
  customizable tutorials for             end-to-end online store solutions.
  company’s latest product rollout
                                         WebAssist provides online training and product demonstrations in support of more than 20
 Solution                                solutions. When the WebAssist developers needed to create a series of product demonstrations,
• eLearning                              they turned to Adobe Captivate and Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional so ware to build and
 WebAssist is using Adobe
                                         deliver intuitive eLearning tools. By leveraging simulations created in Adobe Captivate, WebAssist
 Captivate and Adobe Acrobat
 Connect Professional to produce         customers can “test drive” the company’s so ware and get up to speed quickly.
 engaging training and product
 demonstrations that give web            Adobe Captivate attens the learning curve
 developers a better understanding       Joseph Lowery, vice president of marketing at WebAssist, explains that Adobe Captivate is the best
 of how to build feature-rich            tool on the market for rapidly developing interactive tutorials, training, and product demonstrations.
 e-commerce sites.
                                         eLearning materials developed in Adobe Captivate empower users at all skill levels to quickly
 Results                                 increase their pro ciency in a wide range of business processes, such as communicating procedures,
• Increased revenue from software        meeting compliance standards, training co-workers, or marketing products.
  extensions by 44%
• Reduced the time previously required
                                         “What I love about Adobe Captivate most is the fact that you can mold training to your way of
  to revise old video content by 85%      thinking rather than having the application determine the route,” says Lowery. e WebAssist
• Enhanced customers’ engagement          development team used Adobe Captivate to create the tutorial for its eCart solution, enabling users
  with company products through           to page through its online store tutorial. Users can easily navigate to any section—from creating a
  interactive materials
                                          catalog to checking out—and drill down for speci c information.
• Extended reach of customer
  support by o ering web-based           When he rst encountered Adobe Captivate, Mark Fletcher, WebAssist’s training manager (whose
  training available any time            background is eLearning and instructional design), was astounded. “When I came across the level
 Systems At A Glance                     of exibility provided by Adobe Captivate, I was amazed at how easy it is to visualize content and
• Adobe Captivate 3                      make edits to audio, text, and graphic components,” he says.
• Adobe Creative Suite® 3 Web
                                         Previously, WebAssist developers used a linear video-editing technology to create tutorials. As a
  Premium. Components used
  include:                               matter of course, each time the company launched a new version, the team needed to revise the
 • Adobe Flash® CS3                      associated tutorials. Since it was essentially impossible to rapidly revise content using the old video
 • Adobe Fireworks® CS3                  methods, the team basically had to create a new tutorial from scratch.
 • Adobe Dreamweaver CS3
 • Adobe Acrobat Connect
   Professional
Adobe Captivate and Adobe Acrobat
Connect Professional software is used to
build and deliver intuitive, eLearning tools
including product simulations and tutorials
for WebAssist solutions including eCart.
The artwork for WebAssist’s online materials
is created using Adobe Fireworks CS3
software, a graphics editor that works
transparently with Adobe Dreamweaver,
Flash, and Illustrator software. Image les
saved in Fireworks are easily exported to
Adobe Captivate.




“WebAssist has realized a 44%                  “Adobe Captivate is a tremendous time-saver in comparison to using video methodology,” says
 increase in extension revenue                  Fletcher. “We estimate that the team saves about 85% of the time that was previously spent making
                                                revisions to video presentations. I can deploy material to the team for edit and review much more
 during the rst 12-month
                                                quickly, and we can easily make changes at the 11th hour.”
 period after leveraging Adobe
 Captivate solutions on our site.”                e rapid production environment in Adobe Captivate allows Fletcher and his team to create just-
Michael Lekse                                  in-time work ows, giving them the exibility they need to meet tight deadlines and bring products
Vice president of sales                        to market faster. In measuring the Adobe Captivate learning curve, Fletcher estimates that users
WebAssist                                      are up to speed within two hours.

                                               Rapid development increases net results
                                               According to Michael Lekse, vice president of sales, “WebAssist has realized a 44% increase in
                                               extension revenue during the rst 12-month period a er leveraging Adobe Captivate solutions on
                                               our site.” Additionally, Adobe Captivate has enriched WebAssist’s ability to deliver quality service
                                               and support as part of its web development toolkits and mentoring services.

                                               “Adobe Captivate so ware has given WebAssist a cost-e ective way to increase our community
                                                support and educate prospective clients. Our worldwide customer base needs solutions, support,
                                                and training during all international business hours. Adobe Captivate gives us the ability to
                                                communicate with visitors and customers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, via self-paced, interactive
                                                tutorials and feature tours—without having to increase our departmental headcounts or outsource
                                                services,” says Lekse. “Our Solution Recipes, which explain how to create sophisticated web
                                                applications step-by-step, have signi cantly reduced the number of support calls.”

For More Information                           Lekse adds that the ability to rapidly prototype eLearning modules, auto-populate graphic revisions
www.adobe.com/products/captivate/              universally, and localize content inside Adobe Captivate are tremendous production time-savers.
                                               He also notes, “A really important bene t of using Adobe Captivate is that it enables us to retrieve
                                               valuable data to create and analyze reports.”

                                               E ective, seamless tool integration
                                               WebAssist relies on a wealth of Adobe solutions to enrich the eLearning experience. For example,
                                               much of the artwork for WebAssist’s online materials is created using Adobe Fireworks CS3 so ware,
                                               a graphics editor that works transparently with Adobe Dreamweaver, Flash, and Illustrator® so ware.
                                               Image les that are saved in Fireworks can be easily exported to Adobe Captivate. “ e ability to
                                               launch and edit in Adobe tools like Fireworks CS3 from inside Adobe Captivate signi cantly
                                               streamlines our production process,” says Fletcher. In the future, WebAssist plans to use its Acrobat
                                               Connect Professional server to log user statistics so they can readily see what pages are being
                                               accessed most frequently.

                                                 e challenge of providing users with trial versions of its products creates a unique blend of marketing
                                               and training opportunities for WebAssist. “Using Adobe Captivate to create presentations, we can
                                               show people how to use our so ware using audio, interactivity, and imagery—without requiring
                                               them to download anything,” says Fletcher.
                                               Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Captivate, Creative Suite, Dreamweaver, Fireworks, Flash, and Illustrator are either registered
Adobe Systems Incorporated                     trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their
345 Park Avenue                                respective owners.
San Jose, CA 95110-2704
USA                                            © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
www.adobe.com                                  95009831 07/07 A
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6
                             CHAPTER                       6


                             Strategy for the Learner:
                             A Student’s Guide to
                             e-Learning Success
                             By Michael Corry and Ryan Watkins



                             I   n its many forms e-Learning has become an integral part of the training and professional devel-
                                 opment services in a growing number of organizations. Whether e-Learning in your organization
                             includes just a limited number of online computer courses, the year-around offering of international
                             training courses delivered via satellite, or even simply after-hours programs that allow you to take
                             online college courses, your participation in e-Learning is likely to be an expanding component of
                             your professional development plan, both now and in the future. As a result, you must be prepared
                             to successfully meet the challenges of learning through these high-tech, and often demanding, train-
                             ing opportunities.
                                Learning how to use the technology, while important, is not enough for mastering e-Learning.
                             From adapting the critical thinking skills that you use when taking notes during a classroom lecture,
                             to adopting new communication skills when working with virtual teams, you must now update the
                             strategies that have led to your success in the traditional training classroom to ensure your equivalent
                             success in e-Learning courses. By building on the techniques that you used in the past (such as group
                             leadership, time management, and critical reading skills) you can improve both your performance in
                             training courses as well as your ability to apply those skills in the workplace.
                                In this chapter we will provide guidance for how you can improve your e-Learning study skills
                             through combining the most valued skills of the traditional training classroom with the modern
                             capabilities of e-Learning technologies (see Figure 6-1 on page 64).
                                Use the tips, tools, and recommendations in this chapter to expand your study skills that take
                             advantage of e-Learning technologies rather than letting the new technologies present obstacles to
                             your learning and professional development.

                             Plan for success
Contents                            Before you venture into the world of e-Learning, it is important to take a few minutes and assess
                                                         your strengths and weaknesses in this new learning environment. For areas
In Chapter 6 you will find information about:            where you identify weaknesses, you should be prepared to do some work so
• Plan for success                                       that they do not become a barrier to your learning experience. Given your
• Update your study skills                               past experiences, planning for success may be something that you are not
• Tips for success                                       accustomed to doing in a face-to-face training environment, yet it is never-
                                                         theless essential if you are new to online learning. When planning for



                                                                      The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy       63
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6




                          e-Learning success, consider the following:
                            • Technology access and protection – Verify that you have adequate access to a computer and
                              Internet connection. Make sure that your computer is new enough to handle any software you
                                                                            may have to use in the course. Also, confirm that your
                                                                            Internet connection is fast enough for the learning
                                                                            materials presented. For example, if your e-Learning
                                                                            materials contain video, you should have a high-speed
                                                                            Internet connection. If you have a dial-up Internet
                                                                            connection, it will be challenging to get access to the
                                                                            necessary materials. Related to access is technology
                                                                            protection. Do you have up-to-date antivirus and spy-
                                                                            ware protection? If not, you need to get the appropri-
                                                                            ate software before you start your e-Learning experi-
                                                                            ence. The only way to make sure you are ready for
                                                                            these types of challenges is to ask in advance. There-
                                                                            fore, before your e-Learning course begins, find out
                                                                            what types of software and materials the instructor
                                                                            expects you to use. This preparation will help you get
                                                                            off to a good start.
Figure 6-1                  • Technology skills – Making sure you have the technology skills required to succeed in an e-Learn-
E-Learning success
(Watkins  Corry, 2004-
                              ing class is vital. Start off by determining whether you have the basic skills required to operate a
2007)                         computer and navigate the Internet, since most e-Learning courses will use these tools to some
                              extent. If you do, then assess your ability to download and upload software and files to the Inter-
                              net. How about your ability to send and receive e-mail messages? Can you send them with an
                              attachment and read an attachment sent to you? While some of these skills may seem simplistic,
                              each one is important to master in order to be successful in an e-Learning environment.
                            • Triangulation – Do you have the necessary skills to evaluate the reliability, quality, and usefulness
                              of online resources? One of the more complex skills is the identification and evaluation of quali-
                              ty and useful online materials. Just remember the rule of “triangulation.” If you find something
                              on the Internet three times from different sources and it appears to say the same thing, then it is
                              probably fairly accurate. This is not a hard and fast rule, but it can be helpful. When in doubt
                              you can always contact the author or owner of the Website to verify the accuracy of their infor-
                              mation.
                            • Communicating online – Effective communication is key when working in the same room with
                              someone. However, communication becomes even more important in an online environment
                              where non-verbal communications are limited. Communication can include e-mail, chat, or bul-
                              letin board exchanges. Can you express yourself clearly in these forms of communication? Could
                              you work collaboratively with others using these tools? Have you ever tried using a chat room
                              with more than two people? Can you carry on an in-depth conversation with multiple people in
                              an e-Learning environment? Related to online communication is the topic of time management.
                              Can you schedule enough time to provide timely and thorough responses? Do you really have
                              time to successfully participate in and complete this online course? It is important to remember
                              that online learning is like many things in life, you get out of it what you put into it. If you can-
                              not communicate effectively online or manage your time wisely, your learning experience and
                              the learning experience of others with whom you interact will diminish.
                            • Motivation – Learning outside a four-walled classroom is a new experience to many people. A


                                                                  The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        64
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6




   key to success is staying motivated. In many online learning experiences, you will never see your
   instructor or other learners. If you are in an asynchronous learning environment, you may also
   never have set times to meet with each other. With that in mind, do you have the self-motivation
   to participate in a course when you seem to be all by yourself? Can you complete work when the
   instructor is not there all the time? How about managing online distractions like e-mails, Web-
   sites, blogs, and such? How about offline distractions, such as the television, children, friends,
   and so forth? It is important to develop a plan for handling these distractions before you start
   your online learning experience. Set rules or guidelines for yourself. Develop a schedule of when
   you will be online and for how long. Also, ask your instructor for feedback on how you are do-
   ing. Ask questions such as, “Are my online postings thorough enough?” or “Am I providing regu-
   lar enough communications?” Staying motivated and applying effective online time management
   skills are essential to e-Learning success.

Update your study skills
   Now that you have identified many of the skills required for success in an e-Learning environ-
ment, it is important to identify what skills you already have and which ones will require some addi-
tional work. Initially, you will want to focus on the important skills that are likely to present the
largest obstacles to your success. Here are some things to keep in mind:
   • Your study skills from high school and college likely won’t be enough. Most of you probably did-
     n’t take e-Learning courses in high school and college, and therefore you can’t depend on the
     skills that helped you to be successful in a classroom as a student to lead to your success online.
     For example, you will need to update the note-taking techniques you used for college lectures for
     the new streaming audio and video presentations. Also, if you are into the high-tech gadgets, you
     may try to do your e-Learning over your iPhone or a similar device. Do you think you can take
     notes while watching or listening to a Podcast of your class lecture on your iPhone? How will the
     technology change the way you review material and prepare for assessments? You can do it, you
     can learn from content delivered by a variety of technologies, but you will have to modify your
     study skills or acquire new ones in order to ensure your success.
   • The first way to be prepared is to take advantage of the technologies that you already use; apply
     the capabilities of software programs to modernize your study skills. An example is the technolo-
     gies available in word processing programs. Without a doubt, at some point in your e-Learning
     experience you will work in a team on a written report of some kind. Since your team members
     could physically be spread out all over the world, keeping all the versions of your document in
     “sync” is essential. Luckily, word processing programs now allow you to track the changes made
     and who made them. Practice using this function and confirm that you understand how to track
     changes; this will give you an advantage when working collaboratively in an e-Learning team.
   • Another way to update your skills is to practice taking notes while reading text, listening to audio,
     or watching video online. This is not as easy as it looks. When reading online, always have a
     paper notepad nearby (for example, on your desk) or toggle between your browser and an open
     word processing page (using CTRL+Tab on a PC, or Command+Tab on a Mac). Also, learn the
     shortcut keys used to copy and paste written materials directly into your word processing docu-
     ment (using CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste). When listening to audio or watching
     video, take advantage of the pause, rewind, and fast-forward buttons to improve the quality of
     your notes; they can make note taking much simpler. Practicing is essential since taking notes
     while watching online lectures is a typical study skill required for success in e-Learning courses.
   • You can be an active learner by participating in optional activities that are available to you. For


                                         The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        65
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6




    example, don’t be shy — try to participate in all discussion board and chat conversations. Not
    only does this give you additional exposure to the learning activities, but it gives you a chance to
    fine tune your e-Learning skills. As an added benefit, active participation in these areas helps to
    build an online community. Belonging to this community can improve your performance in the
    course, and can help alleviate any feelings of isolation that you may have when you are not in a
    traditional training classroom with your peers. This is an important item because feelings of iso-
    lation are high on the list of complaints by e-Learners.
  • With this in mind, another way to be an active e-Learner is to develop online study groups.
    These groups can function synchronously, asynchronously, or both. Not only do these groups
    help you build a learning community, but they can develop into both professional and personal
    networks. Sometimes, the networks that you develop can form a powerful bond that will last for
    years and be a help to you in many ways.
  • Choose the right type of e-Learning course that matches your skill set. Once you have identified
    your e-Learning strengths and weaknesses, you then should consider what type of e-Learning
    course will be best for you. Should it be a text-only course, or a two-way video course or some-
    thing altogether different? Choose your course (or courses) carefully. For example, if you are not
    confident in your critical reading skills, an e-Learning course that is primarily text-based may not
    be a good option for you at this time. Remember, e-Learning is not for everyone and not every
    e-Learning delivery method is for everyone either.

Tips for success
  Once you have assessed your e-Learning strengths and weaknesses, made a plan for success, and
updated your study skills, you are well on your way to being a successful e-Learner. To take you even
further down the road to success, here are some tips that will help on your e-Learning journey:
  • Managing your files – Each e-Learning class can generate a lot of files. For that reason, file man-
    agement is crucial. One important tip is to create folders and sub-folders for each e-Learning
    course. The sub-folders can correspond to activities, assignments, lectures, or other components
    of the course. Along with the files themselves, develop a naming structure that you can apply
    consistently. A naming strategy will help you find files much quicker, and help you keep track of
    documents that may go through many versions before submitting them to the instructor. It does-
    n’t matter what the strategy is, it just has to make sense to you and give you the opportunity to
    expand it as you get more files and folders.
  • Downloading software – Downloading software is important, though some software can be
    harm-ful to your computer if you are not careful. The first thing to keep in mind is to know
    what you are downloading and make sure it comes from a reputable source. Also, make sure you
    have up-to-date anti-virus software on your computer to identify if what you are downloading is
    carrying a virus. There are many different types of software you will download. Some of the
    more common types include updates, plug-ins, trials, shareware, and freeware. More specifically,
    your e-Learning course may require you to download Adobe® Reader®, and “players” for multi-
    media such as Apple® QuickTime®, RealNetworks® RealPlayer®, Adobe Shockwave®, Adobe
    Flash® Player, or other software necessary to access course content. It is important that you
    understand what each of these software programs can do for you, and that you download them
    from the company that makes them. Therefore, spend some time on the Internet and go to the
    Web sites for each of these types of software and learn about them. Fortunately, most will offer
    some level of free or trial software that you can test out without purchasing the entire package.
    The knowledge you gain from practicing this before the course begins will help you succeed in


                                       The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        66
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6




    e-Learning and give you an advantage over others who don’t quite understand these software
    applications and programs.
  • Using e-mail effectively – Almost everyone knows how to use the basics of e-mail. However, here
    are some tips that will help you be more effective in your e-mail use. First, as with software
    downloads, be careful with e-mail attachments. Don’t open an attachment unless you know who
    sent it and you feel it is safe. Also, make sure your anti-virus software is set to scan attachments.
    Second, pick one e-mail account to use for your e-Learning experience and stick with it. If you
    are constantly sending messages from multiple e-mail accounts, your instructor and classmates
    may not know which e-mail account to use to communicate with you. Third, decide whether you
    want to have Post Office Protocol (POP) e-mail access or Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP).
    A consideration here is whether you will always use the same computer when you check your e-
    mail, or whether you will be using different computers. Usually, if you have a POP e-mail ac-
    count, your e-mail resides on the computer you check it on (unless you change the setting).
    Therefore, if you check e-mail on another computer (say, while on vacation), the e-mail messages
    may stay on the other computer, and when you get to your home computer those messages will
    not be available to you. However, if you have an IMAP account, the messages reside on an e-mail
    server, not your local computer, and will be available to you whereever you check your e-mail.
  • Project organization for online groups – More than likely you will participate in an online group
    project in at least one of your e-Learning experiences. To be successful, begin by reviewing the
    instructor’s (or the school’s) rules, guidelines, and policies for online group work. These may be
    different than the ones for face-to-face group work. They may present new challenges (as well as
    opportunities to take advantage of technology). Once you have the opportunity, introduce your-
    self to your team. In an e-Learning environment, you should share things such as the times when
    you are available, how you would like to communicate (e-mail, bulletin boards, instant messag-
    ing, chat, and so on), what roles you would like to have in the team (leader, note-taker, or some-
    thing else), and your online contact information. The next step is to identify and assign group
    roles and tasks; use your project management skills to facilitate a virtual team and you will typi-
    cally be quite successful. A good step is also to have each group member commit to being pre-
    pared for each meeting.
  • Project execution for online groups – Once you have organized your online e-Learning group, it is
    time to perform your task(s). As you are doing this it is a good idea to maintain the role you have
    accepted and follow-up on tasks you commit to complete. You should also demonstrate and en-
    courage good online working relationships. This is even more important in an e-Learning envi-
    ronment where time and distance separate people. For example, review your e-mail messages
    before sending them to ensure that other group members won’t misinterpret your message or be
    offended. A great tip is to share online calendars so you know when you can get in touch with
    someone else in your group. Problems with the task always occur and it is important to know
    how and when you can assemble the group online. Keeping a backup copy of all your files is cru-
    cial. You don’t want to lose all your hard work when your partner’s flash drive decides to act up
    the day before the project is due. As a final point, be patient with your group members, don’t
    over-analyze online comments, and remember to use the communication strategies agreed upon.

Summary
  E-Learning is a whole new world for most of us. It is important therefore to think of it as an inno-
vative way of learning with new, and sometimes different, learning skills. If you approach e-Learning
with a systematic mindset you can be successful. The key is to begin by identifying the necessary


                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy        67
A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6




skills, and then to assess your current skill set. Second, know your weaknesses and work on updating
those skills. Lastly, to achieve ultimate success, study and adopt the tips from experienced e-Learners
and those who have been down the e-Learning journey several times. In the end, remember that not
all e-Learning courses are for everyone, so choose your online experiences carefully; match your
skills with the course technologies. Success in e-Learning can add value to your professional develop-
ment and, best of all, it can offer you a flexible and enjoyable learning experience.

References
Watkins, R. 2004a. Building Skills for e-Learning Success. Distance Learning 1, no. 6: 27-28.
Watkins, R. 2004b. e-Learning Study Skills and Strategies. Distance Learning 1, no. 3: 32-34.
Watkins, R. and Corry, M., 2007. e-Learning Companion: A Student’s Guide to Online Success, 2/E.
 Houghton Mifflin Company.




                                        The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy      68
Success Story




 Adobe Systems, Incorporated
 Adobe uses its software to engage its global workforce in eLearning, maximizing
 individual achievement and driving business results

 Adobe Systems, Incorporated            Lessons learned
 www.adobe.com                          When Adobe employees talk about eLearning, they speak from experience. At Adobe, learning—
                                        particularly eLearning—is central to each employee’s professional development, helping to synthesize
 Industry
                                        a global workforce into a single, powerful enterprise.
 Technology

 Challenges
                                        From the time new hires begin their jobs, they engage immediately with Adobe® eLearning.
• Improve employee access to timely     From setting up voice mail to understanding new product rollouts—at tiers spanning interns to
  learning                              executives—Adobe embeds organic, highly personalized learning experiences into its everyday
• Cost-e ectively accommodate           business processes worldwide.
  di erent learning styles
• Align learning with corporate goals
                                        “Providing our employees with easy access to information for learning is critical in our rapidly
                                         growing, global company,” says Donna Morris, senior vice president of human resources at Adobe.
 Solution                               “Whether in sales, engineering, accounting, or marketing, our employees are vital to the company’s
• eLearning                              continued success.” With 6,200 employees around the globe working in complex lines of business,
 Adobe uses its software and
                                         Adobe leverages its own so ware and technology to enable sta to frequently engage in formal
 technologies to integrate rich,
 dynamic eLearning into operations,      and informal learning.
 providing sta with easy access to
                                        “ e type of information that people need to learn continues to evolve as our business expands into
 valuable learning.
                                         new markets and opportunities,” says Morris. “When sta can hone skills and collaborate easily with
 Results                                 others, the bene ts are clear to each individual and the teams, as well as to the entire company.”
• Improved employee access to
  training                              Adobe takes a holistic approach to learning, going well beyond simple goals of employee retention
• Reduced corporate training costs      or developing basic skill sets. e company strives to create a meaningful connection between
• Integrated eLearning with existing    employee and employer. From this perspective, eLearning is a vehicle for Adobe to invest in its
  IT infrastructure and Learning        employees and its business, enhancing employee performance and bottom-line results.
  Management System
• Easily incorporated text, audio,      E cient on-boarding
  video, and interactive discussions    No matter the size or scope of an organization, orienting new employees is a cornerstone of any
  into eLearning
                                        business. At Adobe, a central issue surrounding orientation is scalability. at is, how to set out a
• Empowered sta with quality
  learning anytime, anywhere
                                        new employee roadmap while distilling content so new employees get up and running quickly
                                        without getting overwhelmed by details.
 Systems At A Glance
• Adobe Acrobat Connect                 Using Adobe Presenter, the rapid learning authoring tool inside Adobe Acrobat® Connect™
  Professional                          Professional so ware, as well as Adobe Captivate™, Flash®, and Acrobat Professional so ware, the
• Adobe Presenter                       company’s Human Resources (HR) team reduced new employee orientation time by a third. “We
• Adobe Enterprise Connect Server       were able to shorten the live session without jeopardizing the quality of content covered,” says
• Adobe Acrobat Professional            Chris Veilleux, learning and development program manager at Adobe.
• Adobe Captivate
                                        By matching the right Adobe tool to the right training task, information was simply repurposed
• Adobe Flash
• Adobe Reader®
                                        to speed learning. For example, the facilities team uses Adobe Acrobat Professional so ware to
• Adobe Flex™
To assist new hires at Adobe in
navigating their surroundings, the
facilities team uses Adobe Acrobat
Professional software to convert
building plans and other materials to
platform- and application-independent
Adobe PDF les. Rather than
distributing information in
cumbersome three-ring binders,
facilities information is available in
Adobe PDF online anytime, anyplace.




                                           convert building plans and other materials to platform- and application-independent Adobe
                                           Portable Document Format (PDF) les. Now, instead of having to distribute information in
                                           cumbersome three-ring binders, facilities information is available in Adobe PDF online
                                           anytime, anyplace for new hires trying to navigate their surroundings.

                                           Other time-saving, new-hire training strategies include using Adobe Presenter to create interactive
                                           online courses that outline employee stock purchase plans, explain bene ts packages, and even
                                           show a corporate overview movie created in Adobe Flash.

                                           “We’ve added thousands of employees over the past few years to support our growth,” explains
                                            Veilleux. “We need to know that training information can be created and updated rapidly as well as
                                            presented e ciently. It is essential to engage employees with easy-to-use modules that enable more
                                            just-in-time learning on the job, instead of a bunch of details o ered up during live orientations.”

                                           In addition to using Adobe so ware for new-hire training, eLearning has become an informal,
                                           everyday practice throughout the company. For example, the entire Learning Professional
                                           community at Adobe can use Adobe Contribute® so ware for blogging, so sta can “keep up-to-
                                           date on the latest industry information, talk freely about challenges, and readily share ideas about
                                           how Adobe tools can improve processes inside and outside our organization,” says Veilleux.


New-hire training strategies at Adobe
include using Adobe Presenter to create
interactive online courses that outline
employee stock purchase plans, explain
bene ts packages, and even show a
corporate overview movie created in
Adobe Flash. Training information can be
created and updated rapidly, presented
e ciently, and engage employees with
easy-to-use modules that enable more
just-in-time learning on the job.
Stronger sales training
                                             As manager of worldwide sales training, David Alper oversees eLearning for hundreds of direct
                                             sales representatives, the Adobe sales engineering community, and the inside sales organization.
                                             When Alper rst joined Adobe a few years ago, most training was done in face-to-face meetings
                                             with project managers and typically required a lot of time-consuming and expensive travel.

                                             “Now, most everything we do leverages Adobe technology,” says Alper. By identifying gaps, creating
                                              templates for consistency, and incorporating feedback into the training loop, there are sensible
                                              sales education tools for everyone to follow.

                                                e online blended learning modules in Acrobat Connect Professional cover everything from
                                             how to handle routine administrative processes to broader topics such as in-depth looks at the
                                             latest Adobe LiveCycle®, Acrobat, and Creative Suite releases, as well as vertical solutions that
                                             encompass multiple products. At the same time, the sales training team also makes extensive use
                                             of Adobe Presenter and Adobe Captivate to create hosted eLearning modules and curriculums.

To help meet the needs of Adobe’s sale
force, the company calls upon the
eLearning capabilities in Adobe Captivate.
All Acrobat Connect Professional training
sessions are converted to audio-only mp3
 les that representatives can download
for podcasting. The sound les are
deployed via an RSS feed on one of two
dedicated iTunes channels, one for sales
and one for technical sta .




                                             Previously, important product and service issues were typically communicated via non-interactive
                                             documentation, such as an e-mail that would trickle down the sales management pipeline to
                                             teams. Now, if a product change or new competitive information becomes available, Adobe can
                                             use Acrobat Connect Professional to engage hundreds of sales people in real-time web conferences.
                                             Equally important, the session can be recorded, so people who were unable to attend the live
                                             session can replay it on demand.

                                             While the Adobe sales organization hasn’t precisely measured the cost savings from its eLearning
                                             practices, the e ciencies are evident. For instance, since online learning can reduce the need to
                                             bring hundreds of sales representatives together for on-site meetings, the savings are signi cant.

                                             Plus, the resulting sales performance can boost the company’s revenues. “Providing e ective, on-time
                                             training could enable a rep to greatly increase the size of closed deals,” says Alper. “With hundreds of
                                             sales managers worldwide, the cumulative bene ts are substantial.”

                                             Additional e ciencies in eLearning are achieved thanks to the use of Adobe Flex to create a
                                             dynamic, engaging interface for launching eLearning services. Adds Alper, “We now have an
                                             intuitive front end to direct employees easily to training where and when they need it.”

                                             Transforming eLearning and engagement
                                             For Marc Eaman, an Adobe evangelist and member of the Technical Marketing Team, eLearning has
                                             provided several advantages. He has been doing product demonstrations at the company for eleven
                                             years. During most of that time, demonstrations were painstakingly created with written scripts that
                                             told sales managers what-to-say and where-to-click. Many sales and training sta felt there had to be
                                             a better way and responded with a resounding: “show us, don’t tell us.”
Adobe uses its software and
technologies, including Adobe Acrobat
Connect Professional, Adobe Presenter,
Acrobat Professional, Adobe Captivate,
Flash, and Flex to integrate rich, dynamic
eLearning into its operations and provide
sta with easy access to valuable learning.




“By leveraging Adobe                         Using capabilities in Adobe Captivate and Acrobat Connect Professional so ware, the Adobe
 tools and making                            demonstrations have been transformed from scripts to interactive guides. e new model is an
                                             on-demand Acrobat Connect Professional session that includes some slides to help position the
 learning relevant and
                                             solution, followed by a screen recording captured in Adobe Captivate of the actual demonstra-
 better connected
                                             tion highlighted. A document is also included—via the Connect Attachment feature—to provide
 to work ow, Adobe                             eld representatives with more detail if necessary.
 employees experience
                                             Currently, more than 150 courses are available to the eld. At the same time, the training group is
 the same bene ts that
                                             using another innovative technique—branded InField discussion forums—that targets technical
 our customers enjoy—
                                             personnel and sales representatives through online forums. “Forums are popular for two reasons,”
 eLearning environments,                     explains Eaman. “First, if one sales representative has a question, chances are ten others do as well.
 tools, and resources                        Second, product experts do not like having to answer the same question repeatedly.”
 that engage people and
                                             Forum question and answer sessions are always available and searchable, enabling users to nd
 keep them coming back
                                             relevant topics and resolutions quickly. e system also allows the uploading of les to facilitate the
 again and again.”                           exchange of samples and requested documents. Product experts are assigned as forum moderators
Ellen Wagner,                                to respond to questions generated by the system. Notably, RSS feeds are incorporated into forums
Director of eLearning,
Adobe Systems, Incorporated
                                             so moderators can simply subscribe to topics.

                                             With the help of eLearning capabilities in Adobe Captivate, the company can meet the needs of its
                                             occasionally connected sales force. “We convert all our Acrobat Connect Professional training
                                             sessions to audio-only .mp3 les that representatives can download for podcasting,” says Eaman.
                                               e sound les are deployed via an RSS feed on one of two dedicated iTunes channels, one for sales
                                             and one for technical sta .

For More Information                         Integrated learning management
www.adobe.com/products/acrobatconnectpro/    Anne Storer, director of learning and development at Adobe, uses Adobe solutions for eLearning
                                             e orts aimed at helping managers handle infrequently applied tasks, meet compliance requirements,
                                             provide technical training, and deploy leadership development materials. Regardless of the Adobe
                                             solutions used, the goal is to impart knowledge in engaging modules that quickly and clearly
                                             convey desired learning.

                                             “Newer approaches to learning are intimately connected to technology,” says Ellen Wagner,
                                              director of eLearning at Adobe. “By leveraging Adobe tools and making learning relevant and
                                              better connected to work ow, Adobe employees experience the same bene ts that our customers
                                              enjoy—eLearning environments, tools, and resources that engage people and keep them coming
                                              back again and again.”




Adobe Systems Incorporated                   Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Captivate, Contribute, Flash, Flex, LiveCycle, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks
345 Park Avenue                              of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
San Jose, CA 95110-2704
USA                                          © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
www.adobe.com                                95009461 05/07 A
The eLearning Guild
   375 E Street, Suite 200
   Santa Rosa, CA 95404
   +1.707.566.8990
www.eLearningGuild.com

More Related Content

DOCX
3 Technologies Essay
DOC
Request For Proposal For Learning Management Systems
DOC
Training Industry Gains Momentum
PDF
Lms Selection Templates Documents
PDF
Tna Questionnaire
PPTX
2013 NV Energy Presentation
PDF
Handbook of e Learning Strategy
PDF
Enriched Learning Projects Illustrated James A Bellanca
3 Technologies Essay
Request For Proposal For Learning Management Systems
Training Industry Gains Momentum
Lms Selection Templates Documents
Tna Questionnaire
2013 NV Energy Presentation
Handbook of e Learning Strategy
Enriched Learning Projects Illustrated James A Bellanca

Similar to The E Learning Guild’S Handbook Of E Learning Strategy (20)

DOCX
21st centu.docx
PDF
Four Stages Of E Learning
PDF
Selling Visually with PowerPoint
PDF
Final RWU Career Guide
PDF
Strategic Enrolment Intelligence book
PDF
Passport workbook 2009 10 web version
PDF
Ebook costsavingtips
PDF
Cl manual
PDF
162tipsandtricksforworkingwithe learningtools-111207024037-phpapp02
PDF
The Microsoft platform for education analytics (mpea)
PDF
Social media-for-higher-education
PDF
The e learning-guilds-handbook-on-synchronous-e-learning
PDF
Agile And Lean Program Management Scaling Collaboration Across The Organizati...
PDF
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.4)
PDF
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.5)
PDF
life-skills-and-leadership-manual.pdf
PDF
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.6)
PDF
e Learning-data-of-learning need analysis
PDF
25Quick Formative Assessments
PDF
Getting started with blended learning guide
21st centu.docx
Four Stages Of E Learning
Selling Visually with PowerPoint
Final RWU Career Guide
Strategic Enrolment Intelligence book
Passport workbook 2009 10 web version
Ebook costsavingtips
Cl manual
162tipsandtricksforworkingwithe learningtools-111207024037-phpapp02
The Microsoft platform for education analytics (mpea)
Social media-for-higher-education
The e learning-guilds-handbook-on-synchronous-e-learning
Agile And Lean Program Management Scaling Collaboration Across The Organizati...
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.4)
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.5)
life-skills-and-leadership-manual.pdf
lernOS for You Guide (Version 1.6)
e Learning-data-of-learning need analysis
25Quick Formative Assessments
Getting started with blended learning guide
Ad

More from Hidayathulla NS (14)

PDF
Scorm » One Minute Scorm Ov...
XLS
Rating Report
DOC
Psychometric Testing
PDF
Lms Selection Templates
PDF
Learning Management Systems (Lms) A Review
PDF
Intrepid Selectinglms 414
PDF
Improving Corporate Training Results With Discovery Learning Methodology
DOC
Ict Skills Matrix General
PDF
Factsheet Nasscom Assessment Of Competence
PDF
E Learning Best Practices
PDF
E Learning Course Design
PDF
Eia D Chart
PDF
Creating Effective And Selective E Learning Rf Ps
PDF
293 Tips For Producing And Managing Flash Based E Learning Content
Scorm » One Minute Scorm Ov...
Rating Report
Psychometric Testing
Lms Selection Templates
Learning Management Systems (Lms) A Review
Intrepid Selectinglms 414
Improving Corporate Training Results With Discovery Learning Methodology
Ict Skills Matrix General
Factsheet Nasscom Assessment Of Competence
E Learning Best Practices
E Learning Course Design
Eia D Chart
Creating Effective And Selective E Learning Rf Ps
293 Tips For Producing And Managing Flash Based E Learning Content
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
BÀI TẬP BỔ TRỢ 4 KỸ NĂNG TIẾNG ANH 9 GLOBAL SUCCESS - CẢ NĂM - BÁM SÁT FORM Đ...
PDF
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
PPTX
master seminar digital applications in india
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PDF
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
PDF
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PPTX
Lesson notes of climatology university.
PDF
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
PDF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PPTX
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PPTX
BOWEL ELIMINATION FACTORS AFFECTING AND TYPES
PDF
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
PDF
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
PPTX
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
PPTX
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
PDF
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
PDF
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
PPTX
PPH.pptx obstetrics and gynecology in nursing
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
BÀI TẬP BỔ TRỢ 4 KỸ NĂNG TIẾNG ANH 9 GLOBAL SUCCESS - CẢ NĂM - BÁM SÁT FORM Đ...
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
master seminar digital applications in india
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Lesson notes of climatology university.
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
BOWEL ELIMINATION FACTORS AFFECTING AND TYPES
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
PPH.pptx obstetrics and gynecology in nursing
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program

The E Learning Guild’S Handbook Of E Learning Strategy

  • 1. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy Foreword by Marc Rosenberg Chapters by Kevin Moore, Frank Hanfland, Patti Shank, Lisa Young, Lance Dublin, Ryan Watkins, Michael Corry Bill Brandon, Editor Sponsored by
  • 2. Compilation Copyright ©2007 by The eLearning Guild Published by The eLearning Guild 375 E Street, Suite 200 Santa Rosa, CA 95404 www.elearningguild.com Individual chapters and the Foreword are Copyright ©2007 by their respective authors. You may download, display, print, and reproduce this material in unaltered form only (retaining this notice) for your personal, non-commercial use or use within your organization. All other rights are reserved. This is a FREE Digital e-Book. No one is authorized to charge a fee for it or to use it to collect data. Attribution notice for information from this publication must be given, must credit the individual author in any citation, and should take the following form: The eLearning Guild's Handbook of e-Learning Strategy. Readers should be aware that Internet Web sites offered as citations or sources for further information may have disappeared or been changed between the date this book was written and the date it is read. Other FREE Digital e-Books by The eLearning Guild include: The eLearning Guild's Handbook on Synchronous e-Learning 834 Tips for Successful Online Instruction 328 Tips on the SELECTION of an LMS or LCMS 339 Tips on the IMPLEMENTATION of an LMS or LCMS 311 Tips on the MANAGEMENT of an LMS or LCMS Publisher: David Holcombe Editorial Director: Heidi Fisk Editor: Bill Brandon Copy Editors: Chuck and Jane Holcombe Design Director: Nancy Marland Wolinski The eLearning Guild™Advisory Board Ruth Clark, Lance Dublin, Conrad Gottfredson, Bill Horton, Bob Mosher, Eric Parks, Brenda Pfaus, Marc Rosenberg, Allison Rossett
  • 3. Table of Contents Strategy Matters: Foreword to The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii About the Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Sponsored Content: Adobe e-Learning Solution for rapid training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi Chapter 1: Keeping the e-Learning Strategy Focused Learning strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Process for developing the e-Learning strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Doomed to failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Keeping focused on the strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sponsored Content: Adobe Captivate 3 and Adobe Captivate CS3: Create high-impact informal learning content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Chapter 2: Strategies for Transition to e-Learning E-Learning deployment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Design and selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Go-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Sponsored Content: Adobe Solutions for the Virtual Classroom: Opening the campus, extending the reach of the classroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Chapter 3: Design Strategies for Online and Blended Learning Strategy decision #1: Instruction or information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Strategy decision #2: Classroom, online, or real life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Strategy decision #3: Synchronous or asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Strategy decision #4: Traditional or rapid instructional design . . . . . . . . . .30 Sponsored content: Success Story: Texas Engineering Extension Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy i
  • 4. TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S Chapter 4: Marketing and Change Management for e-Learning: Strategies for Engaging Learners, Motivating Managers, and Energizing Organizations Getting the “Soft Stuff” right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Consumer Marketing: People want to buy, not be sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Change Implementation: Awareness, engagement, and commitment . . . 48 Sponsored content: Success Story: Grundfos Management A/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Chapter 5: Top-Level Elements for a Successful E-Learning Strategy The five elements of a successful strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sponsored content: Success Story: Web Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Chapter 6: Strategy for the Learner: A Student’s Guide to e-Learning Success Plan for success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Update your study skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Tips for success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sponsored content: Success Story: Adobe Systems, Incorporated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy ii
  • 5. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 FOREWORD Strategy Matters By Marc J. Rosenberg O ver the years, when we’ve thought about “e-Learning strategy,” the focus was too often on the “e-Learning” part and less on the “strategy” part. We bought tons of technology without con- sidering how or if the organization could use it. We built or bought online courseware without a firm understanding of the needs it might serve or the specific benefits it would bring. We focused on our tools before we focused on our clients. And we wondered why we had so much trouble getting the organization to embrace what we were doing. Now we are beginning to put things in the right balance. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy resets our compass, giving e-Learning practice and e-Learning strategy equal weight, as it should be. There’s plenty in this book for a good grounding in e-Learning strategy. But what about strategy in general? What should you consider as you read each chapter? What constitutes strategic thinking and strategic action? For me, it’s about three things: differentiating strategy from tactics, developing a long-term view, and defining success. Differentiating strategy from tactics “Strategy without tactics is the slowest route to victory. Tactics without strategy is the noise before defeat.” Sun Tzu, The Art of War “Implement e-Learning in the business” is a noble and appropriate strategy, but how do we get there? “Getting there” requires tactics and operational objectives that tell us what to do and when to do it. Without the right tactics, we face obstacles we should have anticipated and problems we could have avoided. Without solid tactics, our progress will surely be marred with detours and wasted time. One year goals turn to three, and we miss opportunities and deplete goodwill. Likewise, and too often, we have tactics without strategy, and we end up with lots of activity with little value to speak of. We have great infrastructure and lots of product, but little following. At the end of the day, we can’t explain, in strategic business language, why we did what we did. Without the support a solid strategy would have provided, our efforts are seen as unsustainable and non-contrib- utory. We expend years of work, and again miss opportunities and deplete goodwill. Only a sound, endorsed strategy, and a solid tactical plan, will result in the kind of e-Learning suc- cess we want. The strategy tells us why we need to deploy e-Learning and what the benefits will be, and the tactics, linked to that strategy, tell us how we will get there. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy iii
  • 6. S T R AT E G Y M AT T E R S | F O R E W O R D Developing a long-term view “Perception is strong and sight is weak. In strategy, it is important to see distant things as if they were close and to take a distance view of close things.” Miyamoto Musashi, Famous Japanese Samurai Strategy requires a long-term view. It represents a desired state and is almost never accomplished in a year or even two. Our compulsion with quarterly results and annual budgets are rarely compati- ble with our strategic intent. We might be able to install an LMS and deploy courseware relatively quickly, but how long before it bears fruit? How long before employees not just try it out but actually prefer it? How long before we truly embrace this fundamental shift in how we learn? We need to find ways to think of e-Learning strategy as a new venture, an initiative that could take years to fulfill, but as long as there is progress, we can sustain the journey. We need to keep the end – business value – in mind and not be too distracted by the constant change in technology or method- ology. It may be fun and even worthwhile to keep up with the latest innovations, but doing so cannot be our reason for being. If we become too focused with the here and now, we may lose our way from the strategic path we have set for ourselves. Defining success “However beautiful the strategy, you should occasionally look at the results.” Winston Churchill A solid e-Learning strategy is essential, but, ultimately, we have to deliver. Strategy and results are inseparable. Strategy points the way and results define the destination. Results are owned by those who set the strategy and who will most likely pay for and benefit from it. This speaks to an essential element of the strategic process – partnering with the client. The client, be it a customer, a business unit president, or the CEO, owns the strategy with us and, with our help, defines the success criteria. So we come full circle. We develop a long-term strategy that defines what we want to accomplish down the road. We develop a tactical implementation plan to get there, and we define what success is so that we know when we have arrived. We are both persistent and patient. Strategy is for everyone The underlying message is clear: strategy permeates all aspects of e-Learning planning, implemen- tation, evaluation and satisfaction. This matters to everyone in the organization. It is as necessary in determining how to build the best online course as it is in directing the overall organizational initia- tive. Each chapter in this e-Book applies strategy to e-Learning from a different point-of-view: Kevin Moore talks about the importance of a strategic perspective. This is critical for maintaining an effective relationship between the e-Learning function and the organization it serves. When he suggests that “the e-Learning strategy lives through the learning strategy, which in turn is deeply embedded in the organizational strategy,” he is clearly and rightly challenging us to be sure that what we do is in line with where the organization is going. Frank Hanfland focuses on technology strategy, clearly an important component of successful e-Learning. While we don’t want to rely solely on our technology to get us to our goals, and we sure- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy iv
  • 7. S T R AT E G Y M AT T E R S | F O R E W O R D ly don’t want to be driven by it, we certainly can’t get there without it. Hanfland uses the implemen- tation of a learning management system (LMS) as a case study of what to consider. His approach combines technical as well as change management considerations, for as we all know, technology means nothing if the organization refuses to use it. Lance Dublin picks up on Hanfland’s concern about change management in his chapter, which is devoted entirely to this important subject. Dublin urges us not to forget that we have to help people come to understand and ultimately prefer this new way to learn, because if our audience rejects what we’re doing, even the best programs are doomed. Noting that “this soft stuff is the hard stuff,” Dublin tells us that whatever the merits of our technology and our design, success is much more likely when you have an effective change management strategy in place. Patti Shank and Lisa Young, in their respective chapters, take strategic thinking down to decisions about how to build quality e-Learning and how to make the best use of e-Learning tools. Despite instructional designers’ and product developers’ naturally creative and production-oriented mind- sets, even they can be strategic players. Both Shank and Young admonish us not to rush into any spe- cific design strategy or tool selection decision just because it has worked before. They caution that while design, authoring, and delivery technologies are getting easier and better, it is no panacea and no substitute for solid judgment about the learning challenge at hand. Finally, Michael Corry and Ryan Watkins recognize that learners themselves must develop their own strategies for being successful e-learners. Too often we get so wrapped up in designing and delivering e-Learning that we forget about the learners and what they need. Whether it’s helping enthusiastic learners improve their comfort level with new technology, or helping reluctant learners buy into e-Learning as a preferred way to learn, we cannot see our strategy as complete without put- ting ourselves in their shoes. We often think that strategy must be at the enterprise level and that we must always focus on monumental change. Granted, major organizational transformation or business success sounds more strategic, and we clearly must keep the big picture in mind, but strategic thinking – and action – is not limited to the higher-ups. Managers, developers, and others in the e-Learning organization, who have very specific responsibilities, can be strategic thinkers – and doers – if they develop appro- priate goals that are separate from their tactics, take a long term view, and clearly define their success criteria. The time has come to re-focus on e-Learning strategy, not at the expense of e-Learning technology or e-Learning methodology, but as a way to insure that our technology and methodology invest- ments pay off. We cannot simply do our own thing, as exciting as it might be, without carefully con- sidering the big picture and how we contribute to it. Everything we do – every decision we make – has strategic implications. In this important book, The eLearning Guild begins the conversation on just what those implications are, and how, with a solid strategy behind us, we can take control and achieve our e-Learning goals. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy v
  • 8. Our Research Is your Leading Immersive Learning Simulations Learning Management Systems Synchronous Learning Systems Mobile Learning Measuring e-Learning Success Intensive Research-based Management Symposiums at San Jose, CA | November 5-8, 2007 www.DevLearn2007.com | +1.707.566.8990
  • 9. INTRODUCTION The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy By Bill Brandon, Editor T here is a subtle difference between strategy and tactics. Tactics, the everyday concern of practi- tioners, answers the question, “How?” How do you put a lesson together? How do you write test questions? How do you use a given software appliction to achieve a desired result? Most of the time, books and articles written for the e-Learning practitioner focus on this getting-the-job-done side of things. Strategy, on the other hand, steps back from the day-to-day. It takes a higher-level view to answer the question, “What?” What should we be doing in order to support the organization's goals for improved performance? What design for learning best matches our situation and our learners? What software capabilities do we need to best leverage technology in solving our enduring business challenges? Who should read this book? Since we began operation in 2002, The eLearning Guild has attempted to balance its delivery of information, services, The eLearning Guild's Handbook on e-Learning Strategy is intended for and resources to facilitate both strategy and tactics. This has those who lead their organization's learning initiatives. You may be senior executives who are outside the traditional Human Resources/Chief Learning been true of all the articles we have published in Learning Officer/Training context. You may also be a “one person shop” who has to Solutions e-Magazine and its predecessor, The e-Learning do it all when it comes to producing, leading, and promoting learning. Developers' Journal. It has been true of the topics and speak- Note that this book is written from the larger frame of learning strategy – not just e-Learning. An organization's leadership can profit from reading ers at our conferences and online events, in our research pub- Chapters 1, 2, 4, and 6 even if the organization has no current e-Learning lications, and now in our e-Books. initiatives in place. If you are new to learning and e-Learning, you should read the entire This e-Book began, as all of them do, with a realization of book. Much of the insight here comes from experts who have already experi- a need in the e-Learning community, and a conversation enced (at first hand or through watching others) the pain of learning initia- between The Guild leadership, the editor, and the Advisory tives that were not grounded in a higher level strategy. You can learn from their experience without having to repeat any mistakes. Board. What we saw was a need to better articulate a learning If you are an experienced manager or e-Learning practitioner, you can also strategy in many organizations. Not just an e-Learning strate- benefit from reading this book. A great many best practices are presented here. You will be able to apply them to your curent processes and products gy, but a broader, more fundamental connection between in order to benefit from stronger strategic ties to your organization's out- learning and organizational mission, business objectives, and comes. the proverbial “bottom line.” The intent and design of this book are based on three aims. This FREE Digital e-Book would not have been possible were it not for a generous contribution to its development from Adobe. If First, we wanted the book to be more about making a plan you're not familiar with Adobe products for e-Learning and multi- for doing the right things, not so much about doing things media development, or if you haven't checked them out lately, we encourage you to take a look at your earliest convenience! right. The Guild has never taken a position that dictates, http://www.adobe.com/ resources/elearning “This is the right way to ‘do’ e-Learning, and any other way is wrong.” We are not taking such a position now. You will The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy vi
  • 10. INTRODUCTION notice as you read the chapters that the authors have different views on certain matters, yet they are in fundamental agreement about the vital need to figure out and document your strategy before you begin to worry about which authoring tool to use or how your templates should look. Second, we wanted the book to have a certain “flow” to it, from high-level thinking about out- comes and processes, then transitioning to intermediate strategies having to do with people, project management, and technology. At the end, it was to be an easy step from deciding on the right things to do, back to the tactical world of procedure and day-to-day operations. While the cynical will say that no learning strategy ever survives the pilot program, successful e-Learning practitioners appreci- ate the wisdom of the Japanese proverb: Vision without action is a daydream, but action without vision is a nightmare. Finally, we wanted a book that would offer planning methods without imposing checklists. A checklist developed by an individual practitioner, taking into account particular circumstances for a particular organization and its mission, values, and desired outcomes, is a good thing. But a generic checklist based on theory and hypothetical circumstances is a recipe for disaster. How to use this book The best way to approach this book is to read the first five chapters in order, and to develop your documented learning strategy as you go. You will revise your strategy several times along the way, but with each iteration you will be closer to a solid document. The first two chapters are intended to help you develop your organization's own documented (e-)learning strategy. As Kevin Moore notes in Chapter 1, it is the absence of the connection between e-Learning initiatives and business results that account for the difficulty e-Learning initiatives – and learning initiatives in general – have in getting and keeping support and funding. Once you can demonstrate such a connection, your “seat at the table” is assured. The next three chapters will help you bridge the gap from the highest strategic levels to your day- to-day efforts. If you try to follow the advice in these later chapters without having gone through the exercises in the first two, be warned – your efforts are in danger of failing. The guidelines in chapters 3, 4, and 5 are not ad hoc, generic advice. Strategy implementation must connect, through the larger strategic (e-)learning plan, to the organization's valued outcomes. Chapter 6 is intended as a model for a document that you might want to provide to learners in your organization. It deals with personal strategy for getting the most benefit from e-Learning as a user. It seems to me that the authors of these chapters have done an outstanding job in meeting all of these criteria. It is our hope that you will find their advice useful and that you will realize great suc- cess in creating your own e-Learning strategy. Acknowledgments As the editor, I would like to thank all of the authors for their contributions. Through your efforts, you have enabled The eLearning Guild to produce a valuable resource in a matter of weeks. I hope that your work will be rewarded with the attention and praise that it deserves. I would also like to thank Ellen Wagner for bringing this book to the attention of the management at Adobe, and for championing Adobe’s sponsorship. Without your proactive support, this book would not have happened. Special thanks to the copy editors, Chuck and Jane Holcombe, who managed my impossible deadlines and near-impenetrable instructions. You gave the readers clean, error-free copy to read, no small feat. Thanks to my wife, daughters, and grandchildren for allowing me the time to bring this project to conclusion. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy vii
  • 11. About the Authors Michael Corry Michael Corry, Ph.D. is an Associate Professor and Director of the Educational Technology Leadership program at The George Washington University. Dr. Corry is intimately involved with course design and delivery as well as management of this pioneering program delivered via distance education at GWU. Dr. Corry's research interests include distance learning theory, practice, and poli- cy, faculty development using technology, e-Learning, the integration of technology into K-12 and higher education settings, instructional design, and human-computer interaction. He has been a principal investigator on two U.S. Department of Education grants involving "Preparing Tomorrow's Teachers to Use Technology." He has numerous publications and presentations involving his research interests including two books — E-Learning Companion: A Student's Guide to Online Success, 1st and 2nd editions published by Houghton Mifflin and Distance Education: What Works Well published by Haworth Press. He has also designed and delivered workshops involving technology and e-Learning. Dr. Corry holds a Ph.D. from Indiana University in Instructional Systems Technology. Before coming to GWU he taught at Indiana University, at a high school in Utah, and was an Information Systems Consultant for Andersen Consulting/Accenture. Contact him at mcorry@gwu.edu. Lance Dublin Lance Dublin is an independent management consultant, international speaker, and author based in San Francisco, California and serving clients world-wide. He specializes in strategy develop- ment, program design, and implementation for corporate learning programs and organizational change management. Lance is a regular speaker and keynote presenter at regional, national and international conferences. In addition, he is the author of numerous published articles, co-author of the capstone book in ASTD’s e-Learning series, Implementing e-Learning, and a contributor to ASTD’s Handbook of Training Design and Delivery, Elliot Masie’s Learning Rants, Raves and Reflections, and Marc Rosenberg’s Beyond e-Learning. For more information, see http://www. dublinconsulting.net. Frank Hanfland Frank Hanfland is a senior instructional design and e-Learning consultant and has spent the past ten years on the forefront of multimedia and e-Learning development. His experience reaches back to application programming in BASIC, developing in Authorware 3 and Flash since version 3, and many other platforms to provide integrated solutions to a wide variety of industries, ranging from telecom, banking, and insurance, to hazardous waste companies. In addition to his technical expertise, Frank has a solid background in instructional design and is an advocate of using the most modern methodologies to solve an organization's human performance improvement and support requirements. Contact Frank by e-mail to frank@hanfland.us. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy viii
  • 12. ABOUT THE AUTHORS Kevin C. Moore Kevin C. Moore, Ed.D., is Founding Partner, and Chief Learning Officer for Tier 1 Performance Solutions, LLC. Dr. Moore is a Performance Improvement and Instructional Design consultant. He has over sixteen years of experience designing and modifying instruction for adult learners. Kevin's experience includes needs assessments that address business needs and training requirements, physi- cal and mental workload assessments, technology analysis, designing of performance management systems, technical and "soft" skills training design, and summative and formative evaluations of per- formance improvement programs. In addition, Kevin has experience with the selection of appropri- ate training strategies and materials to address learner characteristics, course objectives, and sequenc- ing of courses to fit curriculum and performance needs. For the past 11 years Dr. Moore’s research and work area has focused on knowledge and learning throughout organizations. Specific topic areas include: the interactions between knowledge flows, content taxonomies, business and opera- tional goals, and technology. Kevin is a frequent keynote presenter at national conferences and is published in academic and trade journals. He holds a B.A. in Business/Organizational Communi- cation, University of North Carolina at Wilmington, M.S. in Instructional Design and Technology, University of Kentucky, and a Doctorate in Education and Instructional Design Technology from the University of Kentucky. Contact Kevin by e-mail to k.moore@tier1performance.com. Marc J. Rosenberg Marc J. Rosenberg, Ph.D. is a management consultant in training, organizational learning, e-Learning, knowledge management and performance improvement. He is the author of the best- selling books, e-Learning: Strategies for Delivering Knowledge in the Digital Age and, Beyond e-Learning: Approaches and Technologies to Enhance Organizational Knowledge, Learning and Performance (Pfeiffer). Marc is a past president of the International Society for Performance Improvement (ISPI). He holds a Ph.D. in instructional design, plus degrees in communications and marketing. Dr. Rosenberg is a recognized thought leader in the field. He has spoken at The White House, keynoted numerous professional and business conferences, authored more than 40 articles and book chapters in the field, and is a frequently quoted expert in major business and trade publi- cations. More information is available at www.marcrosenberg.com. Patti Shank Patti Shank, Ph.D., CPT, is a widely recognized instructional designer whose company helps oth- ers design and build good online and blended courses and performance support. She is the co- author of Making Sense of Online Learning and the editor of The Online Learning Idea Book. You can reach her through her Website: www.learningpeaks.com. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy ix
  • 13. ABOUT THE AUTHORS Ryan Watkins Ryan Watkins, Ph.D. is an associate professor at The George Washington University in Washington, D.C. He is an author of Performance By Design: The Systematic Selection, Design, and Development of Performance Technologies, 5 e-Learning Activities: Making Online Courses Interactive, and E-Learning Companion: A Student’s Guide to Online Success. In addition, he has co-authored two books on educational planning and more than 60 articles on instructional design, strategic planning, needs assessment, distance education, and performance technology. Dr. Watkins is an active member of the International Society for Performance Improvement (ISPI) and was a vice president of the Inter-American Distance Education Consortium (CREAD). In 2005 Ryan was a visiting scientist with the National Science Foundation. For more information please visit http://www.ryanrwatkins. com or http://www.how2elearn.com. Lisa Young Lisa Young is the Director of Measurement and e-Learning at HORN, a performance consulting firm, where she is responsible for the design and development of complex, highly customized learn- ing programs which include multi-level assessment to illustrate ROI. She has extensive experience analyzing potential e-Learning and blended learning opportunities based on organizational infra- structure, environment, and content, to ensure that the training methodology utilized best suits the proposed training objectives. She is a published author, and has presented at numerous conferences in the fields of adult education, online learning, e-Learning management, wearable technology, com- munities of practice, and telementoring. Lisa is currently completing her Ph.D. in Education at OISE/University of Toronto. Contact Lisa by e-mail at lyoung@horn.com. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy x
  • 14. Solution Brief Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training Rapidly create, manage, deploy, and track the e ectiveness of highly engaging online training that virtually anyone can access instantly Organizations today face tremendous nancial, logistical, and other challenges when training employees, channel partners, and customers: scarce training resources; complex eLearning solutions that make it di cult for all but technically minded training professionals to develop eLearning courses and curricula; costly custom eLearning solutions that require long development times; potential incompatibilities with existing user and learning management systems; and, of course, bland, lifeless training sessions that fail to produce results because they fail to engage learners. Cost-e ectively transfer maximum knowledge in minimum time With the Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training, you can overcome these challenges cost- With this solution, you can: e ectively and productively while increasing your ROI through faster training and better results. • Rapidly develop, update, and deliver is solution has what training professionals need to address a wide range of training needs— engaging self-paced training development of standards-compliant content, on-demand or virtual classroom deployment, and • Administer formal assessments and surveys, and measure the reliable formal assessments and reporting—at a fraction of the time and cost of traditional e ectiveness of on-demand eLearning systems. It also provides comprehensive curriculum and content management capabilities presentations and integrates with common learning management and user management systems to help • Measure the e ectiveness of course reduce application management costs. content and analyze training results • Increase the e ectiveness of Use one solution for all your training needs instructors, and easily conduct Avoid the hassle of dealing with multiple solution o erings. With the Adobe eLearning solution virtual classes for rapid training, you can build a streamlined, fully integrated training solution that includes • Customize the look and feel of eLearning experiences Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Professional so ware for virtual classroom sessions; Adobe Presenter • Manage virtually all facets of for easy Microso PowerPoint authoring of self-paced training courses and on-demand multimedia employee, partner, and customer presentations; Adobe Connect Training for creating and managing eLearning courses and training curricula; and Adobe Connect Events for managing and tracking users of large online courses. • Enhance your existing corporate user and learning management systems Rapidly deliver engaging, self-paced training With this solution, nontechnical subject matter experts can leverage their Microso PowerPoint skills to create engaging multimedia experiences. Using their desktop computers and a microphone, trainers can easily add voice-over narration to their content from within PowerPoint. Built-in audio editing tools make it easy to isolate and cut out embarrassing pauses or slurred speech. And integrating rich media such as talking head videos, animations, or simulations is as easy as selecting a command from the Insert menu. Finished courses can be published at the click of a button—courses are automatically converted to the Adobe Flash® format and delivered live or on demand using Adobe Flash Player, which already is installed on more than 97% of Internet- connected desktops worldwide, so learners can access them instantly without cumbersome so ware downloads, virtually anytime and anywhere.
  • 15. Administer formal assessments and gauge the e ectiveness of courses With the Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training, trainers don’t need an IT department or database administrator to help them assess learners’ skills and progress or analyze the e ective- ness of their courses. Trainers can integrate quizzes with course content using a range of question types—including short answer, ll-in-the-blank, true/false, matching, and Likert rating scale—add pass/fail criteria, and use question branching and custom audio-visual feedback to guide learners in their progress. Likewise, they can gauge the e ectiveness of their content using a simple, web-based interface to generate custom reports that provide slide- and question-level feedback and help pinpoint content that may have to be revised to ensure trainees get the information they need. Provide instant access to online meetings and virtual classes Trainers can also use this solution to set up virtual classrooms and conduct cost-e ective collaborative training sessions in real time with geographically dispersed instructors and learners, complete with multimedia presentations, so ware simulations, application sharing, and participant polling. Classroom sessions can be easily recorded for later on-demand viewing and shared through an instructor’s dedicated, personal meeting room that can be accessed instantly at any time by anyone using Adobe Flash Player, giving learners the opportunity to review content a er the live event is over. And in the case of recurring classes, trainers can considerably reduce preparation time using customizable layouts, which they can save for future sessions, complete with all required content. Because the system supports permissions-based access to course content and meeting room layouts, multiple presenters can share meeting room templates as well as course content and assets, using a fully searchable, centralized content library, which makes it easy to nd, retrieve, reuse, and update existing training content. Customize and manage all facets of online training A cost-e ective training solution enables professional trainers to manage virtually all aspects of employee, partner, and customer training. With the Adobe eLearning solution, trainers can schedule courses, enroll learners, grant viewing permissions, automate enrollment notices and reminders, and track learner statistics. Trainers can also develop curriculums that drive results by combining live classes, multiple self-paced training courses, and other training content. In addition, they can easily de ne course prerequisites, specify optional and required modules, and establish progressive learning paths for self-paced training, live instructor-led training, and external events such as manager assessments. And, they can customize the look and feel of self- paced courses and virtual classrooms using company logos and colors, in accordance with the company brand guidelines. Leverage your existing infrastructure e Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training integrates smoothly with common corporate For more information user management and learning management systems. It supports Active Directory and LDAP for For more information on the Adobe user authentication, and all rapid training content produced with this solution is SCORM 1.2, eLearning solution for rapid training, SCORM 2004, and AICC compliant, making it easy for trainers and administrators to deliver go to www.adobe.com/products/connect/ and track courses through their existing corporate learning management systems. solutions/rapid_training. Produce measurable results with an a ordable end-to-end training solution e Adobe eLearning solution for rapid training is a cost-e ective end-to-end training solution that can help you solve your most challenging training issues. It enables training professionals with PowerPoint skills to develop progressive training curriculums and create and deploy standards- compliant, rich training modules that will engage minds and get your employees, partners, and Better by Adobe. ™ customers on message and up to speed in no time. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Connect, Flash, and “Better by Adobe” are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Adobe Systems Incorporated Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Any reference to Global 345 Park Avenue Electronics and its logo is for demonstration purposes only and is not intended to refer to any actual organization. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2006 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95007254 9/06
  • 16. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 CHAPTER 1 Keeping the e-Learning Strategy Focused By Kevin Moore O rganizations are in a battle to meet ever-changing market needs, client and customer demands, and internal and external pressures. This requires a clear, concise, and documented strategy for improvement of employee performance. Managing and improving the performance of employ- ees and supporting staff is a journey rather than a destination, and, as such, requires careful thought, allocation of resources, and executive support. Performance improvement should be a part of the organizational goals. The learning strategy doc- ument should describe the system for learning and performance across the organization (Moore 2006). This change toward the acquisition and management of learning and performance using sophisticated technology presents a tremendous challenge in today’s business, education, and gov- ernment environments. It represents a necessary paradigm shift to adequately prepare our people for their future in the work environment, while preserving and leveraging the past through knowledge management. Simply put, while we have the ability to move information and data faster, we won’t achieve true success until we can accurately target and disseminate information to the correct audience, at the right time, and in the right amount and format for performance improvement (Moore, 2007). The learning and performance system is about the flow of knowledge and information within and between organizations, business units, and individuals (Parkin, 2006). The learning strategy document should deal specifically with the management of this system, and it should raise the organizational, departmental, and individual concerns on efficiency and effectiveness of people and processes. A learning and performance system operates at a higher level, involving culture, beliefs, and val- ues. Although this system will have a financial impact, it represents a higher level of understanding of the knowledge processes that lead to performance improvement at the job level. Fundamentally this Contents learning and performance system is about making better decisions at every level of the organization, and increasing the organizational intelligence to proactively meet market In Chapter 1 you will find information about: demands. • Learning strategy Critical to the success of this system, of which the e-Learning strategy is • Process for developing the e-Learning strategy one component, are solid links to business process, organizational culture, • Doomed to failure and continuous meaningful measurement. The learning and performance • Keeping focused on the strategy system is depicted in Figure 1-1 on page 2 … this describes our world! The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 1
  • 17. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 Learning strategy A learning strategy describes the input, output, and measures of the system, and should have organizational, departmental, business unit, and individual references. This should be a far-reaching document that details how the organization is going to facilitate continuous improvement in its employees. It implies a focus on the development of a learning culture. To achieve this goal, you must increase the utility of knowledge through three key components: 1. Capture and creation of data, information, and knowledge assets in support of each individual’s performance functions across the organization. Provide links to knowledge management and document management practices. 2. Intelligent storage, leveraging useful taxonomies, and search and retrieve capability that better manages and improves access to content. 3. Dissemination and access practices, includ- ing but not limited to: e-Learning, instruc- tor-led training, documentation, mentoring and coaching, and outside sources. Historically the three components listed above have been critical in research and practice. However, many organizations have yet to fully real- ize the movement and integration of knowledge within themselves. A complete system for manag- ing information has been out of reach for many organizations, due in large part to the lack of a comprehensive strategy. The measures of any sys- tem for knowledge and learning should in-clude the accuracy, specificity, and timely delivery of the knowledge the user receives, and how effective that knowledge is in changing behaviors and improving Figure 1-1 performance. In addition, a key measure for success should be based on how knowledge feeds back into The learning and perform- ance system the system to make it a continuous, accurate, and valuable resource that meets users’ needs. Business process The e-Learning strategy lives through the learning strategy, which, in turn, is deeply embedded in the organizational strategy. This is true for all departments within the organization. In addition, the learning strategy must link clearly to the mission and vision of the organization. The value driv- en by learning and performance must be reflected across the organization in the ways people, cus- tomers, clients, vendors, and the job environment are perceived. Ultimately, the process of developing a well-thought-out and successful learning strategy will include a focused e-Learning strategy that will provide details around the following: • Defining the initiative and vision around the strategy. • Defining the needs and expectations of executive leadership. • Defining the needs and wants of the users at the organizational, departmental, business group, and individual levels. • Defining the technology to support the system. The strategy will also include a process to ensure alignment of each offering to overall organiza- tional goals and objectives. We highly recommend that the learning strategy address: The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 2
  • 18. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 • Aligning learning strategy goals with organizational and departmental goals. • Ensuring the support of executive leadership and acceptance of the strategy by contributors and users. • Determining baseline technology requirements and capacity to support the learning and e-Learning strategy. • Partnering with the internal training professionals in creating a plan for roll-out and implementation. • Devising a methodology to evaluate and measure results. People In developing a learning strategy, a critical aspect is how engaged the people are, and how they will play a role as the strategy builders and as the recipients of the strategy successes. People simply are the driving force behind every part of the strategy. Basically, as learning and performance profession- als, we state that the development of programs, courses, lessons, and knowledge objects is for the overt use of an individual who has a specific need to learn, refresh, or teach while engaged in a per- formance-measured task or function. This individual is our end user. A focus on the principles “Simple is better and less is more” is one over-arching objective when developing a learning or an e-Learning strategy. When faced with the building of a strategy, selection of key people from across the organization will be the most important decision to ensure success. For this reason a teaming approach seems to be best when developing a learning strategy. Why involve people from Accounting, Operations, or even Sales for that matter? It’s simple, really … they are the people who will bring focused attention and a level of importance to the rest of the organization. This is an organization-wide strategy, and, as such, needs to have key people across the organization and within the executive level involved. Executive level sponsorship, ownership, and understanding are the single greatest assets for successful development and implementation of a learning strategy, as well as an e-Learning strategy. It is how you allocate resources, and it will enable access across the organization. In the past it has always been apparent that development and implementation of a learning strate- gy is established largely through a push from the top down, rather than from a user-focused, bot- tom-up approach. The reason for the top-down push has been for cost reduction, human capital realignment within the organization, large technology purchases, or to capture knowledge and infor- mation before it leaves the organization. Any learning and performance systems approach will begin to show significant return on value when the process is user-focused. The job roles and functions of individuals and groups within the organization drive this approach. Learning and performance content developed from the users will have a significant impact on how work, and workers, are perceived and valued in the decisions they make and their role in the organi- zation. This focus is directly associated with involving people from across the organization in devel- oping the learning strategy. E-Learning strategy Development of the learning strategy will enable the organization to determine the needs across the enterprise for capture and creation, intelligent storage and dissemination of information, and the role of technology. Many organizations simply cannot justify the need to put content online as it will serve little or no value in getting the work done. For the same reason, putting content online that has little or no value is also a significant waste of time and effort. You must demonstrate a justifiable need that links the initiative to performance improvement. The The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 3
  • 19. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 inability to demonstrate this need has been the bane of e-Learning since its inception. It is easy to see when organizations do not have solid learning strategies. It is evident in disconnected, disorganized, and hard-to-access content, and is basically a vast waste of time, money, and effort. You drive a value- based approach to e-Learning by a clear, concise, and measurable strategy for the organization, and you must follow and evaluate this strategy. Any e-Learning strategy must include methods for designing and deploying learning solutions, change management, communication planning, performance support solutions, and knowledge management services and technologies. (See Figure 1-2.) This document must allow the organization to plan, design, develop, and deliver solutions that ensure that people have the necessary knowledge to embrace change and perform at a level required for business success. This will require: • Training expertise. Understanding of adult learning practices and principles as the theoretical underpinnings of organizational learning initiatives; methods that focus on outcomes in an effi- cient, effective, and cost-effective manner; learning content management practices; and instruc- tional design and development methodologies. • Training and development experience. An understanding of the field of learning and instruc- tional technologies and an awareness of the importance that training plays in an organization’s ability to maintain a competitive edge in a quickly changing global environment. • Rigorous project management process. Understanding and adherence to proven project man- Figure 1-2 E-Learning strategy. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 4
  • 20. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 agement techniques to ensure all projects are completed on-time, within budget, and to the satis- faction of our clients (internal and external). • Available and emerging learning technologies. Familiarity and understanding of learning man- agement system (LMS) and learning content management system (LCMS) technologies from both a theoretical and a practical standpoint. • Business process. A keen awareness and understanding of how the business works, and how the learning and performance group plays a role in that endeavor. This is a return on value under- standing. The development of an e-Learning strategy as a component to the learning strategy is a critical success point, and you should not take it lightly. However, this is not a long drawn-out process. You should recognize that development of a strategy is a point-in-time effort, that changes in the opera- tional environment will occur, and that you must account for them and then recalibrate the strategy. Process for developing the e-Learning strategy The process for developing an e-Learning strategy is exactly the same as the process for developing a learning strategy. However, a focus on dissemination of content via technology usually emerges. Whereas the process for developing an e-Learning strategy can be comprehensive, it is far easier to digest if broken into component parts. The areas of focus listed below are not necessarily in order, and you can complete them as the opportunity comes available. However, it is important that you indeed explore each area, and a series of measures from each area will allow you to stay focused as you implement the strategy. These areas will also determine who in the organization needs to be part of the team that develops the strategy. For example, the IT person should be represented and have a key stake when exploring technology in Area 6. Area 1: Learning across the organization Analysis in this area involves documenting what you currently know about the existing situation and the anticipated direction, both internally and externally, for learning programs. This would iden- tify key decision points and factors that impact strategies, software, tools, processes, resources requir- ed, learning, performance, business objectives, existing content, and channels. It would include docu- menting all assumptions you are making, and how those assumptions impact the overall solution. It would also identify a timeline and schedule for how and when to re-visit various issues as decisions are made. Finally, it would validate current tool sets, processes, and procedures, and identify areas of risk. Area 2: Content selection process This area involves a high-level analysis of the current process used to select content for courses, presentations, programs, et al., assuming there is one. The overall goal is to detail a process that will enable selection of appropriate content to put in an e-Learning format to meet the business and learning objectives. The content selection process determines how to decide which content, desired topics and subjects, and existing courses and content need to be developed, and in what manner. Having a blended learning approach is critical as you identify various delivery styles (e.g., Web- based basic, Web-based highly interactive, instructor-led, etc.) and decision criteria for determining the right style and delivery medium for the particular course and content you will develop. The deci- sion criteria will take into consideration such things as timeliness (when it needs to be prepared), target audience, content type, audience needs, possibilities for modularity to meet the needs of other The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 5
  • 21. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 audiences, and criticality of the subject. Other factors include: corporate content, where the content resides, what the format is and how it is structured, which content is of high or low value, and the stability of the content in terms of how often you need to edit or update it. Area 3: Access, retrieval, and reuse This area explores a high-level taxonomy to categorize and classify content within context to the learning, performance, and business objectives. In this area we are exploring how to identify and tag content in meaningful ways so the end-user can gain access at the right level. This is critical for reuse and for making informed, intelligent decisions about future content, maintenance concerns, and technology needs. Area 4: Mapping and content reuse The mapping process explores how to map content to the learning, performance, and business objectives by leveraging data and information from other systems such as user profiles, learner paths, new hire orientation, succession plan- ning, and development. Mapping con- tent in this way is very powerful for existing and future content, but it is an often overlooked method as it is time- consuming. Content re-use and the cre- ation process evaluates selected content based on end-user attributes, end-user playback environments, and learning, performance, and business objectives. There are dozens of factors to consider when reusing content. Developing an Figure 1-3 efficient methodology that provides a framework, a standardized process, and tools and templates for Development methodology how to effectively and efficiently move courses and content to the Web is crucial. Area 5: Development methodology The analysis, design, development, implementation, evaluation (ADDIE) model has clear reference points to the learning and performance system, and still applies. However, with an e-Learning strate- gy, success is dependent on output and how we manage that output. Using an iterative model that has continuous evaluation and business-case analysis will be critical. (See Figure 1-3.) People often overlook overtly adopting a development methodology, or they just assume one is understood with- in an organization. The e-Learning Strategy should detail what model, how we interact with the model, and how we evaluate the output from the model. Area 6: Technology This is not the place to start! Area 6 involves a high-level plan to address Web-portal design, LMS and LCMS features, functionality, technical requirements, and to flush out business needs and poten- tial costing models. This process will document known technical and functional requirements, and evaluate existing software applications for how well they address those requirements. In areas where gaps are too substantial, you should evaluate alternative products. Potential areas of software you might evaluate include authoring platforms for Web development, competency profiling and/or assessment systems, LMSs and LCMSs, knowledge management sys- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 6
  • 22. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 tems, class registration systems, and assessment authoring and delivery systems. The specific cate- gories of products to evaluate will be determined based on the requirements established in prior steps. Area 7: Maintenance planning Area 7 details how you will maintain the content, authoring, LMS, LCMS, and other systems. Over time this will represent the largest amount of time, money, and effort. Often, directors of organiza- tional learning understand too late in the game that neglecting this important area can sabotage their entire learning effort and cost them their jobs. A plan must be established to identify a system- atic review, revise, and release cycle, define triggering mechanisms and measurement criteria, and evaluate the shelf-life of learning content to provide fresh, timely, and engaging learning experiences. Area 8: E-Learning strategy plan After you have laid out the entire strategy, or set of strategies, you need to develop projects, tasks, activities, dependencies, resources, and timelines for moving forward. The e-Learning strategy plan includes a process for prioritizing projects, managing scope, identifying and resolving issues, and shifting schedules and resources as the programs and projects move forward. Area 9: Measurement and evaluation This area explores how you will measure the successes and failures of training programs within the organization. Do not stray from this focus, and be responsible for reporting successes and failures both up and down the chain of command. Traditional methods for evaluating the effectiveness of learning programs within companies have presented a myriad of problems. Most notably, there is a lack of metrics in place to gauge the worth of the instructional process. What value for the organiza- tion has resulted from the money, time, and effort we’ve put forth? This question is intense and well- justified. Any learning strategy and e-Learning strategy should have the basis for the answer. There’s merit in measuring whether or not the technology is up and running, how many people passed through a course, or if the participants liked the course, but as you move up the chain of command the haunting question of “What did I get” remains. Outcomes must be established to assess the whole technology-enabled instructional process, and the outcomes are highly dependent on the technology architecture, content, instructional design, teaching strategies associated with software, attitude of all those who participate, and the work environment. Coupled with the hard metrics most commonly associated with technology (hardware, software, and maintenance costs) you will need to establish a true assessment of the learning programs. Doomed to failure Will you be doomed to failure and fall into the e-Learning abyss if you don’t take the time to cre- ate a strategy for the organization? At some level, I would say, “Yes, absolutely!” Does it have to be a “formal” strategy as I suggest in this chapter? Probably not. However, if you are “feeling” your way through this and “flying by the seat of your pants,” then pay close attention to some of the key areas where you might look to avoid: • Failure to establish some plan that you can measure: It is hard to take credit for events that hap- pen with or without influence from the learning organization. Lance Dublin wrote that, “The road taken is often the one that was better sold, the cheapest, or the easiest to agree on — rather than the best choice for your organization. Such decisions fail to reflect a strategy of any kind. They are happenstance.” The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 7
  • 23. K E E P I N G T H E E - L E A R N I N G S T R AT E G Y F O C U S E D | C H A P T E R 1 • Failure to recognize the importance, interdependence, and connections of people, process, and technology within the organization to attain learning goals. • Failure to recognize that, above all, what matters are the people affected by the programs and sys- tems put in place for learning. Very rarely does a person turn to an LMS when he or she needs to solve a problem quickly. • Failure to consider learning across the organization (the think big — act small syndrome). • Failure to recognize the importance of learner motivation, attitude, and ownership over content and processes. • Failure to recognize organizational values, culture, and the mission. • Failure to measure progress. • Fail to START and STAY FOCUSED on the strategy. As previously stated, the process of developing and tracking an e-Learning strategy is relatively straight- forward. The success of that strategy, however, will depend on a well-thought-out approach and sup- port from key individuals within your organization. The learning strategy and the e-Learning strategy documents should be navigational maps that you adapt and improve along your journey. Take the time to invest in the development of the strategies, even if you don’t have adequate re- sources to do so. I’ve never seen a learning group within an organization receive a budget, people, and time to do their work twice! A powerful, valuable, and highly accurate strategy from the begin- ning is a magic bullet! Keeping focused on the strategy There are several processes for developing a learning strategy and an e-Learning strategy, but how do you stay focused? To stay focused on the plan follow these three key, never fail, techniques: • First, use the learning and e-Learning strategy like a business plan and establish a board of direc- tors from across the organization to help guide you along the way. Choose people to be on this board who will add value, and who will push you and your organization to succeed. The board should meet quarterly. • Secondly, measure, measure, measure, and report on progress on a quarterly basis. Make this report with the data (both good and bad) part of the corporate reporting structure. • Lastly, make the strategy document visible to the team members, the departments, and the or- ganization. Create a communication plan, and get the word out that you have a strategy and intend to implement this strategy. Always remember that a mediocre plan of action today is bet- ter than a perfect plan tomorrow. References Dublin, L. (2004). Lessons on e-Learning Strategy Development from the Cheshire Cat. ASTD Learning Circuits. http://www.learningcircuits.org/2004/sep2004/dublin.htm Moore, K. C. (2006). Learning Across the Organization: System Based Learning. METS Learning Center, Conference, May 2006. http://www.tier1performance.com/Articles/learningacross.pdf Moore, K.C., Kincaid, E.W., Shaw, M.A., Hoffer, D.B. (2007) Critical Use of Images in Knowledge- Based Dissemination and Learning Systems. Image Conference Proceedings, July 2007, Scottsdale, AZ. http://www.tier1performance.com/Articles/image.pdf Parkin, G. (2006) In an open letter in response to the e-Learning Hype Cycle. http://www.e-learningguru.com/articles/ezine1_2c.htm The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 8
  • 24. Datasheet ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 AND® ® ADOBE CONTRIBUTE CS3 ® ® CREATE HIGH IMPACT INFORMAL LEARNING CONTENT With Adobe Captivate 3 and Adobe users are turning to informal learning Contribute CS3 software, anyone can methods, such as screencasts, podcasts, rapidly develop screencasts, podcasts, and blogs. Using Adobe Captivate 3 and blogs, and websites. Contribute CS3, anyone can rapidly develop In today’s increasingly competitive business and deploy high-impact informal learning environment, organizations must nd new content that increases employee performance and innovative ways to keep employees’ skills and enhances skills—without learning how fresh and productivity high. To do this, to program in Adobe Flash® or HTML. corporate trainers, educators, and business Use Adobe Captivate 3 and Easily author content Adobe Contribute CS3 for: in Adobe Captivate. • Screencasts: Create interactive simulations and software demonstrations in Adobe Captivate 3, and drag and drop the screencast into a blog or web page using Contribute CS3. • Podcasts: Export MP3 audio les from Adobe Captivate 3 and link them to a website or blog using Contribute CS3. • Blogs: Add rich content and take advantage of formatting options for blogs with Contribute CS3. • Publishing: Edit HTML pages containing Adobe Captivate 3 content using Contribute CS3. Use Adobe Captivate content in a blog. Integrate Adobe Captivate content in a web page.
  • 25. Adobe Captivate 3 Adobe Captivate and Adobe Contribute work ow System requirements Windows® Adobe Captivate Adobe Contribute • Intel® Pentium® 4, Intel Centrino® Intel Xeon® , , Create Edit or Intel Core™ Duo (or compatible) processor • Microsoft® Windows XP with Service Pack 2, BLOG Windows 2000 with Service Pack 2, or Windows Vista™ Home Premium, Business, Ultimate, SWF or Enterprise (certi ed for 32-bit editions) CAPTIVATE HTML • 512MB of RAM (1GB recommended) Insert or drag and drop the SWF file into your • 700MB of available hard-disk space web page or blog. The SWF file automatically (additional free space required during installation) starts playing within the WYSIWYG editor. SWF • DVD-ROM drive • 800x600 screen resolution Record screen actions and Publish the SWF file from HTML (1,024x768 recommended) create a Flash Player Adobe Captivate. The SWF compatible SWF file that and HTML files are generated. • Internet or phone connection required contains the demonstration SWF for product activation or interactive simulation. Use Contribute to modify the HTML file Adobe Contribute CS3 generated by Adobe Captivate, and add a title, description, or other content around System requirements the SWF file. Windows • Intel Pentium 4, Intel Centrino, Intel Xeon, or Intel Core Duo (or compatible) processor • Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 or Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Use Adobe Captivate 3 to create Use Adobe Contribute CS3 to edit Ultimate, or Enterprise (certi ed for 32-bit editions) screencasts and podcasts and update blogs and web pages • 512MB of RAM With Adobe Captivate 3, learning Contribute CS3 enables you to easily add • 1GB of available hard-disk space professionals, educators, and business or content to and update websites and blogs. • 1,024x768 monitor resolution with 16-bit enterprise users can rapidly create interactive As blogs become more prevalent, Contribute video card • DVD-ROM drive simulations, so ware demonstrations, and CS3 enables organizations to take advantage • Internet or phone connection required for scenario-based training complete with of this alternative form of eLearning. product activation quizzing and scoring without programming • For the Contribute web browser plug-in: With Contribute CS3, you can simply drag or multimedia skills. en, using Contribute Internet Explorer 6 or 7 or Firefox 2 and drop your Adobe Captivate SWF le onto CS3, they can post and publish this learning • For the Microsoft O ce plug-in: O ce 2003, a web page or blog entry. True WYSIWYG 2006, or 2007 content as screencasts or podcasts onto authoring capabilities let you see exactly how websites and blogs. Macintosh your content will look prior to publishing. • PowerPC® G4 or G5 or multicore Intel processor Use Adobe Captivate 3 to create a new product When you’re ready, Contribute CS3 automati- • Mac OS X v.10.4.8 demonstration by capturing onscreen actions, cally creates the HTML code and loads the • 512MB of RAM and drag and drop the resulting SWF le into Adobe Captivate SWF le. With Adobe • 1.4GB of available hard-disk space • 1,024x768 monitor resolution with 16-bit a blog using Contribute CS3. Or record an Captivate 3 and Contribute CS3, anyone can video card audio le in Adobe Captivate 3, export it in create media-rich, just-in-time training—with • DVD-ROM drive MP3 format, and link the MP3 le to a website a few, simple mouse clicks. • Internet or phone connection required for or blog using Contribute CS3—without any product activation • For the Contribute web browser plug-in: HTML knowledge. Firefox 2 Note: You do not need Adobe Dreamweaver® Adobe Captivate 3 Adobe Contribute CS3 CS3 software when using Contribute CS3. Screencasting • For more information Podcasting* • For more information about Adobe Captivate 3, visit www.adobe.com/products/captivate. Interactive simulations • For more information about Adobe Contribute CS3, Blogging • visit, www.adobe.com/products/contribute. Web page editing • * Export audio les in MP3 format Adobe, the Adobe logo, Captivate, Contribute, Dreamweaver, and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Mac OS and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Intel, Intel Centrino, Intel Core, Intel Xeon, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other countries. PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks Adobe Systems Incorporated are the property of their respective owners. The names and logos referred to in the sample artwork are ctional and not intended to refer to any actual 345 Park Avenue organization or products. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95009176 7/07
  • 26. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 CHAPTER 2 Strategies for Transition to e-Learning By Frank Hanfland C ompanies are eager to implant e-Learning and learning management systems into their organ- izations, and for good reason. The last 20 years have seen significant changes in how learning in the workplace occurs. There has been a greater focus on informal learning, such as instant collab- oration, Intranets, Internet searches, task meetings, and knowledge bases. People expect only a min- ority of training to be so strategic that it requires a formal instructor-led approach, and even in these cases the benefits of e-Learning-based content have been without question. Changes in workplace dynamics also dictate changes in how we train our workforce. Mobile work- forces, globalization of companies, and faster product evolution challenge training organizations with concepts such as just-in-time training, localization, and mobile learning. The increasing cost of instructor-led training stemming, not only from the increasing cost of trav- el but also from the increasing cost of being unproductive while attending a class, makes e-Learning an attractive proposition. Finally, the influence of technology into every profession allows us to support and train our em- ployees better than ever before. Take for example an elevator repair technician – known for blue cov- eralls and a toolbox. Today, the same technician accesses the company’s intranet using a PDA to ref- erence a repair manual in order to complete the job. But you should realize that installing a learning management system (LMS) or buying an e-Learn- ing course from a vendor, and implementing a strategic e-Learning solution that transforms a com- pany’s culture into a performance support culture are two completely different things. Before we even begin to discuss how to successfully implement an e-Learning solution, we need to establish a baseline to measure against. The first task before writing any project plan is to collect Contents data. If there is an existing e-Learning offering, document quantitative data such as how much the system is costing you, and measure the return on In Chapter 2 you will find information about: investment. Collect any qualitative shortcomings, such as system perform- • E-Learning deployment overview • Assessment ance issues. • Design and selection Organizations that do not have an e-Learning offering should document • Implementation how much travel is costing, how many hours employees are not productive • Go-Live because of training attendance, and any time lags between training require- • Evaluation ment and actual training occurrence. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 11
  • 27. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 E-Learning deployment overview Once you have established a baseline, it is time to discuss how to deploy an e-Learning solution. E-Learning deployments can be challenging because of the many different aspects you must consid- er. (See Figure 2-1.) Failing to properly manage such a strategic change can be costly, at best delaying acceptance and positive returns on investment, and at worst having a failed implementation whose performance does not align with the organization’s needs. Because of these different aspects I have divided deployment into five phases, and each phase will be broken into four man- aged areas. In the following sections we will take a closer look at each phase, and each area within each phase. Figure 2-1 helps to break down the complexities of a successful e-Learning deployment into manageable pieces. Nevertheless, a successful implementation can take several months, and up to several years, depending on the factors you assess in the first phase. Timing Figure 2-1 The following sections describe the deployment methods in more detail, but don’t answer one Transition phases question: When to start. One of the proven ways to find the right time is to align with major organi- zational events that pose tremendous challenges on a training organizations, such as a company- wide industry-standard certification, or a major ERP implementation. After all — it’s hard to find a sponsor if it’s business as usual. These challenges are large enough to warrant e-Learning deployment and a change to the way you deliver training. These types of projects — while not strictly training projects by themselves — are also so large from a budgetary standpoint that organization-wide e-Learning deployment can be included in those budgets. Sooner or later there will have to be train- ing delivery — so e-Learning deployment might as well be a part of them. Assessment The first phase, and one of the most important ones, is to assess the needs of the organization. We’ll have a closer look at what needs you might assess for each area. This phase is an important milestone, because the results will provide answers to some basic, but heavy-weighing questions, such as how long the project will take, how many resources might be needed, how much budget might be needed, and what success might look like. Assess technology requirements In order to arrive at a solution that works at optimum levels for your organization, technology requirements focus on the LMS you will need in order to launch personalized content and track par- ticipation. This logical separation is possible because most providers of LMSs comply with either the AICC or SCORM standard, which outlines how content interacts with the system. The exceptions are learning content management systems (LCMS), which in many cases combine learning management with content creation and delivery, and require a combined technology strategy. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 12
  • 28. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 I will not cover every aspect of technology implementation, or LMS selection, as there are detailed buying guides available — rather I will provide key pointers for a successful technology assessment. Legacy systems A first look should be given to any available legacy systems that have served your organization, because they can provide a wealth of information, such as who uses the system, how many users there are, how it is configured, how well it works, and what improvement opportunities exist. Data interfaces Data interfaces play an ever-increasing role in today’s human resource and performance manage- ment strategies. These systems not only collect data, but often times need to “talk” to each other. Data interfaces might exist (or might be needed) between human resources information systems (HRISs), ensuring that employee data in both systems match, or talent management systems (TMSs) might need to know the exact qualifications a person has obtained through training, and the LMS needs to know what qualifications a person might need to fulfill their job. These bring up a potential interface need between the LMS and an organizational management system (OMS). Large compa- nies often employ enterprise resource planning (ERP) software, which may combine all these differ- ent information systems into one, making interfacing somewhat easier. The key point is that you’ll need to assess what information your system needs to function as expected. Hosted or installed Another question might be whether to purchase a perpetual license for your system and have it installed at your site or to deploy a hosted version. A hosted version usually runs at the vendor’s data center, and is also known as a Software as Service (SAS) or Application Service Provider (ASP) model. Either deployment may make sense for your organization. The choice of which model to deploy depends on budget, available in-house support, and the level of customization and data secu- rity that may be required. Must-have features Must-have features are clearly defined: If the system does not have it, it must either be customized to provide that feature, or this system cannot be a contender. Such features might include support for standards-compliant content, accessibility (Section 508 compliance), various features of day-to- day administrative tasks, or legacy content compatibility. The way to assess what features are needed and how these features are supposed to work is through interviews with stakeholders, administrators, and end users. High-level stakeholders might provide insight into which data they need and what reporting might have to look like, and in the end they have to approve the budget. However, end users have to use the system on a daily basis, so their input is of extreme importance. If the system does not function as expected at that level, end users won’t want to work with it, posing a threat to the organizational change requirement that drove the e-Learning implementation. Don’t forget to look into international locations if your organization has them, as their needs may vary greatly from your domestic system needs. For example, if your company needs to deploy content in Southeast Asia, the system must be able to support those lan- guages. Desired features Implementing a new system entirely from scratch provides an opportunity to reach for the sky. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 13
  • 29. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 If properly planned, you can implement many features that are “nice-to-have” such as mobile con- tent for example. Again, the best way to find out is to ask key stakeholders and end users at various levels throughout the organization. Assess content requirements Content requirements vary greatly whether the e-Learning deployment is a first effort in this dir- ection, or if there are existing systems that house content. In many cases content creation, conver- sion, and purchasing of new content continue while implementing the new system, because for e-Learning to be effective, there must be content. Even with modern rapid development methodolo- gies, creating content costs time and money. In the end, whether to handle content creation and con- version in-house or to outsource these efforts depends on available resources and budget. Instructional design requirements You need to assess instructional design requirements to ensure that content creation strategy sup- ports the required training results. A strategy to convert static slides into e-Learning might be suffi- cient to teach the outline points, but lack of interaction and learner engagement pose challenges in regards to content retention. This is a good time to look closely at the organization’s instructional design strategy and ensure that content can support it. Content creation Key questions to ask are about the features newly created content must support. Will there be audio, video, streaming content, and live collaboration? How much content must you produce? Is the content that you will create during the deployment compatible with all systems? Content conversion Is the existing content (if any) standards-compliant, or will it need to be converted? If it needs to be converted, how much effort is involved? Off-the-shelf content Off-the-shelf content can be a viable solution to a company’s need to rapidly create content or eliminate the need to convert content. Most commercially available content is standards-compliant and provides the advantage of being cost-effective and rapidly deployed compared to custom course- ware. Must-have features Whether developed in-house, outsourced, or purchased, these features are critical to your organi- zation’s needs, and might include glossaries, audio narration, videos, live text chats, or a wealth of other features that may be available in modern e-Learning content. Too many features might be dis- tracting from the actual content, so finding the right balance is important. Key stakeholders, admin- istrators, and end users will be able to provide answers as to which features are critical to fill the organization’s needs. Be certain to include a look into the foreseeable future to ensure that the con- tent strategy will support next-generation content. Nice-to-have features Similar to the technology requirements assessment, now is the time to add any “bells and whistles” The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 14
  • 30. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 to the content, if the organization’s needs warrant them. Such features might include customizable content based on learner experience and proficiency. Be aware that you must also support any fea- ture. Assess change management requirements Change management is often the most neglected part in many deployments; nevertheless it plays an important role in your deployment. Deploying a new e-Learning strategy is a change, and people are naturally afraid of the unknown. Communication strategy Questions to ask include, “Who will be responsible for communication?” Sometimes the answer is easy: You are! Some larger organizations have an entire change management office, which will handle communication for this project. Other factors include the size of the user base, ranging from a single administrator to potentially thousands of users. You should pay particular attention to the percep- tion of technology deployments. Do users trust the company with the deployment of a key strategy? Or, is the perception such that users feel another short-term failure arising? Training strategy The assessment should focus on what processes will change, and so will require training, as well as identify who the changes will affect. You need to pay close attention to available resources to develop and deliver the training. Assess organizational development The organizational development assessment not only establishes a current state of the organiza- tion from a business process and organizational structure point of view, but also needs to identify any opportunities that need addressing through e-Learning and LMS deployments. Business processes Each and every business process affected by this project needs to be documented and validated. Many organizations have documented business processes and procedures; but many do not have such vital documentation. This is the time to identify whether or not current processes serve the organization’s need, or if the process is broken. It simply does not make any sense to implement a process that does not align with the reality of business. The result of the assessment should be a clear vision of which documentation exists, which you will have to create, and how you will create it. Support requirements Any new deployment will require support. Your organization must be prepared to handle support calls from the first minute the system goes live, and should expect a higher incident volume during the initial few weeks after go-live. The assessment needs to identify how you will handle support and what the support structure looks like. Is there a dedicated support group in your organization? Can this support group handle e-Learning support, and if yes, how will you train them? Does the vendor provide support, and if yes, who is the key contact? Will the support organization be tiered, and if yes, who has access to what tier level? The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 15
  • 31. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 Organizational structure What information is available about the organization layout, and is the information correct? Is the organizational structure granular enough to assign training to the position level? Is it grouped into families that allow setting rules for entire groups of similar requirements? Talent management Is there a talent management process or system? What process does succession planning follow? Are these processes integrated? At a minimum, the assessment needs to outline the qualifications to track, and what e-Learning offerings fulfill these qualifications. Personnel changes Determine any reduction, addition, or transformation in personnel that might be required. For example the organization might need fewer instructors after the successful deployment, but will require more performance support coaches. You need to assess these types of transitions so you can properly manage them. Summary of the assessment phase The assessment phase breaks the needs of the organization that must be addressed into manage- able pieces. To use a paradigm, the assessment phase results in the list of ingredients that are required for each of the courses in this five-course menu. The next phase, “Design and Selection” establishes the recipe for our meal. Design and selection With the data collected through the assessment phase, the team can begin to design how to fulfill these needs and select products and vendors to provide some of these services. We will spend less time on this section, since the varying methodologies for each potential element, and their associated benefits and drawbacks, are beyond the scope of this book. Design the technology strategy This element deals with the selection of an LMS or LCMS that will provide your organization’s e-Learning content, track participation, evaluate learning paths, and so on. What exactly this system needs to do depends directly on the technology assessment completed during the first phase. Select vendor or design in-house development plan There are over 1,500 commercially available LMSs at varying price points, featuring an even wider list of features. Which system is best for your organization will most likely represent a compromise between how well features fit your needs and budget available for customizations. Other organiza- tions might choose to develop the system in-house. The advantage is that the system is custom-tai- lored to the organization’s needs, however it may take much longer to implement. As mentioned ear- lier, there are detailed buying guides that will allow your organization to make the best choice for its individual needs. Design data interfaces and customizations In this section the team designs the identified data interfaces. This includes interface methodology, such as batch file loading or live data transmission, data elements to be exchanged, data format, direction of travel from system to system, and frequency of exchange. In addition, any customiza- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 16
  • 32. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 tions that will have to be made to a vendor-supplied system should be designed at this time. Design user interfaces and portals Depending on your organizational structure and the needs identified in the assessment, you should design and acceptance-test any user interface before fully developing it. In addition, your organization might require the design of several separate portals to provide the look, feel, and func- tionality the portal owner requires. Design content strategy This element deals with the methodology and processes the organization will use to populate the e-Learning solution with content that aligns with the organization’s requirements. Design course catalog and qualification catalog The first step should be to design the course catalog, based on the facts learned during the assess- ment. The design is dependent on many factors, for example, which courses exist, which need to be developed, and how courses are classified. At this point some of the separately-managed areas begin to flow together. Because you established the qualification catalog’s needs during the organizational change assessment, the design focuses on how the course catalog fulfills the qualification require- ments. Design content development methodology Based on the assessment, select the methodology used to develop content. For example, you might choose rapid content development for informal training, online collaboration for meetings, and tra- ditional development for strategic courses. You will establish content development processes, roles, and responsibilities and create the design methodology guidelines. Design performance support methodology Design the required performance support based on the organization’s needs, such as knowledge bases, intranets, job aids, and coaching programs, just to name a few. Software and vendor selection Based on the identified content development methodology and the assessed content needs, you can select the appropriate software. Sometimes this step closely aligns with the content development methodology, because software can dictate which capabilities are available. Quite often it is the soft- ware that pushes the envelope of what was thought to be impossible. At this time it is also appropri- ate to select any vendors that might be required. Design change management plan The change management plan provides the roadmap to fulfill the change management needs identified during the first phase. The change management plan should, at a minimum, address the basic change management phases (preparing for change, managing change, reinforcing change), and should include assessments to evaluate how well the change management plan addresses the compa- ny’s needs. Communication plan The communication plan should not only focus on communication to users outside of the project The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 17
  • 33. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 team, but should also establish guidelines of how communication within the project team is to occur. Based on facts gathered during the assessment, design a plan that specifies who communicates what and when, to which group, and by what method. For internal team communication, design a plan that includes how progress reports, design changes, major events, availability of prototypes, and demonstrations are handled. Training plan One of the most important parts is the training plan. The training plan establishes who attends training, when training occurs, what needs to be trained, and by what means training needs are ful- filled. This not only ensures that end users are trained on the day the system goes live, but, for exam- ple, ensures that content providers are familiar with the methodology and development tools. Design organizational development plan The organizational development plan specifies the tasks and methodology that ensures that e-Learning deployment aligns closely with the organizational structure. The design not only focuses on processes, but also on how resources are organized and deployed. In many organizations organi- zational development is part of the human resources function, and any changes assessed in phase one should have been assessed with the help of human resources professionals. Design business processes Any new business processes and procedures that have been identified, as well as those seen as be- ing broken, need to be planned. The design not only involves the process, but also how the system facilitates the process. In addition, you need to validate the design, and you must consider any impact on dependent processes. Design the support structure This design specifies the responsibilities for supporting any incidents arising during and after the deployment. It should include incident levels and support level matrices, and should outline minimum acceptable response times. If a vendor provides support, it is a good time to begin the selection process. Design roles and responsibilities This step deals with designing user roles and responsibilities as well as user permissions. The design should include hierarchical roles based on the organizational assessment. Design changes to organizational structure Any change to the organizational structure requires some form of plan, such as designing job descriptions for any added administrators, or specifying how changes to the reporting structure will be facilitated. Summary of the design and selection phase At this time there should be no more unknown factors in any area, and you should have answers to all questions on how to deploy e-Learning. All affected team members and departments should be clearly in the picture — not only that change will come, but what will change, and how the change will be accomplished. At this time the various clearly separated managed areas during the assessment phase begin to re-connect, such as the training plan being dependent on the organizational structure and content development strategy. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 18
  • 34. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 Implementation You could also call this phase development, but because any deployment requires so much devel- opment of specifications and documents and plans at each stage, a different name was needed. This is the time where you’ll hire contractors and vendors to bring the plans and designs to fruition. Implement technology solution In this step you’ll work together with system vendors and your in-house IT departments to ensure that the assessed technology needs and the LMS or LCMS will be implemented as designed. In rare cases this managed element of the deployment might be combined with content integration, as some IT departments centrally manage all software deployments, including the software used to create con- tent. It may be that the software used to create content is actually part of the LMS or LCMS package. Configure and program the system and develop customizations The vendor that will supply the LMS will most likely be supplying the consultants that install and configure the system — even though there are exceptions. If the system is being developed in-house, the implementation process will most likely be under the umbrella of the IT organization to ensure that the system complies with IT rules. This area may also flow together with other areas, because any data interfaces that were identified in earlier phases will be developed. The primary task for the deployment team is to manage the project timelines, and to ensure that development coincides with established business processes and procedures. Data migration Whether this is a new deployment or a replacement, you need to populate the system with data. This data consists of users, organizational structure, the course catalog, and every other type of data that was identified through the assessment phase. Not only do you transfer the data, but it may also be transformed to fit the needs of the new system. It is critical to validate that this process has not compromised data integrity. Testing of functionality against business processes and procedures As you reach every major milestone in implementing the functionality of the system, you need to test and validate it against the design documents. And you need to validate any deviations from the design document to ensure that business processes and procedures are not disrupted by the devia- tion. User acceptance testing Don’t forget the end users. Does the developed product align with reality? The thorough assess- ment phase should ensure that the majority of all functionality is well aligned with the real-life tasks that are to be performed. Because business is ever changing, in some instances a process might have been changed without that change being documented in a design document. Content strategy implementation This step is most likely the most time consuming, especially if there is a lot of existing content that needs conversion. While this document treats each of the managed areas in sequence, in reality, con- tent conversion and creation has been an ongoing process while implementing the technology solu- tion. This is a good time to demonstrate the system’s capabilities to end users and stakeholders. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 19
  • 35. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 Convert existing content Existing standards-compliant content needs to be validated for functionality and migrated to the new system. In some cases you need to move assessments (tests and quizzes) separately from the con- tent. Content that is not standards-compliant needs to be re-engineered to migrate to the new system. Create content though vendors or in-house New content might have to be developed and be ready for go-live if this deployment is completely new. Developers might need extensive coaching and close project management if you have deployed a new development methodology, such as rapid learning, Order off-the-shelf content This step might seem simple, and most of the time it is, but you must validate proper functionality. Create media elements A new system and new content methodology almost always provides the ability to explore new content media types. Not too long ago, video over the Web was unthinkable, while today it is reality. Software simulations have historically been prohibitively expensive, but recent advances in develop- ment tools have made them very affordable. These new media elements need to be developed and tested. Change management plan implementation During this stage communication within and outside the core teams continues, and training activ- ities take place. Send communications as defined by plan As I mentioned earlier, this chapter treats the separate managed elements in sequence. In reality, several parts of the change management plan will already have been completed and been communi- cated. Communication to stakeholders and end users becomes more critical as the go-live date approaches. This does not only include announcements to end users, but also progress and budget reports to the business sponsors. Deploy training according to plan As with the previous step, some training might already have occurred for select audiences, howev- er the majority of training, as defined by the assessment, occurs as soon as you have developed the system to a stable version. Organizational development implementation This step is largely the result of collaboration with other departments on the organizational needs. The resulting assessment and design documents from previous phases outline the tasks to be per- formed in the step. Load user profiles and qualification catalog This step has been included here because it not only consists of a data set, but also reflects any changes to the organizational structure such as the relationship between positions, jobs, people, qual- ifications, and courses. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 20
  • 36. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 Implement new business processes You must implement any new or modified business processes, and associated training needs to occur. You build the support structure for the new system at this time. Implement changes to job descriptions Implement any changes to job descriptions and communicate them across the human resources and recruiting organizations, as well as to affected individuals and their managers. These changes not only affect the job descriptions, but the people that hold these jobs, including the consequences of eliminated or significantly changed positions. Summary of implementation phase The implementation phase can be hectic and overwhelming for any involved person. A good design plan and solid project management will ensure that the deployment stays on track. This phase can also be exciting, because months of planning become reality. Go-live This phase is most likely the most anticipated phase of all — though I will never understand the reasons for that. If all aspects of the project have been analyzed thoroughly, all design has been thoughtful, and all implementation has been completed thoroughly, there is no need for excitement and working into the wee early morning hours on the day of go-live. Go-live should simply consist of enabling the one file or setting that allows end users to access the live system. You should have completed every other aspect during an earlier phase. You should be able to sit back, relax, and have a little celebration — and the team certainly deserves it. Evaluation Like all the previous phases, the evaluation phase is broken into the same distinct managed areas. Generally speaking, this evaluation should occur between 90 to 120 days after go-live. This time range is a suggestion, and evaluation can occur as soon as you can collect meaningful data — gener- ally you need at least 10% utilization before a statistical trend can be predicted. You should collect the feedback received during this phase, and evaluate it for Version 2.0 or for the first maintenance update. Evaluate technology solution During this evaluation you analyze the system. Is the functionality as expected across all functional areas? Are there any bugs? Are there workarounds for bugs or deficiencies? Is the reporting of data as expected? Evaluate content You need to evaluate content against the performance model chosen during the design phase. Many organizations align their performance evaluation on the Kirkpatrick model. Does the content pro- vide the expected results in participants? In addition, there may be minor inconsistencies between content and real-life processes and procedures that may need to be fine tuned. Evaluate change management You should document any lessons learned in this area. How did the user population react to the The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 21
  • 37. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 change communications and the system implementation? What impact (either positive or negative) did vendor relations have on the project? What were the major obstacles, and how were they over- come? Did training occur for the correct audiences when needed? Evaluate organizational change This last area is the most important one from a strategic point of view — and it is the one ques- tion stakeholders will ask — probably before the data is available: What was the return on invest- ment (ROI)? It is, after all, a business decision to implement e-Learning — so there should be an anticipatable profit from the investment — or a significant reduction in cost that offsets the invest- ment. The ROI should align with the needs analyses — the very reason why the system was imple- mented in the first place. ROI can be calculated in many ways, and there are many good books and guides on the market to explore this topic deeper. We will focus on three main areas. Quantitative benefits Quantitative benefits are those that you can easily measure, and the most interesting quantity to stakeholders is the amount of money saved or received as income. How many hours of instructor- led training were delivered via e-Learning? How many travel dollars did that save? How many more hours of customer face-time did that provide to the workforce? How much additional sales revenue derived from that additional face-time? Another example may be a technology roll-out that used e-Learning for performance support. How many fewer calls to the help desk? How much money did the reduced call volume save? How many more services can a tech perform because they don’t have to call the help desk? How many fewer errors occurred because support is available where needed? How many dollars did that error-reduction save? Qualitative benefits These benefits are important, yet hard to translate into firm dollar figures. They may include a more motivated employee base, confirmed though a survey. But it is hard to link that directly to a dollar figure. Another benefit might be a reduced product development cycle, because the associated training rolls out faster. That is especially true in telecom and technology industries, where an entire product life-cycle can be shorter than a traditional training development cycle. In these types of situ- ations, e-Learning is an enabler, but you cannot credit it with a firm dollar amount — either because the data does not exist, or the relationship between income and e-Learning-based training delivery is too indirect. Unrealized benefits You will usually realize these benefits somewhat later than quantitative and qualitative benefits. They include all types of benefits that were not part of the original needs assessment. An elevator company, for example, might experience a reduction in traffic accidents, because there had to be fewer trips to correct installation issues. In another very interesting scenario, an organization realized that their LMS and e-Learning development method was so effective that they abandoned their tra- ditional IT-managed Internet and Intranet and transitioned them to the training department — now known as the Corporate Communication and Change Management Department. Summary of the evaluation phase The evaluation phase proves the effectiveness of the project, and records the lessons learned. It provides business meaning to the entire project — because if the ROI does not align with the identi- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 22
  • 38. S T R AT E G I E S F O R T R A N S I T I O N T O E - L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 2 fied organizational needs, or if it provides a negative number, you cannot consider the project a suc- cess — no matter how innovative it might have been. If, on the other hand, it exceeds ROI expecta- tions and the organization benefits from the deployment — the deployment must be considered a success — no matter how un-innovative or crude the solution is. Conclusion As mentioned in the introduction, e-Learning deployments (including LMS installations) can be challenging projects because they affect multiple areas in the organization though multiple phases, each requiring their own project plan — and to complicate matters, each area flows into another area. However, by using the pointers in this chapter, you can identify a starting point and realize a road map through the entire cycle of a successful deployment. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 23
  • 42. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 CHAPTER 3 Design Strategies for Online and Blended Learning By Patti Shank A lthough the grandiose assertions that e-Learning would take over all instruction never materi- alized (as if … ), the use of technology for learning is quickly becoming ubiquitous. That is, people no longer see it as separate from “regular” learning, and it is viewed as part of the tools that trainers, instructional designers, instructors, and others who design or deliver instruction use to impact skills and performance. Companies have implemented diverse approaches to using technologies to meet their training needs and good and not-so-good outcomes have helped us better understand what works well, less well, and not at all, and in what circumstances. Synchronous e-Learning systems such as WebEx™ or Adobe® Connect™ were a natural first step for many, because synchronous online training feels the most like what trainers, subject matter experts, and learners were already used to — someone pre- senting to a group of people. But a synchronous approach reduces the “any time, any place” aspect of using the Internet to learn to “any place” so this approach isn’t best for all training needs. Initially, some began by putting content such as Microsoft® PowerPoint® slides and manuals on the Web, and had to learn the hard way that while this may indeed be content (and not very good content at that), it isn’t instruction. Some who built custom self-paced e-Learning have been dismayed to find that getting staff to use it, and making it work on their Learning Management System (LMS), is far from a walk in the park. Recently, people have promoted rapid e-Learning as a panacea to overcome the typical tribula- tions of e-Learning design and development, including long development cycles, high cost, and need for high-end design and development skills. Rapid e-Learning can reduce time, cost, and need for advanced design skills, but it’s not any more of a panacea than other one-size-fits-all approaches. This chapter concentrates on four key design strategy decisions that e-Learning designers and Contents developers should consider, and the criteria for considering them. They include deciding whether: • instruction or information is needed; In Chapter 3 you will find information about: • face-to-face classroom, online, or real life approaches will work • Decision #1: Instruction or information best; • Decision #2: Classroom, online, or real life • synchronous or asynchronous instruction makes the most sense; • Decision #3: Synchronous or asynchronous • a traditional or rapid design approach should be used to build the • Decision #4: Traditional or rapid design materials. One size does not fit all (learners, courses, organizations). The The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 27
  • 43. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 approach taken for retail clerks in stores with limited Internet or network access needs to be different than the approach taken for office workers who have all-you-can-eat Internet and network access on their desks. Just as different audiences and access to network resources merit different approaches, so do dif- ferent types of courses. For example, company A’s onboarding process for new salespeople starts out with self-paced product lessons and assessments and then real life job shadowing with experienced reps. Product updates use a rapid get-it-out-the-door-because-it’s-needed-NOW approach, utilizing a PowerPoint with narration to Adobe® Flash® tool (such as Articulate® Presenter™ or Microsoft Producer™). Initial sales training uses online branching scenarios (using a tool like Adobe Capti- vate™ or Flash, Articulate Engage™, or NexLearn™ SimWriter™) with classroom-based practice sessions. You wouldn’t want to force all instruction into one box, would you? (I’m being sarcastic, in case that’s not clear; too many do just that, with less-than-acceptable results.) The right approach begins with a well thought-out plan that identifies key business needs and how training and other perform- ance interventions will support them. A training plan should identify which of the approaches des- cribed in this chapter will be used and why. Research shows that organizations that put adequate effort into planning are significantly more likely to be satisfied with training outcomes. There are many complex decisions to make when e-Learning is part of the mix. Welcome to the e-Learning-can-make-you-tear-your-hair-out club. I paid the first year’s dues on your behalf. Strategy decision #1: Instruction or information The first strategy decision is what type of content you need to build. Table 3-1 shows various types of content and where they would typically fall on a continuum from instruction to information. In- struction generally requires much more effort to design than information. Where a certain project (or piece of a project) falls on the continuum will help you determine what other approaches make sense. For example, informational content rarely deserves as much time and effort as instructional content. An example of hybrid information and instruction for software product updates for field sales would be instructional demos of new features and Q&A sessions delivered through Webinars, Table 3-1 while the information for field sales would be downloadable PDF files describing features, specifica- tions, and benefits (useful as information and performance Instruction — information continuum support). Instruction has a specific purpose — to change learners’ Instruction Information knowledge and skills for a specific purpose. In a training environment, you build instruction to change what workers Module, lesson, course, Who, what, why, do on the job and to positively impact important business tutorial, demo, game, practice, when, where simulation, quiz, test goals. Instruction typically includes assessments, activities that help learners practice, and content that helps learners perform well on activities and assessments. The typical pur- pose of information, however, is to increase comprehension. Should you build instruction, informa- tion, or both for a given training project? Take a look at the attributes shown in Table 3-2 on page 29 and see which of them apply to the project. And if both apply, consider a hybrid instruction and information solution, as described in the software product updates example. Strategy decision #2: Classroom (face-to-face), online, or real life Another important strategy decision is whether to use classroom, online, or real life (also known The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 28
  • 44. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 as on-the-job) learning environments to best meet the needs of learners and the organization. In Table 3-2 reality, a combination is often best. Learners scattered around the globe will have better access to training if it is available in self-paced modules online. A new Attributes of instruction and information call-center employee may sit with, and listen in on, a success- ful call-center employee’s calls in order to learn how to han- Instruction Information dle a variety of real-life call types. People learning conflict Purpose Gain skills via practice Improve comprehen- management skills are likely to have better practice opportu- and feedback sion nities in a classroom. Practice in cleaning up hazardous waste Audience Often built for narrower Often built for wider spills would be best using a real spill, but it would be too dan- audiences audiences gerous (and unethical). And since there are (happily) few real Content Purposely limited, may Often less restricted link to additional content to meet wider audi- opportunities to practice these skills, simulations make more ence needs sense. Interface Simpler interfaces, Less restricted con- In many cases, the best approach is one that works and is reuse so users know tent requires careful also possible. what to expect interface design and testing Table 3-3 shows benefits and challenges of classroom, Activities Support learning and Quickly locate infor- online, and real-life instruction. Because they have different transfer mation benefits, a combination is often optimal. This approach helps Multimedia Use when needed to Use when needed to makes it possible to gain the benefits of all while mitigating improve learning, don’t improve comprehen- the challenges. For example, online instruction, combined use gratuitously sion, don’t use gratu- itously with classroom for live practice. Or an online course com- Assessments Test, performance, real- Survey, multiple bined with fieldwork and a few face-to-face meetings. life performance choice questions The question I am asked most often is, “How do I do _____ (fill in the blank with an activity type) online?” Table 3-4 on page 30 shows that classroom, online, and real-life Table 3-3 learning environments have differ- ent components that can be used Benefits and challenges of classroom, online, and real life learning for the same purpose. Classroom Online Real life All activities DO NOT need to happen online, even in a primarily Benefits Immediate feedback and Easily scalable Real examples, not support made up online course. For example, Mari- Possible to customize Social aspects Immediate feedback and copa Center for Learning and In- Easier tracking struction’s Writing HTML course support Immediacy of feedback Easier standardization (http://www.mcli.dist.maricopa. Able to see the full com- Easy to see performance Potential for increased plexity of job skills edu/tut/) uses online lessons, but participation Mentoring or coaching you practice on your computer, Incremental cost is low- over time is possible ered when spread over outside of the course. In general, I wide audience believe we use far too few real-life practice elements in our courses. Challenges Usually linear, more time- Boring when not enough Non-standardized quality bound consideration is given to of on-the-job trainers and Strategy decision #3: interaction needs training process Participation is limited by available time and need May be challenging to Can be time-consuming Synchronous or to “cover” content use May need to limit prac- asynchronous Travel greatly increases Delayed or nonexistent tice for safety and other Technology-based instruction is cost feedback and support is concerns typically delivered in a synchro- common Not easily scalable Learner may be over- nous manner (live, same time, dif- May feel “remote” whelmed ferent locations) or an asynchro- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 29
  • 45. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 nous manner (self-paced or group-paced, different times and places) and the designer needs to det- ermine which (or what combination) of these will work best. Table 3-5 shows some of the benefits and challenges of asynchronous and synchronous online delivery. In my experience, synchronous instruction is more compelling than asynchronous instruction, all Table 3-4 things being equal (which they rarely are). To be compelling, the presenter must know how to use synchronous systems to their best Instructional components for classroom, online, and real life advantage. But synchronous in- learning environments struction has some major draw- backs, such as needing to have par- Purpose Classroom components Online components Real life components ticipants there at the same time (a Content Course workbook, Lesson, animation, Policies, manuals, job recorded session is not as com- delivery presentation slides slides with narration, aids Webinar pelling). The benefits and challenges of Activities Exercises, simulations, Demo, simulation, Job shadowing, what- synchronous and asynchronous cases, learning lab tutorial, cases, problems would-you-do-if scenarios, real life practice delivery plus examples of each should help you select delivery Assessments Checklist, test, performance Checklist, test, simulation Performance modes that make the most sense Support, Instructor, peers, instruc- References (online and Supervisor, on-the-job for a given situation. A combina- feedback, tional materials print), performance sup- trainer, other workers, tion often makes the most sense and help port tools, application real life resources sharing, ask the expert, because it provides the benefits of searchable documenta- both while mitigating the chal- tion, resource lists lenges. For example, an asynchro- nous module combined with a Table 3-5 Web conference to discuss critical issues. Or a Webinar, followed by Benefits and challenges of asynchronous and synchronous delivery asynchronous discussion to answer questions and share resources. Synchronous Asynchronous Benefits Time set aside Convenience Strategy decision #4: Real-time demonstrations Access at work or home Traditional or Rapid Immediate feedback Time to reflect Instructional Design Visual cues (gauge emotions, Lack of visual cues (privacy) Traditional instructional design, understanding) Standardized content especially when applied to e-Learn- Better for poor reading and writing Review materials as needed ing, commonly uses a detailed skills process that takes months or Self-direction Instructor directed longer. (It’s no joke when instruc- tional designers say that by the Challenges Inconvenience and logistics — time Lack of immediacy time the course is completed, it’s zones Lack of visual cues (potential for mis- often out of date.) It typically No time to reflect understanding) involves a fair amount of analysis, a Event oriented Frustration when needing help design team with multiple skills, Instructor control Easier to avoid and iterative cycles of design, dev- elopment, and formative evalua- Examples Webinar, application sharing, chat, Self-paced module, discussion forum, tion before implementation. This instant messaging, real-time collabora- tutorial, archived Webinar, collaborative tion, audio conference, Web conference writing tools approach makes sense when there is a need to assure critical job skills The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 30
  • 46. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 and outcomes but is too costly and time intensive for many training projects. Figure 3-1 shows the steps of traditional instructional design, and the arrows indicate that there is a great deal of iteration built into the process. The cost for traditional asynchronous self-paced online learning ranges between $10,000 and $100,000+ per hour of learning (typically depending on amount and complexity of programming and multimedia elements). This is cost-prohibitive for materials that are quickly outdated or for less critical training. Rapid instructional design is the name given to instructional design methods that allow for building and delivering instruc- tional content in days or weeks, rather than the long period of time it normally takes to build instruction according to more traditional instructional design methods. It is best to use it for instruction that focuses on knowledge (as opposed to skills) and for information that requires very rapid dissemination. Figure 3-1 A rapid instructional design process, shown in Figure 3-2, follows similar steps as a traditional Traditional instructional instructional design process but eliminates many of the sub-steps and has far less iteration. Compare design process the sub-steps of the Design and Develop step in both processes. The effect of reducing sub-steps and iteration is a reduction in time and cost. Given reduced time and costs, should you use rapid instructional design for all e-Learning projects? NO! Some training projects merit the increased time and costs, and I’ll discuss why in the next few sections. The choice to use a traditional instruction design approach or a rapid design approach depends on numerous factors, including the: • level of instructional objectives • need for skill mastery • time sensitivity of the content The next section will discuss these three factors. Level of instructional objectives Figure 3-2 Rapid instructional Figure 3-3 shows a pyramid of instructional objectives, with the lower tiers constituting “KNOW” design process objectives and the higher tiers constituting “DO” objectives. Typical instructional design is often the right choice for upper-tier instructional objectives. - Rapid instructional design is often a good choice for lower-tier instructional objectives. For exam- ple, List the benefits of a Roth IRA is a lower-tier instructional objective. But Develop a care plan for a critically ill child is a higher-tier instructional objective. The care plan objective involves critical job skills for a medical care manager, and the time taken to confirm these skills is likely worth additional time, cost, and iteration. Figure 3-3 Typically, it is best to use rapid instructional design for instruction that can be considered dispos- Pyramid of Instructional able. Disposable doesn’t mean it’s not worthwhile, though. It means that the instruction either does- Outcomes (Adapted from: n’t merit the intense design effort needed for higher levels of skill or mastery, or that the content is Bloom’s Taxonomy) extremely time sensitive, changes rapidly, or goes out of date quickly. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 31
  • 47. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 Skill mastery Mastery of a skill takes time and practice, input and reflection, chances to fail and to gain feedback and support. It is critical to consider what degree of mastery you need. Figure 3-4 shows how design strategy typically becomes more rigorous as the need for skill mastery and the need to measure real- world skills increase. The upper right section shows that when the need for skill mastery is high (for example, giving patients the right medication), and the need to assure that these skills have been attained is high, that is, the need to measure real- world performance rather than using tests (which are nec- essarily less rigorous than actual job performance), you like- ly need a more rigorous design process. The lower right section shows a situation where the need for skill mastery is high but there is less of a need to meas- ure real world performance. When the need for skill mas- tery is low and the most important thing to measure is attendance, design effort can, and often should, be quite low. It’s important to understand that the choice of design methodology isn’t an all or nothing proposition. You can use rapid instructional design for portions of a course or curriculum, even if it isn’t appropriate for the entire course or curriculum. Instructional objectives for a given course are typically a mix of lower- and upper-tier objectives. So, Figure 3-4 Mapping design effort to for example, for a business ethics course, you might use a rapid instructional design approach for an need for skill mastery and overview and a lesson on ethics terminology. And you could use a more rigorous approach to build measurement scenario-based lessons. Time sensitivity In addition to the level of the instructional objectives and the need for skill mastery, time sensitivi- ty plays a key part in the choice of design approach. Some training (or information) is needed yes- terday, or has a short shelf life. In this kind of situation it’s better to deliver useful training or infor- mation now than to deliver optimal training too late. An approach often used successfully when con- tent is time sensitive but not disposable, is to use a rapid instructional design approach now, and use a traditional instructional design approach to deliver more optimal training later. An example of using the two instructional design approaches in tandem is training needed for a major application change in the organization. You can use rapid instructional design to provide pre- launch information, while you can use a more traditional approach to develop task-based training and performance support for the long run. Traditional and rapid design steps In this section, I’ll discuss the steps of traditional and rapid instructional design so you can see the similarities and differences, and more importantly, how you can apply these steps to different train- ing projects. Even if all factors point to a need for a more rigorous (traditional) instructional design process, you can and should learn a great deal from rapid instructional design practices to speed up traditional design. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 32
  • 48. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 Traditional and rapid analysis In traditional instructional design, the training process commonly begins with gathering informa- tion. Table 3-6 shows a list of questions commonly used to determine what direction to take. Even if timeframes are short, it typically pays to begin by gathering a minimum of information to focus de- sign efforts. The bolded questions are often useful for a rapid instructional design project. If the answers to these questions indicate that there are too few resources (content, time, etc.) or the de- sired outcomes cannot be produced using a rapid approach, it’s time to negotiate with the person who wants this done about what can be done with these resources and this approach, or what ap- proach is needed to obtain the desired results. Table 3-7 on page 34 shows an example of a rapid analysis completed in response to a request for training so you can see what a rapid analysis might consist of. Analysis takes time. When you need to deliver information or instruction “yesterday,” some feel that analysis is expendable. (And occasionally they are correct.) Others suffer from “analysis paraly- sis” and never feel they have enough information. Waiting to have every last detail is a problem when information needs to get out quickly. There’s a fine line between gathering enough information to improve the odds of success and taking too much time. Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven ways to gain information quickly. Some may not be appropriate in all situations and a combination of ways is often the most helpful in any given situation. Table 3-6 • Develop and use an analysis template to guide the analysis process • Use an online survey tool (such Traditional analysis questions as SurveyMonkey.com) to gather data Analyze what? Typical questions • Develop a short analysis from Goals What problem needs fixing? Why? what you already know, and What are the most critical outcomes for this project? then ask key stakeholders to Who are the primary stakeholders for this project? edit it What specific indicators will they use to measure success (cost, quality, time)? • Find information in places How is the content used in the real world (on the job)? outside of peoples’ heads, such as company reports, e-mails, Learners Who are the learners for this instruction? Any special needs? etc. What are their goals for this instruction? • Not designing any training What do I need to know about the learners when developing these materials (age, language, disabilities, educational level, computer literacy and skills, (and doing something else like access, location)? developing job aids or nothing) What do these learners already know? is one of your options What support will they need to be successful? Traditional and rapid design and Resources When does it need to be completed? development Is content already available? In what format? Is a content expert available to help? Once adequate analysis is com- What existing resources are available (people, skills, time, budget, software, plete (adequate means there is content)? enough information to justify the What organizational constraints are in place for this project? approach taken and the resources When and where does the instruction need to be delivered? to use), design and development What delivery technologies can be used? typically gets underway. Table 3-8 Do learners already know how to use these technologies? on page 35 shows a list of tradi- tional design and development The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 33
  • 49. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 steps (and the questions that you must answer in each step). You check the C column if you typically perform this step for classroom training design and development, and the E column if this step is typically performed for e-Learning design and development. Rapid instructional design commonly reduces design and development steps and uses tools that facilitate building content and assessments (if needed) very quickly. The steps used in the design and development phase for rapid instructional design may vary, but it is typical to eliminate all but steps 1–3, and 9. Content development often takes a great deal of time, so rapid instructional design is best used when content is available or easily obtained. Lack of available content (and people who can develop and evaluate it) is one of the single biggest risk factors associated with rapid instructional design. That’s why it’s CRITICAL, before taking on a rapid instructional design project, that you make sure that adequate content is available, or that you will be able to obtain it. Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven ways to speed up design and development. Some ways may not be appropriate in all situations, and a combination of ways may Table 3-7 be most helpful in any given situa- tion. Rapid analysis for approved time-off training • Teach content experts how to Approved time-off training do part or all of the work (it’s There is confusion about what constitutes approved and unapproved time off, not rocket science; they can Problem and some managers and staff are interpreting the policy inaccurately. learn). Needed Employees and managers will be able to tell the difference between approved • Find information that is al- outcomes and unapproved time off, and will be able to list the steps for requesting and ready available and can be using time off. repurposed (PowerPoint pre- Delivery date Delivered October 15 – 26 (10 days until delivery) sentations, reports, documents, Available The employee policy manuals will provide the bulk of the content. This is avail- e-mails, etc.). content able in electronic format. Judith will be available to develop and approve con- tent. • Develop and use content forms Available Company computers have IE 6.0, Flash 7 Player, Adobe PDF Reader, audio. and let content experts fill technologies Training department has MS PowerPoint, Articulate Presenter, and Adobe them in. Acrobat. • Have content experts fill con- Work plan Work plan When Who tent into page templates. Give time-off content form to Judith Friday (today) Carlos I will describe the last two ways and locate available content to speed content development in Review content form and existing Monday Judith, Carlos more detail next. content Determine learning objectives Monday Judith, Carlos Content Forms Build content and assessment Tuesday - Carlos Since the content-experts’ time questions Thursday is almost always at a premium, and Review content and assessments Thursday Judith they often do not know what con- Revise content and assessments Friday Carlos tent is needed, it helps to provide Sign-off on content and assessments Monday Judith, Carlos them with forms that help them Sign-off on training Wednesday Judith, Carlos, focus on the elements you need. Sandy Developers often use forms to Test internal, fix Thursday-Friday Marti, Felix, Carlos gain content for the following ele- Delivery Monday, ments: October 15 – • Introduction Friday 26 • Content text and critical points The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 34
  • 50. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 • Examples and non-examples • Quiz questions • Next steps • Wrap-up Table 3-9 on page 36 shows an example of a content form used by a training developer to get tar- geted content from a content expert. Helping content experts to focus on specific pieces of content is less frustrating and gets to key content faster, a very critical outcome for rapid instructional design. Table 3-8 Slide templates Typical design and development steps Having content experts enter C E Step Questions answered content directly into a more or less 1. Define instructional What will the learner will be able to DO as a result of final delivery format makes rapid objectives instruction? How does this content get used in the real instructional design even faster world? than getting content from them, 2. Gather content Is there existing content? Is it in a useful form? Do we need more or a different format? What content experts and then building the training will help us? Do they have the time needed? materials. There are some caveats 3. Determine content, How will achievement of learning objectives be about this approach. Content activities, assess- assessed? What activities are needed for practice? experts may need help with: ments, and support What content is needed to support the activities? For e-Learning, what media and tools will be used to sup- • determining objectives; port content, activities, and assessments? What types • mapping content to objectives; of support will learners need to be successful? • determining what content is 4. Determine interface What look and feel is needed? How will learners enter critical; and screen design and get around? What standards should we adopt for: • Page and site structure and navigation • being concise; • Backgrounds and graphical elements • writing, spelling, and grammar; • Colors • Text-font, color, size, word usage • sequencing; • writing assessment items. 5. Develop a prototype What snippet of content, activities, and assessments should we develop in order to gain feedback from stake- Many people in the training or holders before starting full scale development? instructional design field don’t 6. Perform formative eval- What changes are needed to the interface and screen think that content experts can uation on prototype design, content, activities, and assessments? (It is cheaper to catch problems and mistakes before instruc- develop adequate instructional tion goes live!) content. Whether you feel that way 7. Flowchart/storyboard How will we describe content, activities, and assess- or not (I don’t), making content ments so content experts can review content prior to development the exclusive domain development? How will we describe content, activities, and assessments so developers know what we want? of trainers or instructional design- 8. Perform formative eval- What changes are needed to the content, activities, and ers often creates bottlenecks, forces uation on storyboard assessments before full development commences? content experts to go around esta- 9. Complete design Develop learner and instructor materials (if needed), blished procedures, and potentially including content, activities, assessments, presentation lowers access to instruction. A bet- materials, etc. ter plan is to provide content ex- perts with good templates to use (that embed part of the instructional design process within them) and train them in how to use them to design good instructional content! These ideas often help content experts to enter content directly: • Providing preformatted PowerPoint templates (which can be brought into a Web conferencing system or narrated and output as a Flash object) • Allowing editing of specific content (often referred to as “editable regions”) on Web pages with a The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 35
  • 51. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 tool such as Adobe Dreamweaver or Contribute • Providing access to simple-to-use authoring tools and templates in content management systems The first step, when using the templates approach, is to develop a list of slide types. If you look at the Slide Design templates in PowerPoint, you’ll get a good idea of how this works. Here are com- mon types of slides for instructional use: main page (course title), course introduction, objectives, topic introduction, text and bullets, text and image, quiz question(s), and wrap-up. Your needs may vary, so this list may need a little or a lot of tweaking. A good next step is to develop a graphic “look and feel” for these pages (slides, Web pages, document pages, etc.). To give you an idea of what slide type templates might look like, Table 3-10 on page 37 shows a few PowerPoint slide type templates. A graphic look for each slide type is defined, as is the type of information that goes on each slide. Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven techniques for reducing design and development time. • Make sure you have a commitment for content expert time in advance. • Use content forms to help content experts provide just the content you need. • Make sure other needed resources (applications, tools, etc.) are available as expected. • Make sure the project is doable in the time frame before committing to it. • Develop a clear project plan that includes tasks, responsibilities, and due dates. • Use a central electronic repository for project files. • Agree on a version control method and assure that all team members follow it. • Have regular check-in meetings, by phone, audio, or Web conference. • Manage iterations and scope creep. Traditional and rapid implementation Implementation isn’t much different for traditional instructional design and rapid instructional design. The goal in implementation is to notify learners that the materials are ready to use, and to work out the inevitable kinks that occur. Two tried and true methods used by trainers to get people to “attend” training, and ways to be prepared for the kinks are described next. Announcements You can use announcements to make sure that people know in advance that the instructional materials are going to available and how to access them. Organizations promote learning in a variety Table 3-9 of ways, including direct e-mail or training department newsletters. A key stakeholder, or each learn- er’s supervisor, often announces and requests participation in Example content form for content expert especially critical instruction. to fill out WIIFMs Topic Key points Screen captures People are busy, and no matter how valuable the topic Why the new application there are often competing priorities. It’s a good idea to pro- is being implemented vide a compelling rationale for the instruction and provide How it will speed up trav- some clear WIIFMs (what’s in it for me) when describing the el expense processing session. A clear and compelling title is also important. For Key features example “Market Changes” is probably not going to be as How to use the online help system compelling a title as “How to Exploit Market Changes to How to get help Improve Your Sales.” If your Learning Management System (LMS) lists many The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 36
  • 52. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 courses, and there’s a possibility of the training getting lost in a list, consider using criticality or shelf- life icons or keywords to show which sessions need immediate attention. Make instruction as convenient as possible. Consider timing for synchronous events. Determine if you will need to archive synchronous sessions so those who cannot attend can view it. Figure out ways to make instruction work for as many people as possible. Working out the kinks Even if you do a lot of testing before implementation, kinks are inevitable because it’s impossible to test the materials under every possible condition. So be prepared, and assign people to do tech Table 3-10 support on the course. Include a phone number or e-mail so technical problems can be resolved. And keep a log of real problems so you know to test them on future PowerPoint slide-type templates courses. 1. Title 4. Definition Traditional and rapid evaluation Formative evaluation used throughout design and develop- ment helps to determine if the instruction itself needs improve- ments or adjustments. You should- n’t wait until the materials devel- opment is complete to test them. It’s easier, less time consuming, and less expensive to make adjust- 2. Introduction 5. Scenario ments before instructional materi- als are completed. For e-Learning, doing this kind of evaluation all along the way may save you from a disaster. Formative evaluation, especially for e-Learning, should involve testing for: • content accuracy, • content sequencing, • interaction and feedback ade- quacy, 3. Objectives 6. Scenario answer • look and feel, • site navigation, and • broken links and interactions. You use summative evaluation after the instructional materials are completed and learners start to use them in order to determine if the instruction meets the goals set out for it. Donald Kirkpatrick developed the classic summative evaluation The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 37
  • 53. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 model in 1975. It purports to evaluate the course or program at four levels. (I say purports because it can do so to a greater or lesser extent depending on how well the evaluation is done.) Table 3-11 shows typical evaluation questions to be answered at each level, and indicators that can be used to answer those questions. Rapid evaluation typically measures only reactions and learning because you should use rapid instructional design for lower-tier instructional objectives and content that is disposable. Sometimes, especially for informational content, nothing other than “attendance” is measured. Don’t feel that you aren’t a real trainer or instructional content developer if you don’t do in-depth evaluation of each and every project. You have limited time and resources, and to use these effectively you should save in-depth evaluation for the kinds of training that fall into the rigorous and less rigorous boxes shown in Figure 3-4 on page 32. Formative evaluation can take a lot of time, so it’s important to plan reviews (in the work plan) and to limit the number of review iterations that occur if you’re trying to get a rapidly designed course completed quickly. You should check all instructional content for: • ease-of-use, • content clarity and accuracy, • all elements working as expected, and • navigation and broken links. If you want honest (and quick) feedback, round up a few members of the intended audience to look through the materials. Content experts should review the content for accuracy, but they often are not as good as general learners at providing input on ease-of-use, clarity, things working as expected, and navigation. Making evaluation quicker involves determining which elements are most critical for the project and limiting evaluation methods to those which you really need. Summative evaluation for rapid instructional design is limited to level 1 or 2, in most cases. Whether using a traditional or rapid approach, here are some proven techniques for getting what you need from evaluation without bogging down. • Reuse and tweak practice elements as assessments. Table 3-11 • Build in ways to gauge if the desired results were achieved Evaluation questions and indicators (surveys, quizzes, learner opin- Level Measures Primary question answered Typical indicators ions). 1 Reaction How do learners feel about • Satisfaction or attitude scores • Use LMS quiz functionality to the instruction? • Completion rates speed up the quiz development 2 Learning Did learners achieve the • Test scores and analysis process. learning objectives? • Skill performance • Don’t consider doing level 3 • Progress along specified learning path (e.g., certification, job paths) and 4 evaluations unless the 3 Transfer Can learners apply the Job performance (e.g., calls per minute, results will be truly valuable knowledge and skills to the medication errors, completed claims) and used for making impor- job? tant decisions. 4 Results What is the impact of Business performance indicators, such as • Ready for radical? Go out and improved knowledge and cost savings (e.g., reduced travel expenses, skills on the organization? reduced administrative costs) quality watch learners use what they improvements (e.g., improved satisfaction, learned. reduced cycle time, help-calls reduction), and increased sales (e.g., increased orders, reorders) The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 38
  • 54. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 Tools for traditional instructional design A discussion of the development tools that you can use for traditional and rapid instructional design could be a chapter in itself. I’ll describe a few of my favorites here, but I don’t mean it to be exhaustive. If you are getting started with instructional authoring, a good first step might be to pur- chase Training Media Review’s (http://www.tmreview.com/) newly updated authoring report (full disclosure: I wrote the introduction and write authoring tool reviews for them) and then download trial versions of the ones that seem most promising for your situation and play. Some of the tools that allow you to build meaningful practice and feedback include Trivantis® Lectora® (http://www.trivantis.com/), KnowledgePlanet™ Firefly® (http://www.knowledgeplanet. com/products/developer.asp), Flashform™ (http://www.rapidintake.com/flashform_index.htm), Captivate™ (http://www.adobe.com/products/captivate/), and TechSmith® Camtasia® (http:// www.techsmith.com/camtasia.asp). I personally love Lectora because it is so full-featured, and also regularly use Captivate to build applications and simple soft-skills simulations. Tools for rapid instructional design My main objection to rapid development tools (which has little to do with the tools themselves) is that users want to believe that they are “the answer” for all instructional authoring. Sorry, they aren’t. When you need instruction to provide truly meaningful practice you should either blend rapidly- built content with other instructional elements (in person or online) or use more complex tools with more functionality. Tools that allow you to build and deploy content very quickly by converting PowerPoint slides (with or without narration), such as Articulate Presenter (http://www.articulate.com/), Present- ationPro (http://presentationpro.com/), and Microsoft Producer (http:// www.microsoft.com/ office/powerpoint/producer/prodinfo/default.mspx), work extremely well at the information end of the continuum, and as part of the elements for instruction. A few other tools that you can use for rapid development and deployment include applications that facilitate online Web or audio conferencing such as Elluminate® (http://www.elluminate.com/), Acrobat® Connect (http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobatconnect/), or GoToMeeting® (https:// www.gotomeeting.com/). Microsoft Word® documents can be “saved as” HTML pages (FileSave asWeb Page) or can be converted to Web pages using a tool like WordtoWeb™ (http://www.solu- tionsoft.com/w2w.htm). Quick interaction-building tools such as Raptivity™ (http://www.raptivity. com/) are also extremely useful, alone or with other tools. Putting it all together You may have noticed one specific theme that runs throughout this chapter. Rather than seeing selection of design strategy as either/or propositions, see them as choices made to best meet learner and organizational needs. That is, you can use a combination of instruction and information, class- room, online, and real life, synchronous and asynchronous, and traditional and rapid instructional design to improve training outcomes. Here is a situation that I hope will show how different design strategies can coexist happily togeth- er to meet learner and organizational needs. Fairfield Company is an organization that franchises quickie photo shops. They have grown very fast, and are having a hard time training franchisees because the need for training has outstripped their ability to provide it. Franchisees typically came to the home office to learn how to find and build-out a location, how to hire and manage staff, handle financials, and run their shops. The cur- rent level of growth means that Fairfield’s training program has franchisees in the home office every The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 39
  • 55. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 Table 3-12 Design strategies selected for Fairfield’s franchisee training process Design Fairfield’s design strategies Tools and technologies strategy choices Instruction Pre-onsite instruction will assure that franchisees come to the home office having successfully Pre and post: Print materials with completed the following modules: online multiple-choice tests • Fairfield history • Finding a good location Bi-weekly updates: Articulate • Franchisee success factors Presenter narrated PowerPoint • Photo shop success factors modules with links to download- able print documents as needed Onsite instruction will include the following topics: • Internet basics (as needed) Conference call • Building out your shop • Permits, licenses, and insurance • Selecting and buying merchandise • Use and troubleshooting of equipment • Opening your store • Dealing with customers • Legal aspects of hiring, managing, and training staff • Managing your store • Marketing your store • Store financials Post-onsite instruction will reinforce major points from onsite instruction and help them plan for their opening and beyond. It will include the following topics: • We want you to be successful • Getting local publicity for your store • Hiring staff • Training staff • Making customers happy • Reading and interpreting financial statements Bi-weekly updates on product changes, legal and management aspects, etc. Monthly conference call prior to store opening (in all time zones) for support and QA Information The franchisee manual, provided during the onsite instruction will include: Print and downloadable print • Home office staff, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses documents • Store build-out documents • Insurance documents • Product documentation • Equipment documentation • Human resource documents • Order forms • Training materials used during onsite instruction • Training materials for staff Updates to the manual provided during bi-weekly training modules Classroom Onsite training is classroom based, with lots of time for in-depth QA and ability to talk with successful 3 simulated stores (real, not franchisees electronic) Online Pre- and post-onsite instruction to be print based (downloadable PDFs) with online multiple-choice tests Online multiple-choice tests Discussion forums will be online Online asynchronous discussion forums Real life New franchisees will spend 1-3 days working in 1-3 successful stores for the purpose of learning behind-the-sceen ropes and gaining mentors who they can contact after their store opens. Asynchronous Pre- and post-instruction and bi-weekly updates will be asynchronous. Online asynchronous discussion Online asynchronous discussion boards will be used for franchisees to ask questions, share success stories, and support each other. forums This will be monitored by the the VP of Franchisee Communications, who will also answer questions and get additional help for franchisees as needed. Synchronous Synchronous conference calls will provide support and help. Conference call Traditional A traditional instructional design approach will be used for onsite training and for pre- and post- instruction instructional materials. design Rapid A rapid instructional design approach will be used for monthly updates. Conference calls will have instruction an agenda but require no instructional design effort. design The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 40
  • 56. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 week of the year, and they still aren’t able to keep up with the demand. And they have noticed that existing training doesn’t have enough impact on franchisees behaviors, once their stores are open. Fairfield analyzed their situation with the help of a learning consultant and built a training plan, part of which is in Table 3-12 on page 40, which describes how various design strategies will help them meet their training needs. Some final comments on instructional design Not long ago, I was openly critical of most instructional authoring tools, preferring instead to use and recommend general Web development tools and programming, because they provided maxi- mum flexibility. In the last few years, instructional authoring tools have become much more full-fea- tured, and I’m no longer advising that instructional designers and others who aren’t primarily devel- opment geeks use general Web development tools. This is because general Web development tools require too much learning curve for far too little extra gain. I am still advising that before you purchase any tools, you do an analysis to determine what the tools need to produce. Remember that exercise bike in your basement that has turned into a clothes drying rack? You don’t want to replicate that experience with authoring tools, right? So start with a plan, and match design strategies to the needs of learners and your organization. Just as classroom training is rarely the best answer for all training needs, e-Learning is rarely the answer to all training needs. I’m assuming that you have limited time and money and need to use your time wisely. Rapid design approaches and rapid design tools can help you do just that. And dare I say it? — Many training projects do not merit a ton of effort. But when job skills are critical, and inadequate skills is not an option, use a more rigorous approach. Although I didn’t add “perform- ance support” to the mix of design strategy decisions in this chapter, it’s a non-training approach to job performance that needs far more use than it gets. Conclusions I hope this chapter provided you with some insights about selecting design strategies for online and blended instruction. Here are the most critical conclusions I came to when writing this chapter. • Select design strategies based on their attributes and their ability to positively impact individual, group, department, and organizational performance. • Traditional instructional design isn’t very efficient for getting instruction out quickly. When skills mastery, and evidence of real-life skill, are needed a more rigorous design approach is warranted and should be used. • Rapid instructional design is much more efficient than traditional instructional design for pro- ducing instruction. It is often a good strategy for lower-level instructional objectives, and when there simply is no time for using a traditional instructional design process. It probably should not be the only online learning strategy you use. • Consider adopting or adapting some of rapid instructional design’s approaches to increasing the speed of traditional instructional design. • Don’t make design (or technology) strategy decisions that box you in. New tools and technolo- gies are always around the corner. • There is no such thing as the “right” authoring tool or the “right” approach. You need different tools and approaches for different purposes. • You don’t need an equal amount of effort for all training projects. “Good enough” is often exactly what’s needed. Good enough is often just fine. (And even if it isn’t, it has to be, because there are never enough resources to go around.) The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 41
  • 57. D E S I G N S T R AT E G I E S F O R O N L I N E A N D B L E N D E D L E A R N I N G | C H A P T E R 3 • Combine classroom, online, and real life to gain the benefits of each, and to mitigate the chal- lenges of each. To Learn More Benjamin S. Bloom, Bertram B. Mesia, and David R. Krathwohl (1964). Taxonomy of Educational Objectives. New York. David McKay. Dick, Q., Carey, L., Carey, J.O. (2000). The Systematic Design of Instruction. Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Allyn Bacon. Merrill, D.M. (2002). First Principles of Instruction. Educational Technology Research Development (ETRD), 50(3), 43-59. Available: http://www.indiana.edu/~tedfrick/aect2002/firstprinciples- bymerrill.pdf Rossett, A. (1999). First things fast: A Handbook for performance analysis. San Francisco: Jossey- Bass/Pfeiffer. Smith, P. Ragan, T. (1999). Instructional Design, 2e. New York: John Wiley Sons. Thiagarajan, S., Tips for Rapid Instructional Design. Online at http://www.thiagi.com/rid.html and article: http://www.thiagi.com/article-rid.html Tripp, S. D., Bichelmeyer, B. (1990). Rapid protoyping: An alternative instructional design strategy. Educational Technology, Research and Development, 38(1), 31-44. Van Merriënboer, J. J. G., Clark, R. E., De Croock, M. B. M. (2002). Blueprints for complex learn- ing: The 4C/ID-model. Educational Technology, Research and Development, 50(2), 39-64. Available online http://www.ou.nl/otecresearch/publications/Jeroen%20van%20Merrienboer/Jeroen%20 vanMerrienboer%20etrd.pdf Learning Peaks’ resource database: http://del.icio.us/learningpoeaks Recommended books: http://www.learningpeaks.com/books.html The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 42
  • 58. Success Story Texas Engineering Extension Service Leading training provider accelerates creating content for homeland security curriculum using Adobe® FrameMaker ® software, XML, and DITA Texas Engineering Extension Right training, right response Service Proper training is crucial when responding to emergency situations. For re ghters, police o cers, www.teex.com homeland security agents, and others protecting the public, the Texas Engineering Extension Service (TEEX) o ers renowned training and education programs via its Texas headquarters to locations worldwide. Every year, more than 175,000 people participate in TEEX programs, gaining the skills to respond safely and successfully. In Partnership With With more than 550 programs in areas ranging from homeland security to health and safety, Integrated Technologies, Inc. TEEX serves a range of clients in the public and private sectors. At the core of TEEX programs are www.intech.com comprehensive education manuals developed by content specialists and leaders in emergency Industry response, public safety, and other disciplines. Training and Education Services “Our materials include everything from 400-page manuals to quick-reference data sheets,” says Trey Challenges McCallie, manager of curriculum services at TEEX. “Regardless of the document, we have to know • Integrate authoring processes with that content is accurate and up-to-date.” To build a dynamic document authoring environment, backend systems TEEX is using powerful so ware, including Adobe FrameMaker and a Siberlogic content • Adopt industry standards such as management system (CMS). e company is also working with solutions provider Integrated XML and DITA Technologies for training and consulting services. Solution • Single-source publishing Too many processes and tools TEEX is using Adobe FrameMaker TEEX customers work in highly regulated industries, where changes to protocol can happen every and a content management system few months. ese changes have to be re ected in training materials. With hundreds of courses to streamline creation of hundreds across business units, the demands on the 60 employees in the Curriculum Development group are of training manuals in accordance intense. To further complicate the process, TEEX had no standard authoring tool, with some sta with DITA speci cations. using Microso Word so ware and others using Adobe FrameMaker. Results • Accelerated creating manuals by as “It was di cult to implement e ective quality control processes across groups, and we couldn’t easily much as 25% leverage work done by each person,” explains McCallie. “Our goal was to deploy a system that enabled • Reduced costs to update manuals us to produce higher-quality, more consistent manuals that contained reusable content.” • Improved quality and consistency of materials Single-source publishing • Enabled e ective reuse of content In looking for a document authoring tool, TEEX wanted to address several criteria, including across manuals support for standards like XML and the Darwin Information Typing Architecture (DITA); reliable • Adopted industry standards to handling of long documents; easy integration with a CMS; and the ability to reuse content. support long-term growth “We needed a single-source publishing model that leveraged XML data in our CMS,” says McCallie. Systems At A Glance “ is would make it easier to quickly create customized manuals for clients. And by working in a • Adobe FrameMaker structured environment, we could improve the quality and consistency of materials.” • Adobe Acrobat® Professional • Platform: Microsoft® Windows® One tool, multiple advantages 2003 Server and PCs running e Curriculum Development group’s largest team used Adobe FrameMaker 7.1, as well as newer Microsoft Windows XP versions of the so ware, and was impressed by the application’s ability to handle long
  • 59. With Adobe FrameMaker software, TEEX’s Curriculum Development group has an enterprise publishing solution for authoring and delivering highly customized manuals for clients. The Adobe software makes it easy to reuse content across materials and enables the group to leverage standards like XML and DITA for streamlined document creation. “Adobe FrameMaker mapped documents. “Adobe FrameMaker mapped nicely to our demands for an enterprise publishing nicely to our demands for an solution,” explains McCallie. “Its ability to manage long documents is outstanding. Plus, its structured environment and support for standards give us the control and access we need.” enterprise publishing solution. Its ability to manage long By using Adobe FrameMaker, TEEX can provide document type de nition (DTD) templates documents is outstanding. Plus, readily accessible to more than 40 curriculum content developers. As a result, the nal training its structured environment and manuals have a more professional, polished appearance because how and where content appears is consistent, regardless of the sta that creates them. support for standards give us the control and access we need.” “With FrameMaker, we have better control over the layout and overall look of manuals,” says Trey McCallie, McCallie. “ ere’s also a boost in employee productivity because our content specialists are free Curriculum services manager, to focus on writing and editing text, not on learning how to be page-layout experts.” TEEX Tremendous e ciency gains e structured authoring environment delivers the added advantage of enabling TEEX to better leverage XML content in its Siberlogic CMS. For example, blocks of information in XML can be used and reused at the paragraph level, allowing curriculum developers to take frequently used safety processes and guidelines and insert them automatically into the appropriate pages. “ is is a tremendous e ciency gain for our sta ,” says McCallie. “Now, we can revise and reuse content easily across manuals, and then automatically insert it everywhere it needs to appear. e e ciencies could accelerate creating manuals by as much as 25%.” For More Information By adopting FrameMaker and accessing DITA FrameMaker plug-ins from Integrated Technologies, www.adobe.com/products/framemaker/ TEEX is taking advantage of document architecture speci cations outlined in DITA. “As an XML-based architecture for authoring, producing, and delivering technical information, DITA For OnDemand eSeminars makes it easier for TEEX to reuse content and then deliver nal documents to recipients,” says www.adobe.com/go/techcom_eseminars Tom Aldous, president of Integrated Technologies, Inc. For most TEEX manuals, converting documents to Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) les for printing is the nal step in getting manuals ready for clients. In some cases, teams of TEEX reviewers will use electronic commenting tools in Adobe Acrobat Professional so ware to add comments to dra s of manuals in PDF. Because it deals with many consultants, TEEX nds it useful to add security and control to manuals in Adobe PDF. e documents in PDF can be password protected to limit access to materials, and information in les can be locked to prevent recipients from altering underlying content. A long-term solution “Using FrameMaker so ware, we integrated our front-end authoring with our back end systems,” says McCallie. “At the same time, we put standards in place that will streamline our work for years to come.” Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and FrameMaker are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States Adobe Systems Incorporated and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or 345 Park Avenue other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95009435 07/07 R
  • 60. ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4 CHAPTER 4 Marketing and Change Management for e-Learning: Strategies for Engaging Learning, Motivating Managers, and Energizing Organizations By Lance Dublin J ust over 20 years ago global corporations spent $51B on re-engineering, a management approach that promised significant cost savings and operational efficiencies, a dramatic reduction in time- to-market, and exponentially accelerating profits. (Sounds a good deal like what organizations expect from e-Learning, doesn’t it?). “Forget all you know; don’t automate, obliterate,” was just one of the mantras. Organizational challenges were to “think out of the box” and to leverage technology to do what they had never been able to do before – to not just improve their businesses or make them bet- ter, but to transform them. But, after just five years people seldom mentioned re-engineering. And, if it was mentioned at all, the connations were negative. The term re-engineering had become synonymous with re-structuring and downsizing, lay-offs, and failed programs. More than half of early re-engineering projects failed to be completed, or did not achieve bottom-line business results. How did this happen? What caused re-engineering to, in effect, fail? Necessary, but not sufficient The answer, it turned out, was very simple, and captured in one word: people. Organizations could design significantly better business processes and configure technology solutions to support them. Although necessary, they were not sufficient to ensure the success of the re-engineering project. Re- engineering projects failed because the people impacted just didn’t want to be “re-engineered;” they did not want this change done to them. The 1994 CSC Index “State of Re-engineering Report” con- firmed this when it reported that over 50% of the companies participating in the study reported the most difficult part of re-engineering was dealing with the fear and anxiety in their organization. (Editor's Note: CSC Index was a management consulting firm that specialized in business process re- Contents engineering in the 1990's.) In another re-engineering post-mortem bench- In Chapter 2 you will find information about: marking study with 150 companies over 24 months, lack of effective • Getting the “Soft Stuff” right change management ranked as one of the top five key lessons. • Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds It was Mike Hammer, the re-engineering guru himself who best sum- • Consumer Marketing: People want to buy, not be sold marized this critical lesson with the phrase; “The ‘soft’ stuff is really the • Change Implementation: Awareness, engagement, ‘hard’ stuff.” And you can now find this phrase repeatedly in article after and commitment article and presentation after presentation about the real challenges in implementing any technology-based change. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 45
  • 61. ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4 Getting the “Soft Stuff” right Having great technology, the best content, and sound instructional design is certainly necessary for the success of any e-Learning initiative. But, even taken together, they are not sufficient to ensure success. To ensure success with e-Learning, organizations must get the “soft” stuff right; they must engage learners, motivate managers and energize their organization. (See the quote in Sidebar 4-1.) Truly successful organizations use a systems-based implementation strategy founded on principles of change management, consumer marketing, and communications. And they follow a detailed change implementation plan – with defined activities, timetables, and resources – based on proven techniques and approaches drawn from these disciplines. Change Management: Winning the hearts and minds E-Learning of any type is a change. Even though it may be as simple as replacing an instructor-led class with an online course or an Excel-based spreadsheet with an LMS, it still is a change in the or- ganization. It’s a change to employees, to front-line supervisors, to mid-managers, to senior manage- ment, and to all the staff in supporting organizations. Employees used to having time away from their desks and their work, and preferring to spend that time with colleagues and instructors, often resent having to learn on their own time and “from a computer.” Trainers who feel valued for their platform skills and content knowledge often feel threatened that they will be “replaced” by e-Learn- ing. Managers, who have always controlled the access to training, often feel undermined when their employees can learn any time and from any where. And often the organization as a whole is neither aware of, engaged in, or supportive of the e-Learning initiative – nor even understands why it should be. It is not organizations that change, however. People change; employees, managers, colleagues, part- ners, suppliers, customers. And, they change one person at a time. By applying the discipline of change management the chances of success increase dramatically. Change management is the combi- nation of processes, activities, and approaches that manage the people of the organization through the transition from the old way of doing things to the new way, from the old way of training to e-Learning. Change management is about communication and exchange, dialogue and questions, leadership and support. The focus of change management is on attitudes and behaviors and the Sidebar 4-1 objective is to win the battle for the “hearts and minds” of the people – all of the people – within the organization. Building systems users want to use There already exists a tremendous body of knowledge “Our findings suggest that user commitment and motivation are criti- about change, transitions, and change management. The fol- cal not only for adoption of new information and communication technologies but also for their sustained use.” lowing three concepts are particularly important to under- stand. Yogesh Malhotra, Assistant Professor of Management First is the concept of transitions. William Bridges, noted Information and Decision Sciences, Syracuse University Whitman School of Management, Syracuse, NY. authority on change and change management said it best, “It isn’t the changes that do you in, it’s the transitions.” Accord- Dennis Galletta, Professor of Business Administration, ing to Bridges there are three stages in the transition process: Fox School of Business and Management endings, the neutral zone, and beginnings. Temple University, Philadelphia, PA. Communications of the ACM, Endings Volume 47, Number 12 (2004), Pages 88-94. Applied to e-Learning, replacement of instructor-led train- “Building systems that users want to use” ing and all that that means is often seen as the “ending.” Online at http://www.kmnetwork.com/ITUseCACM.html Learners, trainers, and managers are inclined to try to hold The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 46
  • 62. ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4 on to the “old-ways.” But, by applying change management techniques they can begin to let go of this past, and have the confidence and support to at least move into their “neutral zone.” They might not yet be “gung-ho” but at least they are willing to give it a try. And, most importantly, it will set the stage for positive new beginnings that e-Learning can represent for them and the organization. The neutral zone Second is the concept of change as a “journey” from one place to another, as opposed to a series of events. Psychologists Dennis Jaffe, Cynthia Scott, and Glenn Tobe developed an excellent model for this based on their work and the work of noted psychiatrist, Elisabeth Kubler-Ross. Learners making the transition to e-Learning find themselves going through a four-phase change journey; Phase 1 – Denial; Phase 2 – Resistance; Phase 3 – Exploration; and Phase 4 – Commitment. A well designed change-implementation strategy ensures all the people in the organization are supported through the early phases of denial and resistance, so their frustrations and discomfort with the “new way” don’t overwhelm them. It enables them to then explore what e-Learning can offer them that is posi- tive and, over time, ensures they will become as committed to e-Learning as they have been with any other change in their lives. Beginnings The third concept is leverage. It is impossible to have one-on-one conversations with all of the people impacted by an e-Learning initiative. So, who are the right people to focus on, and how many really need attention? Everett M. Rogers laid the groundwork in this area with his landmark “diffu- sion of innovation theory.” He determined that people, when confronted with a new innovation (i.e., change), fall into six distinct groups – innovators, early adopters, early majority, late majority, late adopters, and laggards – in a bell-shaped dispersion pattern. The group having the greatest influence and providing the most leverage for ensuring the success of the change long-term is the early adop- ters. Although they represent only 20% of the total they represent what author Malcolm Gladwell termed, “the tipping point.” They are the respected opinion leaders in an organization who adopt new ideas early but carefully. And so once they accept the change, the significantly larger groups of the early and late majority will eventually follow. Consumer marketing: People want to buy, not be sold Another discipline that is important to apply to ensuring the success of any e-Learning initiative is consumer marketing. The goal of consumer marketing is quite simple: attract and retain customers. And, at its best, it builds mutually satisfying long-term relationships. In recent years, researchers have established that brand and positioning are the critical components of a consumer marketing pro- gram. Technically, a brand is the “combination of symbols, words, or designs that differentiate one com- pany’s product from another company’s product.” But, branding is not just about aesthetics. Brand- ing is about guiding perceptions and answering the question, “Why should I do business with you?” Why is branding important in e-Learning? Branding is what initially engages learners and then keeps them coming back. It’s what re-assures managers and excites the organization. Bottom-line, it succinctly communicates the value of e-Learning to create learner preference, generate management support, and ensure organizational commitment. Branding typically includes a unique logo, fonts, and color palette as well as a tag-line. The logo, with its unique font and colors, is the memorable image that represents the e-Learning program or initiative. And the tag-line is the short phrase that captures the essence of it. These are some excellent examples of the power of branding in e-Learning: The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 47
  • 63. ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4 Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts uses “e-Knowledge Suite” as the brand for their e-Learning por- tal. Their tag-line is “Check in 24/7; Check out A Unique Learning Experience.” Four Seasons’ colors, fonts, and graphics are used throughout the portal site, and within each e-Learning course. John Muir Health brands their e-Learning portal the “Learning Point” with the tag-line, “The Go- To Place.” They have developed a distinctive look and feel around a custom logo and color palette that appears on the portal site and within each e-Learning course. Sheetz Corporation brands their e-Learning portal, “Z-Force” with the tag-line, “Empowering the People of Sheetz Through Learning.” They also have developed a distinctive look and feel around a custom logo and color palette that appears on the portal site and within each e-Learning course. The standard marketing adage is that acquiring new customers is much more expensive and less profitable then keeping repeat customers. This is also true of e-Learning. Organizations want learn- ers to not just come back to access courses as-needed, but to feel they are in a relationship with the overall e-Learning initiative. They want e-Learning to engender the loyalty that is often the case with Google, e-Bay, or Amazon.com. For e-Learning, building this type of relationship can start with things as easy as single password sign-on, personalized reporting options just for learners and man- agers, and proactive e-mail announcements of new offerings in subject areas recently accessed. Change implementation: Awareness, engagement, and commitment To ensure the success of any e-Learning initiative, all of the people impacted must be informed and aware, and involved and engaged. And, the organization as whole must be committed to its ongoing success through full integration into jobs, work, and business processes. Change implemen- tation is a process-based, inclusive, and always two-way approach which draws upon both change management and consumer marketing principles and practices. It focuses not only on ensuring that individuals think and act differently, but also on the development and reinforcement of the nec- essary new individual and organizational attitudes and behaviors. The I3 Change Implementation model (Figure 4-1) consists of three phases which form a never-ending cycle: Figure 4-1 Phase 1. Inform – Generate awareness Change Implementation Through information and messaging activities, (i.e., marketing communications or “marcom” as Model. Copyright Lance Dublin, 2003-2007 it’s known), employees, managers, and the entire organization are given simple and clear answers to the “what, why, how, who, and when” questions. And, most importantly, in this phase you begin to address the answer to the “what’s in it for me” question as well. Communicating the brand (i.e., logo, colors, fonts, palette, and tag-line) begins, and is repeated and repeated and repeated. The goal of this phase is to make sure the messages the organization wants heard are heard, and are heard in ways they will be recognized, recalled, and remembered. Examples of specific activities during this phase might include: newsletters, presentations, e-mails, Webcasts, voicemails, documents, and speeches. Phase 2. Involve – Generate involvement Just giving all the individuals in the organization who are impacted by and involved with e-Learn- ing answers to “what, where, when, why, who, and how” questions though is not enough. In order for The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 48
  • 64. ENGAGING LEARNING, MOTIVATING MANAGERS, ENERGIZING ORGANIZATIONS | C H A P T E R 4 e-Learning to be successful there must be a change in their attitudes and behaviors. Attitude and behavior change seldom happens based solely on the passive receipt of information, a cool logo and tag-line, exciting colors and graphics, or information and give-aways. The key to this type of change is engaging everyone, while paying particular attention to the important influencers within the or- ganization, the 20% of the people that represent the “tipping point.” Organizations must provide a first-hand experience of e-Learning to give learners and managers and even executives the opportu- nity to take it for a “test-drive,” ask questions, and form their own opinions. The goal of this phase is to have them internalize and personalize the benefits of e-Learning so that it becomes theirs, not just the organizations. Specific activities during this phase might include: videos, department meetings, lunch-room fairs, hall-way expos, and traveling “road-shows.” Phase 3. Integrate – Generate commitment The long-term success of an organization’s e-Learning efforts though is dependent upon more than just great marketing and communications. It requires that e-Learning becomes a recognized part of the organization’s culture, fully integrated into the work-life of all of the employees, supervi- sors, managers and executives. In this stage you identify and target for involvement the ongoing or- ganizational processes and systems – as well as any critical business initiatives e-Learning can sup- port and enable. The purpose is to ensure that e-Learning becomes well accepted as the “norm,” crit- ical to the success of individuals as well as the organization as a whole, and recognized as the plat- form-of-choice for ongoing learning and development as well as the enablement of business process- es. Specific activities during this phase might include: integration with the performance management process, supporting a new key-business initiative, and launching and tracking all leadership develop- ment and management training. Conclusion Across all industries, organizations that are successful with e-Learning have in common an under- standing that having the right content, the right design, and the right technology is just not enough. Certainly it’s necessary for success, but it is not sufficient to ensure success. To ensure their success these organizations pay as much – or even more – attention to engaging learners, motivating man- agers, and energizing their organizations. They understand that this “soft” stuff is the “hard” stuff. They take it seriously. They plan for it. They spend time and money on it. They work at it. They are diligent about it. They are committed to it. And, they do this because they understand that, bottom- line, this “soft” stuff is the critical ingredient for ensuring their e-Learning success. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 49
  • 65. Success Story Grundfos Management A/S Leading manufacturer streamlines training and delivers compelling eLearning courses to customers and employees worldwide using Adobe® Connect™ Grundfos Management A/S Training customers and sta worldwide www.grundfos.com Grundfos is the world’s largest manufacturer of circulation pumps. e company has o ces in 58 countries and currently employs approximately 14,000 sta , with roughly a third employed in Denmark. With its large employee base and complex products, Grundfos has its own training In Partnership With academy that today is being supplemented with Adobe Connect so ware. ZaqONE eLearning is crucial for Grundfos to meet the challenges of the future and to reinforce its position www.zaqsolutions.dk as the leading company in the pump industry. Both employees and customers can be educated with Industry the help of Adobe Connect. Manufacturing For Grundfos, a commitment to sta training helps ensure the company can maintain and develop Challenges its position in the world market. is is the reason why Grundfos established its training academy— • Accelerate production of training the Poul Due Jensen Academy—with associated hotel facilities at its headquarters. e academy is materials an independent division of Grundfos Management and is managed by Kim Hansen, the director of • Reduce costs to deliver training the academy. to sta , partners, and customers worldwide Be-Think-Innovate • Minimize need for IT to support e overall objective of the academy is to ensure the best education for employees. For example, eLearning courses sales managers should understand as much about sales and marketing as they do about product Solution features. Also, instead of just responding to customer inquiries, the sales sta should be proactive • eLearning in its relationships with existing and potential customers, serving as problem solvers and reliable Grundfos is using Adobe Connect partners that can deliver customized solutions. is requires highly specialized knowledge that can to deliver engaging training only be acquired through excellent training. courses to sta , partners, and customers worldwide. “Be- ink-Innovate” is the slogan that Grundfos employs to put the company’s values into words. Results Being willing to change, to assume responsibility, and being innovative are crucial for meeting • Enhance quality and accessibility of the challenges of the future. One initiative that was developed in this spirit is using eLearning to training courses delivered worldwide attain even closer contact with the company’s customers. For instance, dealers and wholesalers • Help ensure that sta , partners, and make decisions every day as to which pump they will recommend for a project. Speci c product customers have continued access to knowledge builds con dence with the customer. erefore, Grundfos wants to o er product training timely product information via eLearning to ensure that customers can choose the right Grundfos pump. • Reduce time and costs to produce and deliver training content Leveraging the reach of the web • Minimize demand on valuable Senior eLearning Project Manager Ole Kristensen is tasked with developing training methods that IT resources needed to support training initiatives utilize the Internet for updating the knowledge of Grundfos employees. With eLearning, the time and costs for training employees are reduced compared to traditional training methods. At the same time, Systems At A Glance eLearning can happen at each employee’s location. • Adobe Connect • Adobe Presenter For Grundfos, eLearning is not an alternative to traditional courses, but instead supplements courses • Adobe Acrobat® Connect™ as part of a blended-learning process that combines day courses and eLearning. “eLearning and day Professional
  • 66. With the help of Adobe Connect sta at Grundfos can rapidly create and assemble a complete training presentation in less than three hours—a task that previously could take three weeks just for the planning and storyboard. Grundfos employees and customers worldwide can now be trained on a given topic within 24 hours. “Thanks to Adobe Connect, courses are part of our module-based training system,” explains Kristensen. “It gives participants the we can train our employees opportunity for better preparation and o ers exibility as the eLearning modules can t into people’s busy lives. We have also established a system to handle customer training.” worldwide faster and more cost e ectively than ever.” Adopting Adobe Connect Kim Hansen, Grundfos uses Adobe Presenter and Microso PowerPoint to create eLearning content. Because Academy director, Adobe Presenter and PowerPoint are integrated, anyone who can use PowerPoint can create Grundfos eLearning presentations with animations and built-in tests. An Adobe Connect presentation can also be used to create short training exercises or product presentations that conclude with a few questions that test whether the participant has understood the content. Another advantage of using Adobe Connect is that the presentation is delivered in the Adobe Flash® format. is means that all PCs can run the presentation without the need to install extra so ware. As a result, Grundfos does not need to devote a lot of time to providing support. “By using Adobe Connect and Adobe Flash, we are con dent that people can participate in trainings without problems,” says Kristensen. “Users only have to click with the mouse to run the presentation. At the same time, the minimal bandwidth required for the Flash based trainings is amazing. We can even reliably train people who have low-bandwidth connections in remote areas worldwide via Adobe Connect.” Rapid training and quality meetings With Adobe Connect, Grundfos can quickly produce learning material. Traditionally, production of eLearning material has been expensive and time-consuming. “With Adobe Connect, we can rapidly create and assemble a complete training presentation in less than three hours—previously it could take three weeks just for the planning and storyboard,” explains Kristensen. “We can now train our sta worldwide on a given topic within 24 hours. is is truly rapid learning,” adds Hansen, “ anks to Adobe Connect, we can train our employees worldwide faster and more cost e ectively than ever.” Grundfos runs Adobe Connect on an internal server. Authorized employees have an area in which they can see which courses they should take, and also view the results of courses they have completed. It was important for Grundfos that Adobe Connect can handle user data from its internal directory server. is means that users do not have to be set up separately on the Adobe Connect server. e Adobe so ware has built-in LDAP integration and automatically accesses all user data from the Grundfos directory database. In this way, it is possible to maintain users from one location, and as many as 6,000 users can be set up in less than hour.
  • 67. “By using Adobe Connect With a hosted Adobe Connect module for training, Grundfos o ers training to customers and and Adobe Flash, we are partners. e Adobe solution monitors who has gone through the training presentation and uses short tests to measure whether the messages have been understood. With Adobe Connect, the con dent that people can company can quickly update customers with the latest product information. “Adobe Connect participate in trainings enables us to deliver timely product training to our distributors and wholesalers, so they can always without problems.” recommend the right pump for a project,” says Hansen. “We’d like to train 10,000 customers Ole Kristensen, using the Adobe so ware, which would give a real upswing in pump sales.” Senior eLearning project manager, Grundfos Grundfos also uses a hosted version of Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional for meetings to organize eMeetings. e Adobe meetings do not require an AV room, and can be carried out from an individual’s workspace over the Internet (IP). It requires just a web camera and a microphone. rough live meetings, the course participants have the opportunity to take part actively in training programs, asking questions and sharing their knowledge with the other participants. In addition to live course meetings, Grundfos uses Acrobat Connect Professional for normal business meetings. For More Information A complete learning solution www.adobe.com/products/connect/ At Grundfos, eLearning is an important part of the company’s training strategy. Adobe Connect provides the opportunity to manage the entire eLearning ow, from production and design of learning content that includes integrated tests through to following up and monitoring activities. Grundfos can see the test results of individual users and assess whether eLearning is working. Everything is controlled from the Adobe Connect server. e Adobe so ware also o ers the possibility for live training via the Internet. e so ware is so user-friendly that production of the training process is assigned to the individual departments. In this way, eLearning can gain acceptance as a natural tool for knowledge dissemination and competence development at Grundfos. Adobe Systems Incorporated Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Connect, and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in 345 Park Avenue the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95009205 06/07 R
  • 68. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 CHAPTER 5 Top-Level Elements for a Successful e-Learning Strategy By Lisa D. Young “ C heaper, faster, better …” … a familiar mantra many organizations look to live by when it comes to training and development. But in today’s reality of scaled-back training departments, diminishing budgets, dis- persed workforces, and changing content it is often difficult to live up to. Many see e-Learning as a way to make this mantra a reality, and organizations have jumped on the bandwagon. E-Learning is progressive, it is sexy, and it can be rapidly developed and implemented, creating a perception that it is the catch-all solution to training and learning needs. The result is that many organizations expend more effort on churning out e-Learning courses than on developing a long-term strategy that will result in successful e-Learning. E-Learning is here to stay. Technological advances and mainstream acceptance of the training methodology only support this notion. Therefore it is time to step back, reevaluate the place of e-Learning in our organizations, and focus on a strategy to support the conception, design, and development of successful e-Learning initiatives and programs. E-learning that is robust, innovative, and timely. E-Learning that pushes organizational boundaries and takes learning and knowledge development to the next level. A solid strategy can assist in adding value to your program while lowering the stress levels of those individuals who are typically responsible for e-Learning. An increased interest in and acceptance of e-Learning as a viable training solution allows you to enable various non-traditional resources in your organization to be involved in the design and development of e-Learning in a variety of capaci- ties. But be warned: this type of strategy requires letting go of some of the control you may be accus- tomed to, and slowing putting the design of learning back into the hands of the content experts. It is contingent upon you providing a toolbox and roadmap that sets these individuals up for success. The five elements of a successful strategy A successful e-Learning strategy relies on the interconnectedness of five main elements – Tools, Contents Training, Processes, Supports, and People – to provide the knowledge, skills, tools, and support required to create an increased number of e-Learning ini- In Chapter 5 you will find information about: tiatives that meet the high-standards expected by your organization. These • The five elements of a successful strategy elements are the e-Learning strategy mantra you should live by. Grounded in the resources and processes required to efficiently and effectively support the The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 53
  • 69. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 entire project life-cycle, your initiatives will produce more e-Learning, in less time, for less money, and will impact a larger audience base. An understanding of the effect of these elements (see Table 5-1), combined with a holistic under- standing of the place of e-Learning within your organization, will ensure that you create a strategy that best suits your current needs, and is flexible enough to support the changing needs of your or- ganization over time. When these elements form the foundation of the larger organizational e-Learn- ing landscape, and are recognized and utilized by all individuals that touch e-Learning, you are on the road to a successful e-Learning program. Let’s examine these elements in more detail so you can start to envision the role they can play in your organization’s e-Learning strategy. Tools Tools are the technological resources you will use to conceptualize, design, and develop your e-Learning initiatives. As organizations grow, learning departments may not have the headcount to meet the demand for e-Learning course development – the demand for e-Learning outweighs the availability of those individuals traditionally used to design and develop e-Learning initiatives. Dedicated e-Learning resources are often limited to an instructional designer, a developer, a project manager, and an imple- mentation specialist – if you’re lucky! As a result, to take e-Learning to the next level, you need to start relying on other individuals to conceptualize, design, and develop e-Learning initiatives. The first strategy element you require to make this happen is the provision of the appropriate tools that support e-Learning – both to create your e-Learning initiatives and to implement e-Learning at an organizational level. What do these tools look like? Many will be familiar to you – perhaps you already use one in your organization. The key is your understanding of how these tools can work together to help streamline each phase of the e-Learning project life-cycle. It involves knowing how the use of these tools will change over time, and knowing the new tools that will be required as e-Learning grows and matures within your organization. LMS Table 5-1 Your LMS (Learning Management System) plays a key role in the success of your e-Learning projects. Even the most well- The benefits of the five elements when used designed and executed course will have limited effect if it is as part of your e-Learning strategy not effectively managed and delivered to the learner. The size Benefit category Increase Decrease and forecasted growth of your organization, and how it uses Cost ROI Amount spent on e-Learning for training and development, will dictate the type outsourcing of LMS you need to consider. In addition to the commercial Efficiency Number of courses Length of time to complete packages on the market, free and open-source solutions are developed an e-Learning project also available. (See Sidebar 5-1 on page 55.) There are even companies that offer hosted LMS solutions. Make sure to Resources Number of people Reliance on external ven- involved in e-Learning dors review the features, functionality, and cost of the various projects at various levels options of the market; as well as your ability to refine and Impact Number of people trained Delivery of projects that customize the solution to meet your organizational needs. in your organization have errors, are inconsis- The eLearning Guild has numerous e-Books on the selection, tent, or are ineffective implementation, and management of your LMS that can help you with your decision. Taking the time up front to review The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 54
  • 70. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 your options, and involving additional stakeholders in the decision-making process, will ensure you are choosing the best option to support your strategy. E-Authoring tools There are many e-Authoring tools available depending on the skill level you expect your resources to have, the type of control over look, feel, and layout of an e-Learning initiative you want individu- als to have, and how effectively you want the course to integrate with the tool you will use to manage and host your courses. (See Sidebar 5-2.) Remember the goal is to eventually transition parts of the design and development process to resources that may not be highly technical. Therefore the tools you implement should take this into consideration. Tools that rapidly develop courses, like Lectora® Publisher™ and ReadyGo®, are great tools for the development of e-Learning by subject matter experts who are not trained in the design or develop- ment of e-Learning. The programs are straightforward to learn, and often have a user interface that emulates menus and tools from software packages that are familiar to most individuals (for example, Microsoft® PowerPoint® and Word®). But the strengths of these tools are also their biggest weakness: there are limits to the complexity, layout elements, and functionality of the courses you can produce. Your strategy should take this into account – depending on how you want to grow e-Learning in your organization you need to have a plan for the tools you will require for your people resources as their knowledge and abilities evolve beyond the rapid development tool. To address this potential barrier, and in response to the abilities of the individuals who will be in- volved in e-Learning projects in your organization, you may decide to by-pass rapid development and consider a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) authoring tool, such as SumTotal® ToolBook® or SuddenlySmart® SmartBuilder™. These tools provide more control over the elements, behaviors, and structure when developing your course. When choosing your tool be aware of how published courses behave, how they work with the learner’s system, and how it can be integrated and Sidebar 5-1 managed within the organization. Regardless of which tool(s) you end up choosing, make Links to various LMS packages sure you take adequate time to assess your options and deter- mine the best tool for your needs, your users, and your or- Saba Enterprise – http://www.saba.com ganization. You will find many resources available online that Plateau LMS – http://www.plateau.com SumTotal Systems Total LMS – http://www.sumtotalsystems.com compare various authoring tools, or provide an in-depth EEDO ForceTen LCMS – http://www.eedo.com analysis of the capabilities of the tool. The eLearning Guild GeoLearning GeoMaestro – http://www.geolearning.com Learn.com LearnCenter – http://www.learn.com also has many resources, articles, and reports discussing the OLAT – http://www.olat.org/public/index.html merits of various authoring tools. Use the research completed Ganesha – http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/ganesha/ by others to your advantage. Bringing a new authoring tool Ilias – http://www.ilias.de/ios/index-e.html into your organization if your first tool does not work out is a recipe for disaster. The only time you should bring in a sec- Sidebar 5-2 ond (or even third) tool is to help expand and advance the skills of your resources. Get informed, and get it right the first Links to various e-Authoring tools time. Lectora – http://www.trivantis.com/ Additional e-Learning tools ReadyGo – http://www.readygo.com/ Articulate – http://www.articulate.com/ When creating your e-Learning toolbox, make sure to look ToolBook – http://www.toolbook.com/ beyond the traditional authoring tools and review the poten- SmartBuilder – http://www.suddenlysmart.com tial of other software packages that can enhance your e-Learn- Adobe Captivate – http://www.adobe.com/products/captivate/ ing initiatives. You may want to consider a synchronous The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 55
  • 71. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 e-Learning tool, such as WebEx®, Microsoft® LiveMeeting®, Elluminate Live!®, or Adobe® Acrobat® Connect Professional™, where individuals can interact in real time in an online virtual space. (See Sidebar 5-3.) This interaction can be text-, audio-, or video-based. Or you may be interested in a tool that also offers additional features, such as asynchronous discourse, document sharing, and collabo- rative whiteboards (for example, WebBoard™ or Blackboard®). These virtual classroom-like envi- ronments create collaborative spaces to develop and sustain learning communities over time, as well as for a specific e-Learning event. Remember though: with any tool that you bring into your organization you need to ensure the people using these tools know how to leverage this technology effectively. This is where training, the second strategy element, can help. Training Training refers to the learning and knowledge opportunities provided to address the needs of vari- ous individuals involved in the e-Learning product life cycle. When developing your e-Learning strategy you will focus on the training needs and requirements of the audiences you want to reach to create a successful, holistic solution. But your strategy will be severely limited if it fails to also consider the different knowledge needs of the resources who will be involved in creating your e-Learning initiatives. For some individuals, this may consist of an over- view of what e-Learning is and how it can enhance and benefit training initiatives they require for their teams or departments. For others, it may be the more advanced authoring skills they require to scaffold their current design and development knowledge. By addressing the training needs of this diverse group you provide them with the ability to become increasingly self-sufficient during the e-Learning project life cycle. There are many ways to approach the training of these resources. Just as you would for any train- ing initiative, you need to ensure that the training methodologies you decide to use best fit the con- tent, context, and audience needs. The following are some of the options you may wish to consider to include in your strategy. Certification programs Certification programs are important for providing the foundational knowledge required to equip your resource people with the e-Learning language and processes of your organization. By formaliz- ing the knowledge and behavior expectations coming out of this training you are establishing the importance of the effective execution of your strategy. Since your resource people will not all require the same amount and type of knowledge, you should provide modular training with content in each unit that scaffolds the content in the others. If you are working with multiple tools in your organization, you can provide basic modules that are prereq- Sidebar 5-3 uisites to completing the tool training. Allow individuals to take the tool modules in parallel, as they are distinct learning Links to various other e-Learning tools paths. Although your people should complete modules in order, it should not be necessary to complete them back-to- WebEx – http://www.webex.com Microsoft LiveMeeting – http://office.microsoft.com/enus/livemeeting/ back. As your resource individuals grow in skill and develop default.aspx?ofcresset=1 their proficiency, they can take the next module in the series Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional – http://www.adobe.com/products/ acrobatconnectpro/ that helps them advance their skills and abilities. (See Table Elluminate Live! – http://www.elluminate.com/ 5-2 on page 57.) WebBoard – http://www.webboard.com Blackboard – http://www.blackboard.com The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 56
  • 72. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 Table 5-2 Reinforcement and sustainment Sample certification training program The training of your resources will fall short unless you include Program Module 1: e-Learning Module 2: Introduction Module 3: ToolBook for Basics to ToolBook the Advanced User training in your strategy that rein- forces learning and provides addi- Focus Basic e-Learning Basic understanding of the Advanced ToolBook ele- principles ToolBook authoring tool ments, including triggers tional knowledge in areas that and its functionality and developing interactivity complement or advance individ- Why take Individuals will learn the Individuals learn how to Authors are able to create ual skills and abilities. The needs the course? various phases and deliv- use ToolBook in the cre- courses with complex inter- of your resources will change over erables for executing an ation of simple courses actions and activities. time, and the certification pro- e-Learning initiative with limited interactivity gram won’t be able to meet all of Audience Anyone who touches a Individuals who will be Individuals who have taken these needs. Therefore you need phase of e-Learning, or designing and developing Introduction to ToolBook supports those involved courses and need to be and require advanced to provide training in small, bite- with e-Learning, e.g. provisioned with ToolBook knowledge and skills for sized learning chunks, minimizing Managers, Directors, designing more advanced the time and resources required to Product Specialists, etc. courses support these types of training initiatives. (See Sidebar 5-4.) It is also an opportunity to showcase the various e-Learning tools or prospective tools in your organization. You should also consider using this type of training to target individuals that you feel would bene- fit from understanding what e-Learning is and how e-Learning can be used, but are resistant to com- mitting the amount of time required to complete a module in the certificate program. For example, provide a Lunch and Learn session for the facilitators in your organization to help them understand how blending instructor-led training with e-Learning can create a more robust training solution. Use this training to help change mindsets and gain buy-in to the supports and processes, the third and fourth strategy elements, which individuals should be using and following when involved with e-learning projects. Supports Supports are the ongoing resources and communication you will provide to individuals involved in the various phases of the e-Learning life cycle. The success of your e-Learning strategy is a direct reflection of the support you provide in various phases of the e-Learning life-cycle. Support is required to ensure that individuals have the knowledge Sidebar 5-4 and mechanisms they require when involved in e-Learning initiatives. These supports allow individuals to reference pro- Supplementary training types cesses and procedures, review examples, access templates, and • Lunch and Learn sessions get regular updates on the information they need to execute • Webinar or Webcast (run live, then archive for future reference) e-Learning effectively. In order to promote the daily use and • E-Learning module using your in-house authoring tool • Simulations or case studies reference of these supports it is important that they are acces- • Demonstrations of new technology, new ways of thinking about designing sible in a consistent location (for example, through the orga- interactions, etc. • Showcases of e-Learning courses individuals have developed for the organ- nizational Intranet), and provided in a consistent manner (a ization (can be housed in an online space, or set up as a mini-conference) professional look, feel, and branding), creating a “one-stop- • Knowledge or application assessments (e.g. provide individuals with an shop” for e-Learning information needs. Remember this example of an interaction that needs to be built using your authoring tool and have them provide their method for creating this interaction – can pro- knowledge repository will need to continually grow and vide prizes for the most accurate method and/or the most creative interac- change to accommodate the needs of the various individuals tion) • Mentoring and coaching opportunities involved in your e-Learning projects. Be prepared to update the site on a regular basis, utilizing feedback provided by the The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 57
  • 73. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 individuals who regularly use the site, and are most familiar with the site’s functionality and content. They are in the best position to provide feedback that will enhance how they interact and use the provided information. Standards and best practice Providing standards around the design and development of your e-Learning initiatives will ensure you are using best practices to create learning that balances content with interactivity, provides a strong brand image, and makes your e-Learning recognizable within the organization. You should document and interweave these standards throughout the certification training program to ensure understanding and compliance. Templates To assist individuals in complying with the organization’s standards and best practices, it is impor- tant to provide templates that can streamline the design and development process, allowing e-Learn- ing to be created more efficiently. Your templates should be there to support individuals who are new to designing e-Learning, but not hinder those who have more advanced skills and abilities – therefore the use of the templates should be flexible based on ability. Image library Your image library is a key support for helping create the brand image you want to deliver in your e-Learning. Remember, you should provide detailed standards around the use of images, including resolu- tion, placement, and acceptable uses. Interaction gallery (reusable learning objects) As you start to increase the amount of e-Learning you are producing you can create a library of the best interactions that individuals can customize and use in their own e-Learning development. This gallery of interactions and reusable learning objects, or widgets Figure 5-1 as some call them, can enhance e-Learning initiatives quickly, freeing up time to develop new inter- An example of a weekly communication newsletter actions and activities. Once again, provide detailed standards and instructions around when to use sent out via e-mail. these interactions, how to use them, and the specifics for customizing them to meet each initiative’s Individuals can click on needs. the links provided to learn In order to keep these supports up to date and relevant, you must ensure you have a strong com- more about each story. munication link with your resources to provide updates of tools, supports, and resources. Providing a weekly or bi-weekly newsletter can help to raise awareness, keep standards and best practices front- of-mind, and ensure correct messages are getting across and being implemented in a time-sensitive manner. (See Figure 5-1.) Processes Processes are the methods and procedures used to execute a successful e-Learning project life cycle. Implementing a successful e-Learning initiative begins with the provision of a strong methodology that supports how the initiative is designed, developed, and delivered. You need to clearly communi- The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 58
  • 74. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 cate this methodology so that all stakeholders who touch an e-Learning project understand, and adopt it – it is an opportunity to reinforce best practices and highlight roles and responsibilities. E-Learning project lifecycle You should design a generic workback schedule that includes all required deliverables, touch- points, and stakeholder sign-off for each phase of the project lifecycle. It should also include stan- Sidebar 5-5 dardized timing for creating the various deliverables, reviewing the deliverables, Phases and deliverables to consider for the project lifecycle and providing feedback. For each initia- and workback schedule tive you should fine-tune the workback Identify Need schedule with the key stakeholders to • Provide a training request form that needs to be completed by individuals interested in a training ini- suit the specific needs of the project and tiative for a specific audience. the resources involved in executing the • The e-Team should partner to review the viability of e-Learning as a training solution for the request. • A response to the request should be provided to the stakeholder within a set amount of working days. project. Regardless of the skill-level of the Needs Assessment individuals designing and developing • Use standardized forms to gather key pieces of information that you require to deliver your course, your e-Learning initiatives, there are cer- including the date by which you would ideally deliver the course, the audience, assessment require- ments, etc. tain points in the workback schedule • Interview key stakeholders and complete focus groups with individuals that can provide a representa- where your dedicated e-Learning team tive idea of the training needs of the audience. members (or e-Team) should always be • Use a standardized form to report on the results of the needs assessment, including key themes, challenges, and barriers. Provide recommendations for the design of the e-Learning initiative. This involved to ensure consistency, compli- form should be signed off by stakeholder(s). ance, and provide coaching. (See Sidebar • The e-Team should always be involved in this phase of the project in order to directly share their knowledge and expertise. 5-5.) Design Rapid content development • Create key design deliverables including course outline, instructional design plan and/or script, story- For client groups that are not ready to boards, etc. make the full leap into the e-Learning • Stakeholder(s) should review the required deliverables, and key stakeholder should provide sign-off before proceeding with the next deliverable in the project workflow. arena, you can bridge the gap between • The e-Team should always be part of the stakeholder team that reviews the design deliverables. content and course design by providing a development template that individuals Development and Testing can populate with the required content. • Develop the course using designated development tool or method. • Complete thorough review and testing of the course to validate content, functionality, compatibility, For individuals who understand e-Learn- ability to integrate effectively, and alignment with brand and standards. Proof all courses for accuracy. ing, but are not confident enough to use Involve stakeholders where appropriate. one of the various development tools, • If using authoring tools, you may require that courses are published at multiple intervals during devel- opment process to ensure compatibility with a LMS – this will help identify any bugs before develop- you can provide the opportunity to ment proceeds too far. make layout and interaction suggestions. • The e-Team should always be part of the stakeholder team that reviews the development deliverables. In addition, they can supply potential Delivery links and images to leverage for use in • Provide specific timing for how far in advance a final version of the course needs to be provided development of the course. After com- before launch. pleting this template, the e-Team re- • Provide process for uploading course into LMS, if required. source can review the content, map the instructional design ideas to the content, Revisions and Maintenance and develop the course using the method • Provide a strategy and process for ensuring revision and updating of courses on a timely basis. It should be clear who will be involved in regular reviews, and who will be responsible for updating the or authoring tool of choice. This meth- course with any changes od will allow you to cut down on the time required by the e-Team to acquire The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 59
  • 75. TOP-LEVEL ELEMENTS FOR A SUCCESSFUL E-LEARNING STRATEGY | C H A P T E R 5 Sidebar 5-6 content and solicit feedback by allowing resources in the Typical client group self-reliance phases client groups, who make up the fifth strategy element, to have increased responsibility in the rollout of their e-Learning ini- Phase 1: E-Learning team designs and develops courses tiatives. An individual on the e-Team takes e-Learning initiatives in this phase through the entire project life-cycle. The initiatives may be part of a larger project and not initiated by a specific client group. However, in the instances where the People training request is from a specific client group, you should coach and mentor “People” refers to the various individuals involved in the individuals from that client group in order to move them into Phase 2. design and development of e-Learning initiatives. Phase 2: Partnership with client group When you have the tools, training, supports, and processes A subject matter expert on the client group’s team takes these courses put into place to support the design and development of through the initial design phases. The SME can provide content and ideas e-Learning initiatives in your organization, you will find that for the course development, perhaps using the rapid content development you do not require a large team dedicated to e-Learning. You template! A member of the e-Team will then use the template to develop the course. can have a greater impact leveraging the existing skills, know- ledge, and enthusiasm of your dedicated resources to help Phase 3: Self-sufficient client group coach, develop, and mentor other individuals involved in the Self-sufficient client groups have invested a considerable amount of time e-Learning project life-cycle. and effort to provide their team members with the knowledge and skills required to produce their own e-Learning initiatives. They have multiple indi- As your internal client groups increase their requests for viduals that have taken various modules in your certification training pro- e-Learning initiatives, they increase their willingness to invest gram, from developers to directors. These client groups are able to concep- and develop the e-Learning knowledge and skills of their tualize, design, and develop all their e-Learning initiatives. The e-Team should still assist in the customization of the workback schedule and review major team members. Your goal should be to leverage this willing- milestones in the project lifecycle, providing feedback and coaching if ness and move these client groups through the various phases required. But ultimately these groups are self-reliant. of expertise so they are able to take on increased responsibili- ty for the design and development of their own e-Learning initiatives. (See Sidebar 5-6.) You should be continually asses- sing your client groups to determine if they require complete support or various levels of partial support during the design and development of e-Learning initiatives. For many organizations, this may be a new way of thinking about the design of e-Learning. Therefore it is important that you support the mindset change required by individuals and gain their buy-in to this new approach. Communication of your direction is paramount, including your strategy for in- creasing the number of client groups in Phase 3. (See Figure 5-2.) On your marks, get set, GO! What are you waiting for? You understand your organiza- tion, you recognize the role of e-Learning, and you now know the elements you require to build an inclusive strategy that maximizes knowledge and resources, and improves the impact of your e-Learning initiatives. Take the elements pro- vided and leverage them to develop a strategy that best fits your organizational needs. All you need to do now is make it Figure 5-2 Example of the long-term strategy for developing the increasing self- happen. reliance of your organization when developing e-Learning initiatives. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 60
  • 76. Success Story WebAssist Market-leading developer of Adobe® software extensions relies on Adobe Captivate™ 3 and Adobe Acrobat® Connect™ Professional software to create engaging eLearning experiences WebAssist Optimizing online presence www.webassist.com In today’s time-challenged marketplace, web professionals need to build and deploy attractive, content-rich pages that can be updated quickly and easily. Since 1999, WebAssist has been making web development easier and faster for designers, developers, and e-commerce professionals with its market-leading so ware extensions that plug into Adobe so ware. Industry Technology Based in Encinitas, California, WebAssist helps individuals and businesses improve productivity, increase potential, and extend commercial opportunities with tools to build better websites. More Challenges than 250,000 developers and business owners worldwide use WebAssist products to create websites • Create interactive product demonstrations for e-commerce, enterprise, government, and education. WebAssist’s agship product, eCart—an • Provide easy-to-follow, Adobe Dreamweaver® so ware extension—o ers web designers a cleaner, simpler way to create customizable tutorials for end-to-end online store solutions. company’s latest product rollout WebAssist provides online training and product demonstrations in support of more than 20 Solution solutions. When the WebAssist developers needed to create a series of product demonstrations, • eLearning they turned to Adobe Captivate and Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional so ware to build and WebAssist is using Adobe deliver intuitive eLearning tools. By leveraging simulations created in Adobe Captivate, WebAssist Captivate and Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional to produce customers can “test drive” the company’s so ware and get up to speed quickly. engaging training and product demonstrations that give web Adobe Captivate attens the learning curve developers a better understanding Joseph Lowery, vice president of marketing at WebAssist, explains that Adobe Captivate is the best of how to build feature-rich tool on the market for rapidly developing interactive tutorials, training, and product demonstrations. e-commerce sites. eLearning materials developed in Adobe Captivate empower users at all skill levels to quickly Results increase their pro ciency in a wide range of business processes, such as communicating procedures, • Increased revenue from software meeting compliance standards, training co-workers, or marketing products. extensions by 44% • Reduced the time previously required “What I love about Adobe Captivate most is the fact that you can mold training to your way of to revise old video content by 85% thinking rather than having the application determine the route,” says Lowery. e WebAssist • Enhanced customers’ engagement development team used Adobe Captivate to create the tutorial for its eCart solution, enabling users with company products through to page through its online store tutorial. Users can easily navigate to any section—from creating a interactive materials catalog to checking out—and drill down for speci c information. • Extended reach of customer support by o ering web-based When he rst encountered Adobe Captivate, Mark Fletcher, WebAssist’s training manager (whose training available any time background is eLearning and instructional design), was astounded. “When I came across the level Systems At A Glance of exibility provided by Adobe Captivate, I was amazed at how easy it is to visualize content and • Adobe Captivate 3 make edits to audio, text, and graphic components,” he says. • Adobe Creative Suite® 3 Web Previously, WebAssist developers used a linear video-editing technology to create tutorials. As a Premium. Components used include: matter of course, each time the company launched a new version, the team needed to revise the • Adobe Flash® CS3 associated tutorials. Since it was essentially impossible to rapidly revise content using the old video • Adobe Fireworks® CS3 methods, the team basically had to create a new tutorial from scratch. • Adobe Dreamweaver CS3 • Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional
  • 77. Adobe Captivate and Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional software is used to build and deliver intuitive, eLearning tools including product simulations and tutorials for WebAssist solutions including eCart. The artwork for WebAssist’s online materials is created using Adobe Fireworks CS3 software, a graphics editor that works transparently with Adobe Dreamweaver, Flash, and Illustrator software. Image les saved in Fireworks are easily exported to Adobe Captivate. “WebAssist has realized a 44% “Adobe Captivate is a tremendous time-saver in comparison to using video methodology,” says increase in extension revenue Fletcher. “We estimate that the team saves about 85% of the time that was previously spent making revisions to video presentations. I can deploy material to the team for edit and review much more during the rst 12-month quickly, and we can easily make changes at the 11th hour.” period after leveraging Adobe Captivate solutions on our site.” e rapid production environment in Adobe Captivate allows Fletcher and his team to create just- Michael Lekse in-time work ows, giving them the exibility they need to meet tight deadlines and bring products Vice president of sales to market faster. In measuring the Adobe Captivate learning curve, Fletcher estimates that users WebAssist are up to speed within two hours. Rapid development increases net results According to Michael Lekse, vice president of sales, “WebAssist has realized a 44% increase in extension revenue during the rst 12-month period a er leveraging Adobe Captivate solutions on our site.” Additionally, Adobe Captivate has enriched WebAssist’s ability to deliver quality service and support as part of its web development toolkits and mentoring services. “Adobe Captivate so ware has given WebAssist a cost-e ective way to increase our community support and educate prospective clients. Our worldwide customer base needs solutions, support, and training during all international business hours. Adobe Captivate gives us the ability to communicate with visitors and customers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, via self-paced, interactive tutorials and feature tours—without having to increase our departmental headcounts or outsource services,” says Lekse. “Our Solution Recipes, which explain how to create sophisticated web applications step-by-step, have signi cantly reduced the number of support calls.” For More Information Lekse adds that the ability to rapidly prototype eLearning modules, auto-populate graphic revisions www.adobe.com/products/captivate/ universally, and localize content inside Adobe Captivate are tremendous production time-savers. He also notes, “A really important bene t of using Adobe Captivate is that it enables us to retrieve valuable data to create and analyze reports.” E ective, seamless tool integration WebAssist relies on a wealth of Adobe solutions to enrich the eLearning experience. For example, much of the artwork for WebAssist’s online materials is created using Adobe Fireworks CS3 so ware, a graphics editor that works transparently with Adobe Dreamweaver, Flash, and Illustrator® so ware. Image les that are saved in Fireworks can be easily exported to Adobe Captivate. “ e ability to launch and edit in Adobe tools like Fireworks CS3 from inside Adobe Captivate signi cantly streamlines our production process,” says Fletcher. In the future, WebAssist plans to use its Acrobat Connect Professional server to log user statistics so they can readily see what pages are being accessed most frequently. e challenge of providing users with trial versions of its products creates a unique blend of marketing and training opportunities for WebAssist. “Using Adobe Captivate to create presentations, we can show people how to use our so ware using audio, interactivity, and imagery—without requiring them to download anything,” says Fletcher. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Captivate, Creative Suite, Dreamweaver, Fireworks, Flash, and Illustrator are either registered Adobe Systems Incorporated trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their 345 Park Avenue respective owners. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95009831 07/07 A
  • 78. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6 Strategy for the Learner: A Student’s Guide to e-Learning Success By Michael Corry and Ryan Watkins I n its many forms e-Learning has become an integral part of the training and professional devel- opment services in a growing number of organizations. Whether e-Learning in your organization includes just a limited number of online computer courses, the year-around offering of international training courses delivered via satellite, or even simply after-hours programs that allow you to take online college courses, your participation in e-Learning is likely to be an expanding component of your professional development plan, both now and in the future. As a result, you must be prepared to successfully meet the challenges of learning through these high-tech, and often demanding, train- ing opportunities. Learning how to use the technology, while important, is not enough for mastering e-Learning. From adapting the critical thinking skills that you use when taking notes during a classroom lecture, to adopting new communication skills when working with virtual teams, you must now update the strategies that have led to your success in the traditional training classroom to ensure your equivalent success in e-Learning courses. By building on the techniques that you used in the past (such as group leadership, time management, and critical reading skills) you can improve both your performance in training courses as well as your ability to apply those skills in the workplace. In this chapter we will provide guidance for how you can improve your e-Learning study skills through combining the most valued skills of the traditional training classroom with the modern capabilities of e-Learning technologies (see Figure 6-1 on page 64). Use the tips, tools, and recommendations in this chapter to expand your study skills that take advantage of e-Learning technologies rather than letting the new technologies present obstacles to your learning and professional development. Plan for success Contents Before you venture into the world of e-Learning, it is important to take a few minutes and assess your strengths and weaknesses in this new learning environment. For areas In Chapter 6 you will find information about: where you identify weaknesses, you should be prepared to do some work so • Plan for success that they do not become a barrier to your learning experience. Given your • Update your study skills past experiences, planning for success may be something that you are not • Tips for success accustomed to doing in a face-to-face training environment, yet it is never- theless essential if you are new to online learning. When planning for The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 63
  • 79. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 e-Learning success, consider the following: • Technology access and protection – Verify that you have adequate access to a computer and Internet connection. Make sure that your computer is new enough to handle any software you may have to use in the course. Also, confirm that your Internet connection is fast enough for the learning materials presented. For example, if your e-Learning materials contain video, you should have a high-speed Internet connection. If you have a dial-up Internet connection, it will be challenging to get access to the necessary materials. Related to access is technology protection. Do you have up-to-date antivirus and spy- ware protection? If not, you need to get the appropri- ate software before you start your e-Learning experi- ence. The only way to make sure you are ready for these types of challenges is to ask in advance. There- fore, before your e-Learning course begins, find out what types of software and materials the instructor expects you to use. This preparation will help you get off to a good start. Figure 6-1 • Technology skills – Making sure you have the technology skills required to succeed in an e-Learn- E-Learning success (Watkins Corry, 2004- ing class is vital. Start off by determining whether you have the basic skills required to operate a 2007) computer and navigate the Internet, since most e-Learning courses will use these tools to some extent. If you do, then assess your ability to download and upload software and files to the Inter- net. How about your ability to send and receive e-mail messages? Can you send them with an attachment and read an attachment sent to you? While some of these skills may seem simplistic, each one is important to master in order to be successful in an e-Learning environment. • Triangulation – Do you have the necessary skills to evaluate the reliability, quality, and usefulness of online resources? One of the more complex skills is the identification and evaluation of quali- ty and useful online materials. Just remember the rule of “triangulation.” If you find something on the Internet three times from different sources and it appears to say the same thing, then it is probably fairly accurate. This is not a hard and fast rule, but it can be helpful. When in doubt you can always contact the author or owner of the Website to verify the accuracy of their infor- mation. • Communicating online – Effective communication is key when working in the same room with someone. However, communication becomes even more important in an online environment where non-verbal communications are limited. Communication can include e-mail, chat, or bul- letin board exchanges. Can you express yourself clearly in these forms of communication? Could you work collaboratively with others using these tools? Have you ever tried using a chat room with more than two people? Can you carry on an in-depth conversation with multiple people in an e-Learning environment? Related to online communication is the topic of time management. Can you schedule enough time to provide timely and thorough responses? Do you really have time to successfully participate in and complete this online course? It is important to remember that online learning is like many things in life, you get out of it what you put into it. If you can- not communicate effectively online or manage your time wisely, your learning experience and the learning experience of others with whom you interact will diminish. • Motivation – Learning outside a four-walled classroom is a new experience to many people. A The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 64
  • 80. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 key to success is staying motivated. In many online learning experiences, you will never see your instructor or other learners. If you are in an asynchronous learning environment, you may also never have set times to meet with each other. With that in mind, do you have the self-motivation to participate in a course when you seem to be all by yourself? Can you complete work when the instructor is not there all the time? How about managing online distractions like e-mails, Web- sites, blogs, and such? How about offline distractions, such as the television, children, friends, and so forth? It is important to develop a plan for handling these distractions before you start your online learning experience. Set rules or guidelines for yourself. Develop a schedule of when you will be online and for how long. Also, ask your instructor for feedback on how you are do- ing. Ask questions such as, “Are my online postings thorough enough?” or “Am I providing regu- lar enough communications?” Staying motivated and applying effective online time management skills are essential to e-Learning success. Update your study skills Now that you have identified many of the skills required for success in an e-Learning environ- ment, it is important to identify what skills you already have and which ones will require some addi- tional work. Initially, you will want to focus on the important skills that are likely to present the largest obstacles to your success. Here are some things to keep in mind: • Your study skills from high school and college likely won’t be enough. Most of you probably did- n’t take e-Learning courses in high school and college, and therefore you can’t depend on the skills that helped you to be successful in a classroom as a student to lead to your success online. For example, you will need to update the note-taking techniques you used for college lectures for the new streaming audio and video presentations. Also, if you are into the high-tech gadgets, you may try to do your e-Learning over your iPhone or a similar device. Do you think you can take notes while watching or listening to a Podcast of your class lecture on your iPhone? How will the technology change the way you review material and prepare for assessments? You can do it, you can learn from content delivered by a variety of technologies, but you will have to modify your study skills or acquire new ones in order to ensure your success. • The first way to be prepared is to take advantage of the technologies that you already use; apply the capabilities of software programs to modernize your study skills. An example is the technolo- gies available in word processing programs. Without a doubt, at some point in your e-Learning experience you will work in a team on a written report of some kind. Since your team members could physically be spread out all over the world, keeping all the versions of your document in “sync” is essential. Luckily, word processing programs now allow you to track the changes made and who made them. Practice using this function and confirm that you understand how to track changes; this will give you an advantage when working collaboratively in an e-Learning team. • Another way to update your skills is to practice taking notes while reading text, listening to audio, or watching video online. This is not as easy as it looks. When reading online, always have a paper notepad nearby (for example, on your desk) or toggle between your browser and an open word processing page (using CTRL+Tab on a PC, or Command+Tab on a Mac). Also, learn the shortcut keys used to copy and paste written materials directly into your word processing docu- ment (using CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste). When listening to audio or watching video, take advantage of the pause, rewind, and fast-forward buttons to improve the quality of your notes; they can make note taking much simpler. Practicing is essential since taking notes while watching online lectures is a typical study skill required for success in e-Learning courses. • You can be an active learner by participating in optional activities that are available to you. For The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 65
  • 81. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 example, don’t be shy — try to participate in all discussion board and chat conversations. Not only does this give you additional exposure to the learning activities, but it gives you a chance to fine tune your e-Learning skills. As an added benefit, active participation in these areas helps to build an online community. Belonging to this community can improve your performance in the course, and can help alleviate any feelings of isolation that you may have when you are not in a traditional training classroom with your peers. This is an important item because feelings of iso- lation are high on the list of complaints by e-Learners. • With this in mind, another way to be an active e-Learner is to develop online study groups. These groups can function synchronously, asynchronously, or both. Not only do these groups help you build a learning community, but they can develop into both professional and personal networks. Sometimes, the networks that you develop can form a powerful bond that will last for years and be a help to you in many ways. • Choose the right type of e-Learning course that matches your skill set. Once you have identified your e-Learning strengths and weaknesses, you then should consider what type of e-Learning course will be best for you. Should it be a text-only course, or a two-way video course or some- thing altogether different? Choose your course (or courses) carefully. For example, if you are not confident in your critical reading skills, an e-Learning course that is primarily text-based may not be a good option for you at this time. Remember, e-Learning is not for everyone and not every e-Learning delivery method is for everyone either. Tips for success Once you have assessed your e-Learning strengths and weaknesses, made a plan for success, and updated your study skills, you are well on your way to being a successful e-Learner. To take you even further down the road to success, here are some tips that will help on your e-Learning journey: • Managing your files – Each e-Learning class can generate a lot of files. For that reason, file man- agement is crucial. One important tip is to create folders and sub-folders for each e-Learning course. The sub-folders can correspond to activities, assignments, lectures, or other components of the course. Along with the files themselves, develop a naming structure that you can apply consistently. A naming strategy will help you find files much quicker, and help you keep track of documents that may go through many versions before submitting them to the instructor. It does- n’t matter what the strategy is, it just has to make sense to you and give you the opportunity to expand it as you get more files and folders. • Downloading software – Downloading software is important, though some software can be harm-ful to your computer if you are not careful. The first thing to keep in mind is to know what you are downloading and make sure it comes from a reputable source. Also, make sure you have up-to-date anti-virus software on your computer to identify if what you are downloading is carrying a virus. There are many different types of software you will download. Some of the more common types include updates, plug-ins, trials, shareware, and freeware. More specifically, your e-Learning course may require you to download Adobe® Reader®, and “players” for multi- media such as Apple® QuickTime®, RealNetworks® RealPlayer®, Adobe Shockwave®, Adobe Flash® Player, or other software necessary to access course content. It is important that you understand what each of these software programs can do for you, and that you download them from the company that makes them. Therefore, spend some time on the Internet and go to the Web sites for each of these types of software and learn about them. Fortunately, most will offer some level of free or trial software that you can test out without purchasing the entire package. The knowledge you gain from practicing this before the course begins will help you succeed in The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 66
  • 82. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 e-Learning and give you an advantage over others who don’t quite understand these software applications and programs. • Using e-mail effectively – Almost everyone knows how to use the basics of e-mail. However, here are some tips that will help you be more effective in your e-mail use. First, as with software downloads, be careful with e-mail attachments. Don’t open an attachment unless you know who sent it and you feel it is safe. Also, make sure your anti-virus software is set to scan attachments. Second, pick one e-mail account to use for your e-Learning experience and stick with it. If you are constantly sending messages from multiple e-mail accounts, your instructor and classmates may not know which e-mail account to use to communicate with you. Third, decide whether you want to have Post Office Protocol (POP) e-mail access or Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). A consideration here is whether you will always use the same computer when you check your e- mail, or whether you will be using different computers. Usually, if you have a POP e-mail ac- count, your e-mail resides on the computer you check it on (unless you change the setting). Therefore, if you check e-mail on another computer (say, while on vacation), the e-mail messages may stay on the other computer, and when you get to your home computer those messages will not be available to you. However, if you have an IMAP account, the messages reside on an e-mail server, not your local computer, and will be available to you whereever you check your e-mail. • Project organization for online groups – More than likely you will participate in an online group project in at least one of your e-Learning experiences. To be successful, begin by reviewing the instructor’s (or the school’s) rules, guidelines, and policies for online group work. These may be different than the ones for face-to-face group work. They may present new challenges (as well as opportunities to take advantage of technology). Once you have the opportunity, introduce your- self to your team. In an e-Learning environment, you should share things such as the times when you are available, how you would like to communicate (e-mail, bulletin boards, instant messag- ing, chat, and so on), what roles you would like to have in the team (leader, note-taker, or some- thing else), and your online contact information. The next step is to identify and assign group roles and tasks; use your project management skills to facilitate a virtual team and you will typi- cally be quite successful. A good step is also to have each group member commit to being pre- pared for each meeting. • Project execution for online groups – Once you have organized your online e-Learning group, it is time to perform your task(s). As you are doing this it is a good idea to maintain the role you have accepted and follow-up on tasks you commit to complete. You should also demonstrate and en- courage good online working relationships. This is even more important in an e-Learning envi- ronment where time and distance separate people. For example, review your e-mail messages before sending them to ensure that other group members won’t misinterpret your message or be offended. A great tip is to share online calendars so you know when you can get in touch with someone else in your group. Problems with the task always occur and it is important to know how and when you can assemble the group online. Keeping a backup copy of all your files is cru- cial. You don’t want to lose all your hard work when your partner’s flash drive decides to act up the day before the project is due. As a final point, be patient with your group members, don’t over-analyze online comments, and remember to use the communication strategies agreed upon. Summary E-Learning is a whole new world for most of us. It is important therefore to think of it as an inno- vative way of learning with new, and sometimes different, learning skills. If you approach e-Learning with a systematic mindset you can be successful. The key is to begin by identifying the necessary The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 67
  • 83. A STUDEN’T GUIDE TO E-LEARNING SUCCESS | CHAPTER 6 skills, and then to assess your current skill set. Second, know your weaknesses and work on updating those skills. Lastly, to achieve ultimate success, study and adopt the tips from experienced e-Learners and those who have been down the e-Learning journey several times. In the end, remember that not all e-Learning courses are for everyone, so choose your online experiences carefully; match your skills with the course technologies. Success in e-Learning can add value to your professional develop- ment and, best of all, it can offer you a flexible and enjoyable learning experience. References Watkins, R. 2004a. Building Skills for e-Learning Success. Distance Learning 1, no. 6: 27-28. Watkins, R. 2004b. e-Learning Study Skills and Strategies. Distance Learning 1, no. 3: 32-34. Watkins, R. and Corry, M., 2007. e-Learning Companion: A Student’s Guide to Online Success, 2/E. Houghton Mifflin Company. The eLearning Guild’s Handbook of e-Learning Strategy 68
  • 84. Success Story Adobe Systems, Incorporated Adobe uses its software to engage its global workforce in eLearning, maximizing individual achievement and driving business results Adobe Systems, Incorporated Lessons learned www.adobe.com When Adobe employees talk about eLearning, they speak from experience. At Adobe, learning— particularly eLearning—is central to each employee’s professional development, helping to synthesize Industry a global workforce into a single, powerful enterprise. Technology Challenges From the time new hires begin their jobs, they engage immediately with Adobe® eLearning. • Improve employee access to timely From setting up voice mail to understanding new product rollouts—at tiers spanning interns to learning executives—Adobe embeds organic, highly personalized learning experiences into its everyday • Cost-e ectively accommodate business processes worldwide. di erent learning styles • Align learning with corporate goals “Providing our employees with easy access to information for learning is critical in our rapidly growing, global company,” says Donna Morris, senior vice president of human resources at Adobe. Solution “Whether in sales, engineering, accounting, or marketing, our employees are vital to the company’s • eLearning continued success.” With 6,200 employees around the globe working in complex lines of business, Adobe uses its software and Adobe leverages its own so ware and technology to enable sta to frequently engage in formal technologies to integrate rich, dynamic eLearning into operations, and informal learning. providing sta with easy access to “ e type of information that people need to learn continues to evolve as our business expands into valuable learning. new markets and opportunities,” says Morris. “When sta can hone skills and collaborate easily with Results others, the bene ts are clear to each individual and the teams, as well as to the entire company.” • Improved employee access to training Adobe takes a holistic approach to learning, going well beyond simple goals of employee retention • Reduced corporate training costs or developing basic skill sets. e company strives to create a meaningful connection between • Integrated eLearning with existing employee and employer. From this perspective, eLearning is a vehicle for Adobe to invest in its IT infrastructure and Learning employees and its business, enhancing employee performance and bottom-line results. Management System • Easily incorporated text, audio, E cient on-boarding video, and interactive discussions No matter the size or scope of an organization, orienting new employees is a cornerstone of any into eLearning business. At Adobe, a central issue surrounding orientation is scalability. at is, how to set out a • Empowered sta with quality learning anytime, anywhere new employee roadmap while distilling content so new employees get up and running quickly without getting overwhelmed by details. Systems At A Glance • Adobe Acrobat Connect Using Adobe Presenter, the rapid learning authoring tool inside Adobe Acrobat® Connect™ Professional Professional so ware, as well as Adobe Captivate™, Flash®, and Acrobat Professional so ware, the • Adobe Presenter company’s Human Resources (HR) team reduced new employee orientation time by a third. “We • Adobe Enterprise Connect Server were able to shorten the live session without jeopardizing the quality of content covered,” says • Adobe Acrobat Professional Chris Veilleux, learning and development program manager at Adobe. • Adobe Captivate By matching the right Adobe tool to the right training task, information was simply repurposed • Adobe Flash • Adobe Reader® to speed learning. For example, the facilities team uses Adobe Acrobat Professional so ware to • Adobe Flex™
  • 85. To assist new hires at Adobe in navigating their surroundings, the facilities team uses Adobe Acrobat Professional software to convert building plans and other materials to platform- and application-independent Adobe PDF les. Rather than distributing information in cumbersome three-ring binders, facilities information is available in Adobe PDF online anytime, anyplace. convert building plans and other materials to platform- and application-independent Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) les. Now, instead of having to distribute information in cumbersome three-ring binders, facilities information is available in Adobe PDF online anytime, anyplace for new hires trying to navigate their surroundings. Other time-saving, new-hire training strategies include using Adobe Presenter to create interactive online courses that outline employee stock purchase plans, explain bene ts packages, and even show a corporate overview movie created in Adobe Flash. “We’ve added thousands of employees over the past few years to support our growth,” explains Veilleux. “We need to know that training information can be created and updated rapidly as well as presented e ciently. It is essential to engage employees with easy-to-use modules that enable more just-in-time learning on the job, instead of a bunch of details o ered up during live orientations.” In addition to using Adobe so ware for new-hire training, eLearning has become an informal, everyday practice throughout the company. For example, the entire Learning Professional community at Adobe can use Adobe Contribute® so ware for blogging, so sta can “keep up-to- date on the latest industry information, talk freely about challenges, and readily share ideas about how Adobe tools can improve processes inside and outside our organization,” says Veilleux. New-hire training strategies at Adobe include using Adobe Presenter to create interactive online courses that outline employee stock purchase plans, explain bene ts packages, and even show a corporate overview movie created in Adobe Flash. Training information can be created and updated rapidly, presented e ciently, and engage employees with easy-to-use modules that enable more just-in-time learning on the job.
  • 86. Stronger sales training As manager of worldwide sales training, David Alper oversees eLearning for hundreds of direct sales representatives, the Adobe sales engineering community, and the inside sales organization. When Alper rst joined Adobe a few years ago, most training was done in face-to-face meetings with project managers and typically required a lot of time-consuming and expensive travel. “Now, most everything we do leverages Adobe technology,” says Alper. By identifying gaps, creating templates for consistency, and incorporating feedback into the training loop, there are sensible sales education tools for everyone to follow. e online blended learning modules in Acrobat Connect Professional cover everything from how to handle routine administrative processes to broader topics such as in-depth looks at the latest Adobe LiveCycle®, Acrobat, and Creative Suite releases, as well as vertical solutions that encompass multiple products. At the same time, the sales training team also makes extensive use of Adobe Presenter and Adobe Captivate to create hosted eLearning modules and curriculums. To help meet the needs of Adobe’s sale force, the company calls upon the eLearning capabilities in Adobe Captivate. All Acrobat Connect Professional training sessions are converted to audio-only mp3 les that representatives can download for podcasting. The sound les are deployed via an RSS feed on one of two dedicated iTunes channels, one for sales and one for technical sta . Previously, important product and service issues were typically communicated via non-interactive documentation, such as an e-mail that would trickle down the sales management pipeline to teams. Now, if a product change or new competitive information becomes available, Adobe can use Acrobat Connect Professional to engage hundreds of sales people in real-time web conferences. Equally important, the session can be recorded, so people who were unable to attend the live session can replay it on demand. While the Adobe sales organization hasn’t precisely measured the cost savings from its eLearning practices, the e ciencies are evident. For instance, since online learning can reduce the need to bring hundreds of sales representatives together for on-site meetings, the savings are signi cant. Plus, the resulting sales performance can boost the company’s revenues. “Providing e ective, on-time training could enable a rep to greatly increase the size of closed deals,” says Alper. “With hundreds of sales managers worldwide, the cumulative bene ts are substantial.” Additional e ciencies in eLearning are achieved thanks to the use of Adobe Flex to create a dynamic, engaging interface for launching eLearning services. Adds Alper, “We now have an intuitive front end to direct employees easily to training where and when they need it.” Transforming eLearning and engagement For Marc Eaman, an Adobe evangelist and member of the Technical Marketing Team, eLearning has provided several advantages. He has been doing product demonstrations at the company for eleven years. During most of that time, demonstrations were painstakingly created with written scripts that told sales managers what-to-say and where-to-click. Many sales and training sta felt there had to be a better way and responded with a resounding: “show us, don’t tell us.”
  • 87. Adobe uses its software and technologies, including Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional, Adobe Presenter, Acrobat Professional, Adobe Captivate, Flash, and Flex to integrate rich, dynamic eLearning into its operations and provide sta with easy access to valuable learning. “By leveraging Adobe Using capabilities in Adobe Captivate and Acrobat Connect Professional so ware, the Adobe tools and making demonstrations have been transformed from scripts to interactive guides. e new model is an on-demand Acrobat Connect Professional session that includes some slides to help position the learning relevant and solution, followed by a screen recording captured in Adobe Captivate of the actual demonstra- better connected tion highlighted. A document is also included—via the Connect Attachment feature—to provide to work ow, Adobe eld representatives with more detail if necessary. employees experience Currently, more than 150 courses are available to the eld. At the same time, the training group is the same bene ts that using another innovative technique—branded InField discussion forums—that targets technical our customers enjoy— personnel and sales representatives through online forums. “Forums are popular for two reasons,” eLearning environments, explains Eaman. “First, if one sales representative has a question, chances are ten others do as well. tools, and resources Second, product experts do not like having to answer the same question repeatedly.” that engage people and Forum question and answer sessions are always available and searchable, enabling users to nd keep them coming back relevant topics and resolutions quickly. e system also allows the uploading of les to facilitate the again and again.” exchange of samples and requested documents. Product experts are assigned as forum moderators Ellen Wagner, to respond to questions generated by the system. Notably, RSS feeds are incorporated into forums Director of eLearning, Adobe Systems, Incorporated so moderators can simply subscribe to topics. With the help of eLearning capabilities in Adobe Captivate, the company can meet the needs of its occasionally connected sales force. “We convert all our Acrobat Connect Professional training sessions to audio-only .mp3 les that representatives can download for podcasting,” says Eaman. e sound les are deployed via an RSS feed on one of two dedicated iTunes channels, one for sales and one for technical sta . For More Information Integrated learning management www.adobe.com/products/acrobatconnectpro/ Anne Storer, director of learning and development at Adobe, uses Adobe solutions for eLearning e orts aimed at helping managers handle infrequently applied tasks, meet compliance requirements, provide technical training, and deploy leadership development materials. Regardless of the Adobe solutions used, the goal is to impart knowledge in engaging modules that quickly and clearly convey desired learning. “Newer approaches to learning are intimately connected to technology,” says Ellen Wagner, director of eLearning at Adobe. “By leveraging Adobe tools and making learning relevant and better connected to work ow, Adobe employees experience the same bene ts that our customers enjoy—eLearning environments, tools, and resources that engage people and keep them coming back again and again.” Adobe Systems Incorporated Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Captivate, Contribute, Flash, Flex, LiveCycle, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks 345 Park Avenue of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. San Jose, CA 95110-2704 USA © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. www.adobe.com 95009461 05/07 A
  • 88. The eLearning Guild 375 E Street, Suite 200 Santa Rosa, CA 95404 +1.707.566.8990 www.eLearningGuild.com